# AC 65-9A: Airframe & Powerplant Mechanics General Handbook

- Type: Advisory circular (guidance, not mandatory unless a rule or AD requires it)
- Status: Historical
- Approved: January 1, 1976
- Last reviewed: October 22, 2024
- This change: Canceled by FAA Handbook, FAA-H-8083-9. FAA-H-8083-30A (Aviation Maintenance Technician Handbook-General) has replaced AC 65-9A.
- Family: AC 65-9
- 14 CFR parts: 1
- Pages: 521
- PDF: https://openairdocs.org/files/sha256/f9/ea/f9eaae5ef3d38f23fe1dbd885e17e97704411c9938cecfa8a1cab574a38da38b
- FAA DRS: https://drs.faa.gov/browse/excelExternalWindow/A563729E3DAAC121862569F1005F80F1.0001
- DRS record last changed: November 21, 2025
- Page: https://openairdocs.org/ac/65-9

## Versions

- [AC 65-9A](https://openairdocs.org/ac/65-9) (Historical), approved Jan 1, 1976, 521 pages. Canceled by FAA Handbook, FAA-H-8083-9. FAA-H-8083-30A (Aviation Maintenance Technician Handbook-General) has replaced AC 65-9A.

## ADs that cite it (1)

- [AD 80-07-03](https://openairdocs.org/ad/80-07-03): Oil Pressure · Cessna R172K. Effective Mar 31, 1980

## Text

Each page's text from the PDF; open the PDF at a page with #page=N.

### Page 1

AC65-9A Airframe 4 Powerplant

**MECHANICS**

**GENERAL HANDBOOK**

**CONSOLIDATED**

REPRINT (includes CHG 1, dated 3/31/99) U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

### Page 2

. " :.,,-~-=~-'" -~-----"===---'--.'\,i/

**AIRFRAME AND POWERPLANT**

**MECHANICS**

**GENERAL HANDBOOK U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION**

FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION Flight Standards Service First Edition 1970 First Revision 1976 For sale by the U.S. Government Printing Office Superintendent of Documents, Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-9328 . :~\

### Page 3

PREFACE This handbook was developed and first printed in 1970 as one of a series of three handbooks for persons preparing for mechanic certification with airframe or powerplant ratings, or both. It is intended that this handbook will provide basic information on principles, fundam€ntals, and technical procedures in the subject matter areas common to both the airframe and powerplant ratings. Emphasis in this volume is on theory and methods of application.

The handbook is designed to aid Students enrolled in a formal course_of instruc­ tion as well as the individual who is studying on his own. Since the knowledge requirements for the airframe and powerplant ratings closely parallel each other in some subject areas, the chapters which discuss fire protection systems and electrical systems contain some material which is also duplicated in the Airframe and Power­ plant Mechanics Powerplant Handbook, AC 65-12A, and the Airframe and Power­ plant Mechanics Airframe Handbook, AC 65-ISA.

This volume contains information on aircraft ·drawings, weight and balance, air­ craft materials and processesi physics, electricity, inspection, ground support, and tools. Knowledge gained from the study of this handbook is essential before pro­ ceeding in a course of study in either the airframe or powerplant handbooks.

Because there are so many diffrrent types of airframes and powerplants in use today, it is reasonable to expect that differences exist in the components and systems of each. To avoid undue repetition, the practice of using representative systems and units is carried out throughout the handbook. Subject matter treatment is from a generalize-cl point of view~ and should be supplemented by reference to manufacturers' manuals or other textbooks if more detail is desired. This handbook is not intended to repiace, substitute for, or supersede official regulations or the manufacturers' instructions.

Grateful acknowledgement is extended to the manufacturers of airframe and airframe components for their cooperation in making material available for inclusion.

Copyright material is used by special permission of the following organizations and may not be extracted or reproduced without permission of the copyright owner.

Monsanto Chemical Skvdrol ® Fluids Townsend Corporation Ch.erry Rivets J. 0. King, Inc.

Gravines. Inc.

Walter Kidde DuPont DeNemours National Fire Protection Association National Association of Fire Extinguisher Distributors Flight Safety Foundation American Petroleum Institute Exxon Parker Hannifin Acres Sleeves Acres Sleeves Fire Extinguishers Fire Extinguishers Fire Extinguishants Fire Extinguisher and Extinguishant Specifications Fire Extinguishers Refueling Data Aviation Fuels A\'iation Fuels Aircraft Fittings The advancements in aeronautical technology dictate that an instructional hand­ book must be under continuous review and brought up to date periodicaliy to be valid. Flight Standards requested comments. from the cntificatE'<l aviation mainte­ nance technician schools, on the three handbooks. As a result of this survey, the handbooks have beE'n updated to this extent: nE'w matPrial has been added in the areas which ·were indicated as being deficient, and some material has been real'ranged to improve the teachability of the handbooks.

iii

### Page 4

We would appreciate having errors brought to our attention, as well as receiving suggestions for improving the- usefulness of the handbooks. Comments and sugges­ tions will be retained in our files until such time as the next revision will be accom­ plished.

Address all correspondence relating to these handbooks to:

U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration F1ight Standards National Field Office P.O. Box 25082 Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73125 The companion handbooks to AC 65-9A are the Airframe and Powerplant Me­ chanics Powerplant Handbook, AC 65-12A, and the Airframe an-d Powerplant Me· chanics Airframe Handbook, AC 65-lSA.

iv

### Page 5

-~ ~·--""-~-·-==~-~~~~-'?<1."_:,c ..,,-..

',;·-·

CONTENTS PREFACE- ______________________________________________________ _ iii CONTENTS ____________________________ . _________________________ _ V

CHAPTER L MATHEMATICS Introduction _______________ ~----------------------------------- 1 Whole Numhers __________________________ _ 1 Fractions ____________________________________________________ . __ 2 Mixed Numbers_ .. __________________________________ . --- _______ _ 4 Decimals ------------------- _______ -------------- _____________ _ 5 Ratio--------------------------------------------------------- 10 Proportion ____________________________________________________ _ 11 Positive and Negative Numbers _________________________________ _ 11 Powers and Roots ___________________________________ - _______ _ 12 Computing Area_____________________ _ _________________ _ 15 Computing the Volume of Solids ______________ _ 20 Graphs and Charts ___________ _ 23 _!\!Ieasurement Systems _________ ----------- ____ ----------- --- ----- 27 Functions of Numbers ------------------------------------------- 31 CHAPTER 2. AIRCRAFT DRAWINGS Prints ________________________________________________________ _ 35 Working Drawings ______________ ------------ _______ ----------- __ 35 Care and Use of Drawings. ____ -.- ____________________ .. _____ . ____ _ 36 Title Blocks ___________________________________________________ _ 36 Bill of Material_ _________ - ___ - ___ - ___ - - 37 Other Data---------------------------------------------------- 38 Methods of Illustrating Objects ____________________________ _ 39 Meaning of Lines __________________________ .. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 42 Reading Drawings. ____________________________________________ _ 45 Diagrams_________________________________________ _ ______ _ 46 Drawing Sketches _____________________________________________ _ 49 Drawing Symbols ______________________________________________ _ 50 Care of Drafting Instruments _______ ----------- ---------------- 50 Microfihn _____________________________________________________ _ 50 CHAPTER 3. AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND BALANCE Purpose ______________________________________________________ _ 53 "".- .··• Need for Reweighing ___________________________________________ _ 53 Theory of Weight and Balance __________________________________ _ 53 Mathematical Proof_ ___________________________________________ _ 54 Weight and Balance Data ______________________________________ _ 54 Terminology __________________________________________________ _ 54 Aircraft Weighing Procedure ____________________________________ _ 59 Weight and Balance Extreme Conditions _________________________ _ 65 Installation of Ballast_ _________________________________________ _ 67 V '

### Page 6

,· Loading Graphs and C. G. Envelopes_____________________________ 69 Electronic Weighing Equipment__________________________________ 70 Helicopter Weight and Balance___________________________________ 70 CHAPTER 4. FUELS AND FUEL SYSTEMS General_______________________________________________________ 73 Characteristics and Properties of Aviation Gasoline_________________ 73 Turbine Engine Fuels___________________________________________ 77 Fuel System Contamination______________________________________ 78 Fuel System___________________________________________________ 81 Fuel System Components _________________________ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 82 Fuel System Indicators__________________________________________ 88 M ultiengine Fuel Systems_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 93 Fuel Jettison Systems ____ -------------------- ----------------- 94 Troubleshooting the Fuel System_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 94 CHAPTER 5. FLUID LINES AND FITTINGS General_ _ _ _ _ _. _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 99 Plumbing Lines _____________________________________ - ___ -- _ _ _ _ _ 99 Identification of :vfaterials ---------------------------------------- 99 Flexible Hose ____________ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ 100 Plumbing Connectors ______________ .. _____ .. ______________________ 103 Tube Forming Processes_________________________________________ 108 Repair of \fetal Tube Lines______________________________________ 113 Fabrication and Replacement of Flexible Hose ________________ .____ 114 Installation of Rigid Tubing_____________________________________ 115 Plumbing Assembly Precautions__________________________________ 117 Support Clamps----------------------------------------------- 118 CHAPTER 6. AIRCRAFT HARDWARE, MATERIALS, AND

PROCESSES Aircraft Hardware Threaded _Fasteners _______ _ Aircraft Bolts_ _ _ _ _ _ .. ____ _ 121 121 122 Specia I -Purpose Bolts _________________ - - - - - - - - - - - -_ - _ - - - - - - - - - - - 123 Aircraft Nuts __ . ________ . ____________ - ----- _ ---- ------- ----- -- 126 Aircraft w-as hers ___ . _ ... "· ______________________________ - __ - - ___ _ Installation of Nuts and Bolts _______________________________ - ___ _ Torque and Torque 'Wrenches -----------------------------------­ Aireraft Screws_ Repair of Damaged Internal Threads -----------------------------­ RPpair of Damaged Holes with Acres Fastners Sleeves ---------------­ Turnlock Fasteners_ Control Cables_ Push- Pull Tuhe Linkage _______________________________________ _ Pins __ _ Safety :Methods_ Rivets ____ _ Plastics _____ _ Rubber __ Shock Ah1-iorber ConL _________________________________________ _ Seals __ . __________________________________ . _____ _ Ga:-.kets __ Wipers_ vi 130 132 132 135 137 138 141 143 144 144 145 150 163 164 166 166 168 169

### Page 7

Sealing Compounds . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . 16 9

Corrosion Control … 171

F orrns of Corrosion … 172

Factors Affecting Corrosion … 173

Preventive Maintenance … 173

Inspection ........................................................................................................................................................................ 17 4

Corrosion-Prone Areas … 174

Corrosion Removal … 176

Corrosion of Ferrous Metals … 177

Corrosion of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys … 177

Corrosion of Magnesium Alloys … 179

Treatment of Titanium and Titanium Alloys … 180

Protection of Dissimilar Metal Contacts … 180

Corrosion Limits .............................................................................................................................................................. 180 '.·:.

Processes and Materials Used in Corrosion Control … 181

Chemical Treatments … 183

Protective Paint Finishes ......................................................................................................... : … 185

Aircraft Cleaning … 185

Interior Cleaning … 186

Powerplant Cleaning … 188

Solvent Cleaners … 188

Emulsion Cleaners … 189

Soaps and Detergent Cleaners … 189

Mechanical Cleaning Materials … 190

Chemical Cleaners … 190

Structural Metals … 191

Metalworking Processes ........ , … 193

Ferrous Aircraft Metals … 194

Nonferrous Aircraft Metals … 198

Substitution of Aircraft Metals … 204

Principles of Heat Treatment … 205

Heat-Treating Equipment … 205

Heat Treatment of Ferrous Metals … 208

Casehardening … 211

Heat Treatment of Nonferrous Metals … 212

Solution Heat Treatment … 213

Precipitation Heat Treating … 214

Annealing of Aluminum Alloys … 216

Heat Treatment of Aluminum Alloy Rivets … 216

Heat Treatment of Magnesium A!loys … 216

Heat Treatment of Titanium … 217

Hardness Testing … 218

**CHAPTER 7. PHYSICS**

General … 221

Matter … 221

Fluids … 222

Temperature … 225

Pressure … 226

Kinetic Theory of Gases … 227

Atmosphere … 236

Bernoulli's Principle … 242

Machines … 243

vii

### Page 8

Work, Power, and Energy … 249

Motion of Bodies … 253

Heat … 256

Sound … 261

**CHAPTER 8. BASIC ELECTRICITY**

General … 267

Matter … 267

Static Electricity … 268

Electromotive Force … 271

Current Flow … 272

Resistance … 272

Basic Circuit Components and Symbols ........................................................................................................................... 2 7 4

Ohm's Law … 282

Series D.C. Circuits … 286

Parallel D.C. Circuits … 290

Series-Parallel D.C. Circuits … 292

Voltage Dividers .............................................................................................................................................................. 2 94

Rheostats and Potentiometers … 296

Magnetism … 298

Storage Batteries.. 306 Lead-Acid Batteries . .. 307

Nickel-Cadmium Batteries … 313

Circuit Protective and Control Devices … 315

Switches … 317

D.C. Measuring Instruments … 320

Multimeters … 325

Voltmeters … 327

Olunmeters … 329

Basic Circuit Analysis and Troubleshooting … 332

Alternating Current and Voltage … 338

lndnctance … 344

Capacitance … 346

Ohm's Law for A.C. Circuits … 352

Transformers … 358

Magnetic Amplifiers … 364

Vacnnm Tubes … 366

Transistors.. 369 Rectifiers ....................................... .

Filtering .......................... .

A. C. Measuring Instruments .............. .

Frequency Meters .......................................................... .

CHAPTER 9. AIRCRAFT GENERATORS AND MOTORS D.C. Generators ......................... .

Types of D. C. Generators ..

Regulation of Generator Voltage ..... .

Differential Relay Switch ...... .

Parallelling Generators ..................................... .

D. C. Generator Maintenance ............................ .

Voltage Regulator Operation ...... .

Alternators .................. .

Brushless Alternator ........ .

Combined A.C. and D.C. Electrical Systems ............ .

viii

. … 3TI

. … 378

. … 380

. ................................................................................... 3~ 387

. . ··········· … 394

. … 398

. … 402

. … 403

... 404

. … 407

. … 411

. 414 . 415

### Page 9

Voltage Regulation of Alternators _______________________ ---- ____ _ 417 Alternator Constant.Speed Drive ________________________________ _ 423 Synchronizing Alternators ______________________________________ _ 430 Alternator Maintenance ________________________________________ _ 433 Inverters _____________________________________________________ _ 435 D.C. Motors ________________________________________ - --- - - ___ _ 438 Types of D.C. Motors ______ ··------- ____________________________ _ 445 A.C. Motors __________________________________________________ _ 451 Types of A.C. Motors ___________________________________ -.- _____ _ 452 Maintenance of A.C. Motors ___________________________________ _ 459 CHAPTER 10. INSPECTION FUNDAMENTALS Genera] ______________________________________________________ _ 461 Required Inspections _______________________________________ .- ___ _ 461 Inspec6on Techniques __________________________________________ _ 461 Checklist ____ ---------- _____ ----- ---- ------ --------- -------- __ _ 462 Aircraft Logs _____________ . ________________________ . ___________ _ 463 Special Inspections ________________________________________ -··- __ _ 463 Publications ___________________________________ - ___ - - - - - - - - - - - - 464 Magnetic Partide Inspection _____________________ . ______________ _ 469 Magnetizing Equipment_ ________________ .. ___________ _ 474 Demagnetization ____________________________________ . _________ _ 477 Dye-Penetrant Inspection ______________________________________ _ 477 RadiographY--------------------------------------------------- 479 Ultrasonic Testing _____________________________________________ _ 481 Eddy Current Testing _________ --------- _____ :... --------- _____ ---- _ 485 Visual Inspection ______________________________________________ _ 486 ; '."' CHAPTER 11. GROUND HANDLING, SAFETY, AND

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT Introduction __________________________________________________ _ 489 General _______________________ =- ______________________________ _ 489 Starting Engines _ --------------- ______ ---------- _____ ---------- 489 Turboprop Engines _____ . ____________________ . _________________ _ 491 Turbojet Engines __ .. ___________________________________________ _ 492 Electrical Power _______________________________________________ _ 495 Hydraulic Power _______________________________________________ _ 495 Air Conditioning and Heating Units______ _ _____________________ _ 496 Ground Support Air Start Units _________________________________ _ 496 Preoiling Equipment_ __ 497 Aircraft Fueling___ _ ___ _ 497 Fire---------------------------------------------------------- 500 Recommended i\farkings to Indicate Extinguisher Suitability ---------- 503 Aircraft Fire Extinguishers ______ ------- ___ ----- _ -------------- __ 503 Servicing Aircraft with OiL ______________________________________ _ 505 l\tlain tenance Safety ____________________________________________ _ 507 Servicing Aircraft Oxygen Systems _______________________________ _ 508 Aircraft Tiedown ______________________________________________ _ 508 Securing Light Aircraft_ ________________________________________ _ 511 Securing Heavy Aircraft_ _______________________________________ _ 512 Aircraft Tied own for Storm Conditions ___________________________ _ 512 Movement of Aircraft_ ________________________ ~ _________ _ 517 IX

### Page 10

Jacking Aircraft- ________________________________ --· ___ ----_ - __ - 523 Cold Weather Suggestions_______________________________________ 525 CHAPTER 12. HANDTOOLS AND MEASURING DEVICES Introduction ________ ------------------------------------------ 529 General-Purpose Tools. ______________________________________ --- 529 Metal Cutting Tools _____________ . _____________________ -- __ -- -- - 534 Layout and Measuring Tools_____________________________________ 542 Taps and Dies ________________________ .________________________ 547

- _;, X

### Page 11

INTRODUCTION The use of mathematics is so woven into every area of everyday life that seldom if ever does one fully realize how very helpless we would be in the performance of most of our daily work without the knowledge of even the simplest form of mathe­ matics. Many persons have difficulty with rela­ tively simple computations involving only ele­ mentary mathematics. Performing mathematical computations with success requires an under­ standing of the correct procedures and continued practice in the use of mathematical manipulations.

A person entering the aviation field will be required to perform with accuracy. The aviation mechanic is often involved in tasks that require mathematical computations of some sort. Toler­ ances in aircraft and engine components are often critical, making it necessary to measure within a thousandth or ten-thousandth of an inch. Because of the close tolerances to which he must adhere, it is important that the aviation mechanic be able to make accurate measurements and mathe­ matical calculations.

Mathematics may he thought of as a kit of tools, each mathematical operation being com­ pared to the use of one of the tools in the solving of a problem. The basic operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication 1 and division are the tools available to aid us in solving a particular problem.

WHOLE NUMBERS Addition of Whole Numbers The process of finding the combined amount of two or more numbers is called addition. The answer is called the sum.

When adding several whole numbers, such as 4567, 832, 93122, and 65, place them under each other with their digits in columns so that the last, or right hand, digits are in the same column.

1 c--·- CHAPTER 1

MA TH EMA TICS When adding decimals such as 45.67, 8.32,

9.8122, and .65, place them under each other so that the decimal points are in a straight ffup-and­ down '' line.

To check addition, either add the figures again in the same order, or add them in reverse order.

Subtraction of Whole Numbers Subtraction is the process of finding the differ­ ence between two numbers by taking the smaller from the larger of the two numbers. The number which is subtracted is caHed the subtrahend, the other number the minuend~ and their difference is called the remainder. To find the remainder, write the subtrahend under the minuend, as in addition.

Beginning at the right, subtract each figure in the subtrahend from the figure above it and write the individual remainder below in the same column.

When the process is completed, the number below the subtrahend is the remainder.

To check subtraction, add the remainder and the subtrahend together. The sum of the two should equal the minuend.

Multiplication of Whole Numbers The process of finding the quantity obtained by repeating a given number a specified number of times is called multiplication. More simply stated, the process of multiplication is, in effect, a case of repeated addition in which all the num­ bers being added are identical. Thus, the sum of 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 = 24 can be expressed by multi­ plication as 6 X 4 = 24. The numbers 6 and 4 are known as the factors of the multiplication, and 24 as the product.

In multiplication, the product is formed by multiplying the factors. When one of the factors is a single-digit integer ( whole number), the product is formed by multiplying the single-di~it integer with each digit of the other factor from right to left, carrying when necessary.

### Page 12

- _;, When both facton are multiple,digit integers, the product is formed by multiplying each digit in the multiplying factor with the other factor.

Exercise. care, when writing down the partial products formed, to make certain that the extreme right digit lines up under the multiplying digit.

It is then a matter of simple addition to find the final product.

EXAMPLE Determine the cost of 18 spark plugs that cost $3.25 each.

3.25 Xl8 2600 325

58.50 When multiplying a series of numbers together~ the final product will he the same regardless of the order in which the numbers are arranged.

EXAMPLE MULTIPLY: (7) (3) (5) (2) = 210 7 21 105 X3 XS X2 or 21 105 210 Division of Whole Numbers 7 3 35 XS X2 X6 35 6 210 The process of finding how many times one number is contained in a second number is called division. The first number is called the divisor, the second the dividend, and the result is the quotient.

Of the four basic operations with integers, di­ vision is the only one that involves trial and error in its solution. It is necessary to guess at the proper quotient digits, and though experience will tend to lessen the number of trials, everyone will guess incorrectly at some time or another.

Placing the decimal point correctly in the quo­ tient quite often presents a problem. When di­ viding a decimal by a decimal, an important step is to first remove the decimal from the divisor.

This is accomplished by shifting the decimal point to the right the number of places needed to eliminate it. Next, move the decimal point to the right as many places in the dividend as was necessary to move it in the divisor, and then proceed as in ordinary division.

FRACTIONS A fraction is an indicated division that ex­ presses one or more of the equal parts into which a unit is divided. For example, the fraction f indi­ cates that the whole has been divided into 3 equal parts and that 2 of these parts are being used or considered. The number above the line is the numerator; and the number below the line is the denominator.

If the numerator of a fraction is equal to or larger than the denominator, the fraction is known as an improper fraction. In the fraction \~, if the indicated division is performed, the improper fraction is changed to a mixed number, which is a whole number and a fraction:

15 8 7 1-8 A complex fraction is one that contains one or more fractions or mixed numbers in either the numerator or denominator. The following frac­ tions are examples:

1 5 3 2 8 4 3j 2 ; 2; 5; 2 -3 8 3 A decimal fraction is obtained by dividing the numerator of a fraction by the denominator and showing the quotient as a decimal. The fraction i equals 5 + 8 = .625.

A fraction does not change its value if both numerator and denominator are multiplied or di­ vided by the same number.

1 3 3 1 -x-=-=- 4 3 12 4 The same fundamental operations performed with whole numbers can also be performed with fractions. These are addition, subtraction, multi­ plication, and division.

Addition and Subtraction of Common Fractions In order to add or subtract fractions, all the denominators must be alike. In working with fractions, as in whole numbers, the rule of likeness applies. That is, only like fractions may he added or subtracted.

When adding or subtracting fractions that have like denominators, it is only necessary to add or

### Page 13

subtract the numerators and express the result as the numerator of a fraction whose denominator is the common denominator. When the denomi­ nators are unlike, it is necessary to first reduce the fractions to a common denominator before pro­ ceeding with the addition or subtraction process.

**EXAMPLES**

1. A certain switch installation requires i-inch plunger travel before switch actuation occurs. If }-inch travel is required after actuation, what will be the total plunger travel?

FIRST: Add the numerators.

5+1=6 NEXT: Express the result as the numerator of a fraction whose denominator 1s the common denominator.

5 1 6 -+-=-8 8 8

2. The total travel of a jackscrew is -H- of an inch. If the travel in one direction from the neutral position is °f6 of an inch, what is the travel in the opposite direction?

FIRST: Subtract the numerators.

13 - 7 = 6 NEXT: Express the result as the numerator of a fraction whose denominator is the common denominator.

13 16 7 16 6 16

3. Find· the outside diameter of a section of tubing that has a }-inch inside diameter and a combined wall thickness of i inch.

FIRST: Reduce the fractions to a common denominator.

NEXT:

1 2 - = -· 4 8' Add the numerators, and express the result as the numerator of a fraction whose denominator is the common denominator.

2 5 7 -+-=-8 8 8

4. The tolerance for rigging the aileron droop of an airplane is ; inch plus or minus -} inch.

3 What is the minimum droop to which the aileron can be rigged?

FIRST: Reduce the fractions to a common denominator.

NEXT:

1 8 -=- 5 40 Subtract the numerators, and express the result as in the above examples.

35 40 8 27 --=-40 40 Finding the least Common Denominator When the denominators of fractions to he added or subtracted are such that a common denomi­ nator cannot be determined readily, the LCD (least common denominator) can he found by the continued division method.

To find the LCD of a group of fractions, write the denominators in a horizontal row. Next, divide the denominators in this row by the smallest integer t.hat will exactly divide two or more of the denominators. Bring down to a new row all the quotients and numbers that were not divisible.

Continue this process until there are no two num­ bers in the resulting row that are divisible by any integer other than one. Multiply together all the divisors and the remaining terms in the last row to obtain the least common denominator.

EXAMPLE What is the LCD for -t lfi", -l-~, -}!?

FIRST: Write the denominators in a hori­ zontal row and divide this row by the smallest integer that will exactly di­ vide two or more of the numbers.

2 [8 20 36 45 4 10 18 45 NEXT: Continue this process until there are no two numbers in the resulting row that are divisible by any integer other than one.

2 2 3 3 5 8 4 2 2 2 2 20 10 5 5 5 1 36 45 18 45 9 45 3 15 1 5 1 1

### Page 14

THEN: Multiply together all the divisors and remaining terms in the last row to obtain the LCD.

LCD = 2 X 2 X 3 X 3 X 5 X 2 = 360 Multiplication of Fractions The product of two or more fractions is obtained by multiplying the numerators to form the numer­ ator of the product and by multiplying the denomi.

nators to forrn the ·denominator of the product.

The resulting fraction is then reduced to its lowest terms. A common denominator need not be found for this operation, as the new denominator in most cases will be different from that of all the original fractions.

EXAMPLE What is the product of J X ti X f?

FIRST: Multiply the numerators together.

3 X 12 X 1 = 36 NEXT: Multiply the denominators together.

5 X 22 X 2 = 220 THEN: Reduce the resulting fraction to its lowest terms.

36 9 220 55 Cancellation Cancellation is a technique of dividing out or cancelling all commo11 factors that exist between numerators and denominators. This aids in locat­ ing the ultimate product by eliminatirtg much of the burdensome multiplicati~n.

EXAMPLE What is the product of-}% X {?

The product could be found by multiplying 18 X 5 and 10 X 3, then dividing the product of the numerators by the product of the denomi­ nators. However, a much easier method of solution is hy cancellation. It is apparent that the 10 in the denominator and the 5 in the numerator can both be divided an exact number of times by 5.

4 Also, the 18 and l are bollh e,eaetly divisible by 3.

2 1 The resulting 6 in the numerator and the 2 in the denominator are both divisible by 2.

3 6 1 1'8 $ 3 X 1 3 i0 X Z = 1 X 1 = 1 = 3 i 1 1 The fraction is thus reduced to its lowest terms, and the final multiplication and division steps are performed with ease when compared with the task of multiplying and dividing the larger fractions.

Division of Common Fractions The division of common fractions is accom­ plished most conveniently by converting the prob­ lem into a multiplication of two common fractions.

To divide one fraction by another fraction, invert the divisor fraction and multiply the numerators together and the denominators together. This is known as the inverted divisor method.

Always keep in mind the order in which the fractions are written. It is important in division that the operations be performed in the order indicated. Also, remember that it is always the divisor that is inverted, never the dividend.

MIXED NUMBERS Mixed numbers can be added, subtracted, multi­ plied, or divided by changing them to improper fractions and proceeding as when performing the operations with other fractions.

EXAMPLE A piece of tubing 6--{-r; inches long is cut from a piece 24! inches long. Allowing / 6 inch for the cut,· what is the length of the remaining piece?

FIRST: Reduce the fractional parts to like fractions and complete the subtrac­ tion process.

13183141 2 16 - 16 - 16 - 16 16 - 16 - 4

### Page 15

NEXT: Subtract the integer parts.

24 - 6 = 18 THEN: Combine the results obtained in each step.

l 18 + - = 4

DECIMALS 1 184 inches.

Decimals are fractions whose denominators are 10 or some multiple of 10, such as 100, 1,000, 10,000, etc. They are indicated by writing one or more digits to the right of a reference mark called a decimal point. Thus:

6 10 6 100 .6, both read six tenths.

.06, both read six hundredths.

6 l,OOO = .006, both read six thousandths.

When wntmg a decimal, any number of zeros may he written at the right end without changing the value of the decimal. This mav he illustrated in the following manner:

5 1 50 1 5 = - = -· 50 = - = -· . 10 2' . 100 2' .500 500 1,000 I 2 A decimal fraction that is written where there is no whole number as .6, .06, etc., is caHed a pure decimal. When a whole number and a decimal fraction are written together as 3.6, 12.2, 131.12, etc., the number is known as a mixed decimal.

2.34 Ohms

37.5 Ohms .09 Ohms FIGURE: 1-1. A series circuit.

5 Addition of Decimals When computing decimals, the rule of likeness requires that we add or subtract only like de­ nominations. This rule was discussed previously under addition and subtraction of whole numbers.

To add or subtract decimal expressions, arrange the decimals so that the decimal points align vertically, and add or subtract as with integers.

Place the decimal point in the result directly below the decimal points in the addends or minu­ end and subtrahend.

EXAMPLES The total resista_11ce of snies circuit ( figure 1-1) is equal to the sum of the individual re­ sistance:,. What is the total resistance for the diagram shown in this example?

.FIRST: Arrange the decimals in a vertical column so that the decimal points are in alinement.

2.34

37.5 . ()() NEXT: Complete the addition following the technique used in adding whole num­ bers. Place the decimal point in the result directly below the other decimal points.

2.34

37.5 .09

39.93 ohms Subtraction of Decimals A ~Pries circuit <"Ontaining two resistors has a total resistance of 37.27 ohms. One of the resistors has a vaJue of 14.88 ohms. \Vhat is the value of the remaining resistor?

FIRST: Arrange the decimals in a vertical eolumn so that the de{'imal points are in alinement.

NEXT:

37 .27 -14.88 Pt•rform the subtraction process using the procedure for subtracting whole numbers. Place the decimal point in the result directly below the other deeimal points.

37.27 -11.88 22 .39 ohm~

### Page 16

- .: ' Multiplication of Decimals The multiplication of a decimal by another decimal will always produce an answer smaller than either of the two numbers. When a decimal is multiplied by a whole number or by a mixed decimal, the answer will lie between the two numbers.

When multiplying a decimal fraction by an integer or another decimal, establishing the po­ sition of the decimal point in the product causes the greatest amount of difficulty.

To multiply decimals, ignore the decimal points and multiply the terms as though they were whole numbers. To locate the decimal point in the product, begin at the right of the product and point off toward the left the number of decimal places that will equal the sum of the decimal places in the quantities multiplied.

EXAMPLE Using the formula, Watts = Amperes X Volt­ age, what is the wattage of an electric heater that uses 9.45 amperes from a 120-volt source?

FIRST: Arrange the terms and multiply. Ig­ nore the decimal point.

9.45 Xl20 000 1890 945 113400 NEXT: Locate the deci_mal point. Begin at the right of the product and point off toward the left the number of places that will equal the sum of the decimal places in the quantities multiplied.

9.45 Xl20 18900 945 1134.00 In some problems the number of digits in the product will be less than the sum of the decimal places in the quantities multiplied. Where this occurs, merely add zeros to the left of the product until the number of digits equals the sum of the decimal places in the quantities multiplied.

EXAMPLE Multiply .218 by .203.

FIRST: Arrange the terms and multiply, ignoring the decimal point.

.218 .203 654 4360 44254 NEXT: Locate the decimal point. Add a zero to the left of the product so that the number of places will equal the sum of the decimal places in the quantities mult plied.

.218 X.203 654 4360 .044254 Division of Decimals When one or both of the terms of a division problem involve decimal expressions, the quotient is found by converting the problem to one in­ volving a whole number.

Two facts relating to division of decimals that must he borne in mind are: ( 1) When the dividend and divisor are multiplied by the same number, the quotient remains unchanged; and (2) if the divisor is a whole number, the decimal place in the quotient will align vertically with the decimal in the dividend when the problem is expressed in long division form.

To divide decimal expressions, count off to the right of the decimal point in the dividend the same number of places that are located to the right of the decimal point in the divisor. Insert a caret ( /\) to the right of the last digit counted.

If the number of decimal places in the dividend is Jess than the number of decimal places in the divisor, add zeros to the dividend, remembering that there must be at least as many decimal places in the dividend as in the divisor. Divide the terms, disregarding the decimal points en­ tirely. Place the decimal point in the quotient so that it alines vertically with the caret mark in the dividend.

### Page 17

EXAMPLE The wing area of a certain airplane is 245 square feet; its span is 40.33 feet. What is the mean chord of its wings'?

FIRST: Arrange the terms as in long division and move the decimal point to the right, adding zeros as necessary, and insert a caret.

40.33,.J245.00._ NEXT: Divide the terms, disregarding the decimal points entirely. Add ad~ ditional zeros to the right to permit carrying the quotient to the desired accuracy.

6 07 40 .33,,,1245. 00,.00 241 98 3 020 0 000 3 0200 2 8221 1979 THEN: Place the decimal point in the quo­ tient so that it alines vertically with the caret mark in the dividend.

6. 07 feet

40. 33,.[21500,.60 24198 3020 0000 30200 28221 1979 Rounding Off Decimals There i:'.\ a ~eneral tende1H') lo think of all numbers as lwing prc('isc. ,\etually the whole realm of rneas11rement involves numl,ers that are only approximations of precise numbers. J<"'or example, measurements of length. area, and vol­ ume are al hest approximations. The degree of accuracy of 1licse mcasurem<'llls depends on the refinement of tht.~ measuring instrumenlt-i.

Occasionally it is neecssary to round a numher to some value that it-i practieal to use. For example, a measurement is ("omputed lo be 29.4948 inches.

It is impraclical, if not impossible, to measure this accurately with a stet>l rule ,vhich is accurate only to·,/.- of an inch.

7 To use this measurement, we can use the process of Hrounding. ' 1 A decimal expression is Hrounded off" by retaining the lligits for a certain number of places and discarding the rest. The retained number is an approximation of the computed or exact number. The degree of accuracy desired determines the number of digits to Le retained.

When the <ligit immediately to the right of the last retaineJ digit is a 5, or greater than 5, increase the last retained <ligit hy I. W'J1en the digit imme,liately to the right of the last retained digit is less than 5, leave the last retained digit unchanged.

EXA~IPLE Round 29.'±9,1.S to the nearest tenth.

FIRST: Determine the number of digits to retain. In this case one-tenths being the first place to the right of the decimal point.

29A948 NEXT: Change the value of the last retained digit, if required. In this case, since 9 is greater than 5, the final decimal is expressed thus:

29 . 4948 becomes 29. 5 inches.

Converting Decimals to Common Fractions To change a decimal fraction to a common fraction, count the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. Express the number as the numerator of a fraction whose denominator is l followed by the number of zeros that will equal the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

EXAMPLE Express .375 as a common fraction.

FIRST: Count the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

.375 I I\ 1 2 3 NEXT: Express the number as the numerator of a fraction whose denominator is l followed by the number of zeros that will equal the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

375 ·375 = 1000 ·-':,

r.

(

### Page 18

C.

•':.

T 5 -'----'---~-- -- 3- 7 5-16 8 l FIGURE 1-2. Locating the hole center.

Many times a dimension appearing in a main­ tenance manual or on a blueprint is expressed in decimal fractions. In order to use the dimension, it must be converted to some equivalent approxi­ mation applicable to the available measuring de­ vice. From the mechanic'i', standpoint, the steel rule will he the device mot--t frcqurntly used.

To change a decimal ?o the nearest equiYalent fraction having a desired denominator, multiply the decimal by the dt>sircd denominator. The result will be the numerator of the desired fraction.

EXA\!PLE When accurate hol1•s of 1miform diameter are required, they are first drilleri -/i inch undcrsize and reamed to the df'"sir,~d rl.iameter. -W'hat size drill would he used before n.·arning a h0lc to .763?

FIRST: !\lultiply tht: d('('irnal ln· the desired denomin:itnr ,,r /i l.

:'liEXT:

TIIEl\:

X<•.1.

:)0.):2 . --.. J.,) I {) l{ound the prodtwl lo a whok numlwr ;:i,nd ('Xpre~,, it a,.; t!w numt•ralnr of1hc desireil dcnominatnr.

.j<)

48.832 ~- - (>.l To d<'tnminc tlw drill Rize. suhtrart "l\\ inch from the finish('d hok i:.ize.

JO 6 l l (d ., :' .inch drill.

1 8 Converting Common Fractions to Decimals To convert a common fraction, whether proper or improper, to a decimal, divide the numerator by the denominator. Add zeros to the right to permit carrying the quotient to the desired accu­ racy.

EXAMPLE Find the distance the center of the hole (figure 1-2) is from the plate edges when the center of the hole is in the center of the plate. Express the length and width of the plate in decimal forms, and then divide each by 2. Express the final result to the nearest 32nd.

FIRST:

NEXT:

THEN:

Change the mjxed numbers to im­ proper fractions.

7 87 5-- = -· 16 16' .5 29 3- = -8 8 Convert the improper fractions to decimal expressions.

87 5 3 0 - = .. 4 7o: 16 . , 29 = 3.625 8 Divide the decimal expressions by 2 to find the center of the plate.

.5.4375 - -~·-- = 2. 7188;

2 3 .625 = 1.813 2 FINALLY: Express the final results to the nearest 32nd.

2.7188

PERCENTAGE 26 1-32 Then· :ire- many problems that arise every day in\-olving tlw !Wrt't'tlt expression. The greatest 1111mlwr of perc,~ntage problems involve some kind of ('n111parison of a part to the whole. Such com~ pari~<ms h<'eomc percentage problems when the ratio fraf'tion is Pxpresscd as a percent.

A fraction having the specific power of 100 for the denominator is given the name percent. When writing these fractions, the percent symbol (%) is substituted for the denominator. Any common fraction or decimal can he expressed as a percent.

The fraction -} can thus he expresse<l as .20 or as :20 1wrcent or simply as 20%, Note .that the per­ ('Cnt. is the same as the decimal fraction except 1hat t.hc decimal point has been moved two places to the right and deleted after ••percent" or the symbol '"~,; "' has heen added.

### Page 19

Expressing a Decimal as a Percent To express a decimal as a percent, move the decimal point two places to the right ( add a zero if necessary) and affix the percent symbol.

EXAMPLE Express .90 as a percent.

:FIRST: :Move the decimal point two places to the right.

90.

NEXT: Affix the percent symbol to the right after dropping the decimal point.

90% Expressing a Percent as a Decimal Sometimes it ma)' he necessary to express a percent as a decimal. Keeping in mind that a percent is simply a decimal with the decimal point moved two places to the right, aH that is necessary to express a percent as a decimal is to move the decimal point two places to the left.

Expressing a Common Fraction as a Percent The technique involved in expressing a common fraction as a percent is essentially the same as that for a decimal fraction. The one difference is the procedure necessary to convert the fraction to a decimal.

EXAMPLE Express ~ as a percent.

FIRST: Convert the fraction to a det·imal.

s ·- = 5 + 8 = .625 8 NEXT: Move the de<'imal point two places to the right and affix the percent symbol.

.62.'i = 62.S(Xj Finding What Percent One Number is of Another Determining \dlat pncent one number is of another is done l1y writing the part number as the numerator of a fraction and the whole number as the denominator of that fraction, and expressing this fraction as a percentage.

EXAMPLE A motor rated as 12 horsepower is found to he delivering 10.75 horsepower. What is the motor efficiency expressed in percent'!

9 FIRST: Write the part number, 10.75, as the numerator of a fraction whose de­ nominator is the whole number, 12.

10.75 12 NEXT: Convert the fraction to its decima] equivalent.

10.75 + 12 = .8958 THEN: Express the decimal as a percent.

.8958 = 89.58% efficient.

Finding a Percent of a Given Number The technique used in determining a percent of a given number is based on the fundamental process of multiplication. It is necessary to state the desired percent as a decimal or common frac­ tion and multiply the given number by the percent expressed as a decimal or other fraction.

EXAMPLE The cruising speed of an airplane at an altitude of 7 .500 feet is 290 knots. What is the cruising speed at 9,000 feet if it has increased 6 percent?

FIRST: State the desired percent as a decimal.

6% = .06 NEXT: Multiply the given number by the decimal expression.

290 X .06 = 17.40 THEN: Add the new product to the given number. This is the new cruising speed.

290 + 17.4 = 307..1 knots.

Finding a Number When a Percent of It is Known To determine a number when a percent of it is known, express the percent as a decimal and divide the known number by the decimal expres­ s10n.

EXAMPLE Eighty ohms represent 52 percent of a circuit's total resistance. Find the total resistance of this circuit.

,'

### Page 20

FIRST: Express the percent as a decimal.

52% = .52 NEXT: Divide the known number by the decimal expression.

80 -;- .52 = 153.8 ohms total resistance.

RATIO An important application of the common frac­ tion is that of ratio. A ratio represents the com­ parison of one number to another number. Com­ parison by the use of ratios has widespread appli­ cation in the field of aviation. A ratio is used to express the comparison of the volume of a cylinder when the piston is at bottom center to the volume of a cylinder when the piston is at top center.

This is referred to as the compression ratio. The aspect ratio of an aircraft wing is a comparison of the wing span to the wing chord. The relation­ ship of maximum speed, wing area, wing span, loaded weight, and horsepower of different makes and models of aircraft may be compared through the use of ratios.

A ratio is the quotient of one number divided by another number, expressed in like terms. A ratio, therefore, is the fractional part that one number is of another. A ratio may be expressed as a fraction, or it may be written using the colon (:) as the symbol for expressing ratio; thus the ratio i can be written 7: 8.

Finding the Ratio of Two Quantitites To find a ratio, the first term is divided by the second term. Both quantities of both terms must be expressed in the same t.1:nits, and reduced to their lowest terms.

EXAMPLES I. What is the weight ratio of a fuel load of 800 gallons to one of 100080 pounds? Assume that the fuel weighs 7 .2 pounds per gallon.

FIRST: Express the fuel load in gallons as the numerator of a fraction whose de­ nominator is the fuel load in pounds.

800 gal. R= 10,080 lb.

NEXT:

R Express both quantities unit (pounds).

(800 X 7.2) lb.

10,080 lb.

in the same 10 THEN: Perform the indicated mathematical manipulations and reduce to lowest terms.

R = (800 X 7.2) 10,080 5760 10,080 4 = 7, or 4:7 What is the ratio in gallons?

FIRST: Express the ratio in fractional form.

R = 800 gal.

10,080 lb.

NEXT: Express both quantities in unit (gallons).

800 gal.

10.080 R

7.2 the same THEN: Perform the indicated mathematical manipulations and reduce to lowest terms.

800 R=--10,080 800 4 1,400 = 7' or 4' 7

7.2

2. If the cruising speed of an airplane is 200 knots and its maximum speed is 250 knots, what is the ratio of cruising speed to maximum speed?

FIRST: Express the cruising speed as the numerator of a fraction whose de­ nominator is the maximum speed.

R NEXT:

200 250 Reduce the resulting lowest terms.

fraction to its THEN: Express the result as a ratio of one.

4 R = 5. or .8:1 (Read 8/lOths to one) Finding the Quantity of the First Term Now consider the situation when the ratio and the quantity that corresponds to the secon<l term are given, and it is required to find the quantity that corresponds to the first term. To solve this type problem, multiply the term that corresponds to the second term by the fraction that represents the ratio.

### Page 21

EXAMPLE The given ratio is 5/7 and the quantity that corresponds to the second term is 35. Find the quantity that corresponds to the first term.

FIRST: Express the problem as the product of the second terin times the ratio.

35 X 5/7 = NEXT: Perform the indicated operation.

5 :iii X 5/1 = 25 l The first term is 25. The proof of this can he demonstrated by shm\·ing that the ratio of 25 to 35 is 5: 7, reduced to lowest terms.

25/35 = 5/7 Finding the Quantity of the Second Term To solve a problem of this type, the ratio of the two quantities and the quantity that corre­ sponds to the first term must he known. The solution is obtained by dividing the known number by the fraction that represents the ratio.

EXAMPLE The ratio of two quantities is 2/3; the quantity that corresponds to the first term is 100. Find the quantity that corresponds to the second term.

FIRST: Express the problem as the quotient of the first term divided by the ratio.

100 + 2/3 = NEXT: Perform the indicated operation.

100 + 2/3 = so !00 X 3/2 = 150 1 The second term is 150. Again, this can he proved by expressing 100 as a ratio of 150.

100/150 = 2/3 11

PROPORTION A proportion is a statement of equality between two or more ratios. Thus, 3 6 - =-;or 3:4 = 6:8. 4 8 This is read 3 is to 4 as 6 is to 8. The first and last terms of the proportion are cal1ed the extremes.

The second and third terms are called the means.

In any proportion, the product of the extremes is equal to the product of the means. In the proportion 2:3 = 4:6 the product of the extremes, 2 X 6, is 12; the product of the means, 3 X 4, also is 12. An in~ spection of any proportion will show this to be true. This rule simplifies the solution of many practical problems.

An airplane flying a distance of 300 miles used 24 gallons of gasoline. How many gallons will it need to travel 750 miles?

300:750 = 24:x

(300)(x) = (750) (24) 300x = 18,000 X = 60 Sixty gallons of gasoline will he required to travel a distance of 750 miles.

POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE NUMBERS Positive and negative numbers are numbers that have directional value from a given starting point or from zero. Numbers above or to one side, usually right 1 of zero are designated as positive ( +) ; those below or to the opposite side, usually left, of zero are designated as negative ( - ) .

Figure 1-~ is representative of signed numbers on a horizontal scale.

-5 -4 -3 -2 -I I I 0 I +,r +2 +3 +4 +5

I I I I FIGURE 1-3. A scale of signed numbers.

The sum of positive numbers is positive.

The sum of negative numbers is negative.

. '

### Page 22

Addition To add a positive and a negative number, find the difference in their actual values and give this difference the sign (+or-) of the larger number.

EXAMPLE The weight of an aircraft is 2,000 pounds. A radio rack weighing 3 pounds and a transceiver weighing 10 pounds are removed from the aircraft.

What is the new weight? For weight and balance purposes, alJ weight removed from an aircraft is given a minus sign, and all weight added is given a plus sign.

FIRST: Add the values for the removed weights.

10+3=13 NEXT: Prefix the sign for removed weights.

-13 THEN: Add the sum of the removed weights to the total weight, following the rule for unlike signs.

+2000-13= + 1987 pounds.

Subtraction To subtract positive and negative numbers, change the sign of the subtrahend (the number to be subtracted from another) and proceed as in addition.

EXAMPLE What is the temperature difference between a temperature reading of + 20 at 5,000 feet and a reading of -6 at 25,000 feet? Follow the rule, Ha change in temperature is equal to the first read­ ing, subtracted from the second reading."

12 FIRST: Change the sign of the number to be subtracted. + 20 becomes - 20.

NEXT: Combine the two terms, following the rule for a·dding like signs.

(-6) + (-20) = -26 degrees.

Multiplication The product of two positive numbers is positive ( + ) . The product of two negative numbers is positive ( +). The product of a positive and a negative number is negative ( - ) .

EXAMPLES 3X6=18 -3X-6=18 Division -3X6=-18 3X-6=-18 The quotient of two positive numbers is positive.

The quotient of two negative numbers is positive.

The quotient of a positive and negative number is negative.

EXAMPLES 6+3=2 -6+-3=2

POWERS AND ROOTS Power -6+3=-2 6+-3=-2 When one number, the base, is used as a factor two or more times, the result is a power of the base. A positive integral exponent, written as a small number just to the right and slightly above the base number, indicates the number of times the base is used as a factor. Thus, 4 squared, or

### Page 23

42 means 4 X 4, which is 16. The 4 is the base, the 2 is the exponent, and the 16 is the power.

Roots A root of a number is one of two or more equal numbers that, when multiplied together, will pro~ duce the number. Such a number is called an equal factor. Thus, two equal factors that will produce 9 when multiplied together are 3 and 3.

Therefore, the square root of 9 equals 3. This may be written y'9 = 3. The symbol v'- is called a radical sign. Another method of indicating the square root of a number is to use a fractional exponent such as 9112 = 3. If the root to be taken is other than a square root, it may be shown in a similar manner; that is, the cube root of 9 may be written 9113• For example, the cube root of 8 equals 2 and may be written VB = 2, or 8113 = 2;

the fourth root of 256 equals 4 and may be written '1256 = 4, or 256114 = 4.

Computation of Square Root It is comparatively easy to determine the square root. of such numbers as 4, 9, 16, and 144. The numbers are the perfect squares of small numbers.

Unfortunately, all numbers are not perfect squares; neither are they small. The square of a number is the product of that number multiplied by itself. Extracting the square root of a number is the reverse process of squaring a number, and is essentially a special division process. A descrip­ tion of this process follows and is presented in example form.

EXAMPLE Find the square root of 213.16 FIRST: Starting at the decimal point, and marking off in both directions from the decimal point, separate the num­ ber into periods of two figures each.

The last period at the left end need not have two figures; all others must have two figures. A zero may he added to the right end so that the period will have two figures.

NEXT: Select the largest number that can be squared in the first period. Place the selected number above the radical sign, and place the square of this 13 number under the first period and subtract.

1 v213.16 l l l THEN: Bring down the next pair.

(I) Multiply the root by 2 and place the product to the left of the remainder as the trial divisor.

(2) Determine the number of times the tl'ial divisor will go into that portion of the remainder that is one digit more than the trial di­ visor. Write this number to the right of tbe digit in the trial di­ visor to form the final divisor and also to the right of the digit in the root.

(3) Multiply tbis number times the completed divisor. If the result­ ing product is larger than the remainder, reduce the number by one, both in the root and in the final divisor, and repeat the multiplication process.

( 4) Subtract the product formed from the remainder and bring down the next pair to form a new remainder.

(5) To complete the solution of ex­ tracting the square root, simply repeat the procedure set forth in this step for each period of num­ bers remaining. It is unnecessary to carry the root beyond the number of digits possessed by the original number.

l 4. 6 V213.16 l 24 ll3 96 286 17 16 17 16 ·'

### Page 24

Two will divide into 11, 5 times.

However, 5 X 25 is greater than 113, so the 5 must he reduced to a 4.

The decimal is placed in the root so that the number of digits in l he whole number portion of the root is equal to the sum of the periods, or pairs, in the whole number portion of lhe number from which the root was exlracted.

Powers of Ten The difficulty of performing mathematical prob­ lems with very large (or very small) numbers and the counting and writing of many decimal places are both an annoyance arnl a source of error.

The problems of representation and calculation are simplified by Lhc use of ''powers of ten." (Sec figure 1-4 .. ). This system, sometimes referred to as ''Engineer's Shorthand," requires an understand­ ing of the prinriplcs of the exponent. These are summarized as follows:

(1) The positive exponent (or power) of a number is a shorthand method of indi­ cating how many times the number is multiplied by itself. For example, 23 (read as 2-cuhed or 2 to the third power) means 2 i:::, to he multiplied by itself 3 times: 2 X 2 X 2 = 8. A num­ ber with a negative exponent may he defined as its inverse or reciprocal (1 divided hy Lhc number) with the same exponent' made positive. For example, 2-,, (read as 2 ·to the minus 3 power) is the same as l

(2) 3 l 2X2X2 l 8

(2) Any number, except zero, to the zero pow,~r is equal to 1. When a number is written without an exponent, the ya]uc of the exponent is 1. '\\1hcn an exponent has no sign ( + or - ) pre­ ceding it, the exponent is positive.

(3) The value of a numher does not change when it is both multiplied and divided hy the same factor (5 X 10 + 10 - 5).

M.oving the decimal point of a number to the left is the same as dividing the number Ly 10 for each place the deci­ mal point moves. Conversely, moving the decimal point to the right is the same as multiplying the number by 10 for each pla<.'e the decimal point moves.

POWER OF TEN EXPAJ\'SION VALUE Positive Exponent ,. 10 X lOX lOx lOx 10 xlO 1,000,000 ,. lOXlOXlOXlOXIO 100,000 ,. 10 X IO X IO X JO 10,000 ,. 10Xl0XI0 ,,ooo '" IO X 10 mo w rn w '" Th~ velocity of li_~ht, 30, 000, 000, 000 centimeters per second, simpllfie; to 3 X IO" centi­ meter, per scc'Ond.

)\'egati"e Exponent 10·• = __!:_ ' -'-rn " 10 = 0.1 10-•"" ..2... ' ,. IO X 10 100 = O.ot 10·• = .J... ' ,. !OX !Ox 10 1,000 = 0,001 w- = .J... ' ,. 1nx10x1oxw 10.000 = 0.0001 JO"'= -2. ' '" lO X !() X lO X 10 X IO 1no.ooo = 0.00001 10-• = -2. ' ,e !OX !Ox !OX IOx !OX 10 1,000,000 = 0.000001 The mMS of an electron, 0.000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, 000, Sil gram. bccom~;

9.11 X 10-" pam.

14 FIGURE 1-4. Powers of ten and their equivalents.

The procedure for use of powers of ten may he summarized as follows:

(1) Move the decimal point to the place desired. Count the number of places the decimal point is moved.

(2) Multiply the altered number hy 10 to a power equal to the number of places the decimal point w~s moved.

(3) The exponent of 10 is negative if the decimal point is moved to the right, and it is positive if the decimal point is moved to the left. An aid for re­ membering the sign to he used is: L,

### Page 25

A, R, D. When the decimal point moves Left, you Add; and when the decimal point moves Right, you De­ duct.

In most instances, you will find it convenient to reduce the numbers used to numbers between 1 and 10 times 10 to the proper power. Unless otherwise specified, all answers to problems using powers of ten will conform to that requirement.

Powers of Ten Added and Subtracted Before using powers of ten in mathematical operations, it will be bene:6cial to review a few more principles governing exponents:

If two or more numbers are written with the same base, their _product is equal to the base raised to a power equal to the algebraic sum of their exponents.

3' X 3s X 3' = 3' + , + , = 312 If two numbers are written whh the same base, their quotient is equal to the base raised to a power equal to the algebraic difference of their exponents (numerator's exponent minus denomi­ nator!s exponent).

4' -- = 45-3 = 42 4' A factor may be moved from numerator to denominator or from denominator to numerator by changing the sign of its exponent. Thus we have 32 43 1 = 32 X 43 = - = ----4-3 3-2 4-a X 3-2 The bases must be the same before numbers can be multiplied or divided by the addition or subtraction of their exponents. Thus 1 a5 X b6 can­ not be combined because the bases ( a and b) are not the same.

Note particularly that the rules specify alge­ braic addition and algebraic subtraction of the powers. Here are some summarizing examples;

37 X 3-n = 1 37+{-11) = 31-11 = 3-4 = - .

3' 15 5s = 5s-(-6l = 5sH = 5I4. 5-6 68 1 - = 68-12 = 6-4 = - . 612· 64 Multiplication and division employing powers of ten may be performed in three simple steps as follows:

(1) Reduce all numbers to values between 1 and 10 multiplied by 10 to the proper power.

(2) Perform t4e indicated operations.

(3) Change the result to a number between 1 to 10 multiplied by IO multiplied hy 10 to the proper power.

COMPUTING AREA Mensuration formulas deal with the dimensions, areas, and volumes of geometric .figures. There are five geometric figures with which you should be familiar, and there is a separate formula for finding the area of each. The area of a plane figure is equal to the number of square units it contains. Areas are measured in different units as compared to measuring length. An area that is square and 1 inch on each side is called a square inch. All area units are square units, such as square inch, square foot, square yard, square rod, and square mile. Other area units are the square centimeter, the square meter, et cetera, found in the metric system of measurement.

TABLES OF AREAS 144 square inches (sq. in.)

9 square feet 30± square yards 160 square rods 640 acres = 1 square foot (sq. ft.).

1 square yard (sq. yd.).

= 1 square rod (sq. rd.).

1 acre (A).

1 square mile (sq. mile).

The technique for determining the area of any geometric shape is based upon the use of formulas.

To solve a problem by formula, it is necessary to-

(1) select the formula that covers the problem situation,

(2) insert the known values in the selected formula, and

### Page 26

·-' .

. '

AREA LW L w FIGURE 1-5. A rectangle.

(3) then make the necessary mathematical manipulations to find the unknown quantity.

The Rectangle A rectangle is a four-sided plane figure whose opposite sides are equal and all of whose angles are right angles (90°). The rectangle is a very familiar area in mechanics. It is the cross-sectional area of many beams, rods, fittings, etc. (See figure 1-5.)

The ai:-ea of a rectangle is the product of the measures of the length and width when they are expressed in the same units of linear measure.

The area may he expressed by the formula:

A =LW where: A = area.

L = length of rectangle.

W = width of rectangle.

EXAMPLE A certain aircraft panel is in the form of a rectangle having a length of 24 inches and a width of 12 inches. What is the area of the panel expressed in square inches?

FIRST: Determine the known values and sub­ stitute them in the formula.

A =LW A= 24 X 12 NEXT: Perform the indicated multiplication;

the answer will be the total area in square inches.

A = 24 X 12 = 288 sq. in.

16 s s s AREA= S' s FIG URE 1-6. A square.

The Square A square is a plane figure having four equal sides and four right angles (figure 1-6).

To determine the area of a square, find the product of the length of any two sides. Since a square is a figure whose sides are equal, the formula can he expressed as the square of the sides or:

A= 52 where A is the area and S is the length of a side.

EXAMPLE What is the area of a square plate whose side measures 25 inches?

FIRST: Determine the known value and sub­ stitute it in the formula A= 52 A = 252• NEXT: Perform the indicated thultiplication;

the answer will be the total area in square inches.

A = 25 X 25 = 625 sq. in.

Triangles A triangle is a three-sided polygon. There are three basic types of triangle: scalene, equilateral or equiangular, and isosceles. A scalene triangle is one in which all sides and angles are unequal, whereas the equilateral triangle, being just the opposite, has equal sides and equal angles. A tri­ angle that has two equal sides and angles is known as an isosceles triangle.

Triangles may be further classified as to right, obtuse, or acute. These terms are descriptive of the included angles of the triangle. A right triangle is one that has one angle measuring 90°. In an obtuse triangle, one angle is greater than 90°,

### Page 27

SCALENE Unequal Sides and Angles T h l I• b .. I RIGHT ·:T I h ___ Jl '"" I I I h I b .. , OBTUSE ,..----b1-------1~ ACUTE

**EQUILATERAL OR ISOSCELES**

EQUIANGULAR Equal Sides and Angles Two Equal Sides and Angles I T h I I h I l b .. 1 ~b '"I

ACUTE RIGHT T:

h I I li ___ --- Right 6 - one L = 90° Obtuse 6 - one L > 90° Acute D. - all ,._ < 90° OBTUSE b ACUTE FIGURE 1-7. Types of triangles.

while in an acute triangle all the angles are less than 90°. The various types of triangles are shown in figure 1-7.

The altitude of a triangle is the perpendicular 17 line drawn from the vertex to the base. In some triangles, as in figure 1-8, it may be necessary to extend the base so that the altitude will meet it.

The base of a triangle is the side upon which

### Page 28

; .

2'6"

ALTITUDE I I I I _I_ - - - -"-------....::::,~ f+--3'2" BASE -I FIGURE 1-8. Triangle.

the triangle is supposed to stand. Any side may he taken as the base.

The area of any triangle may be calculated by using the formula:

I A= -ab 2 where A is equal to Area; ! is a given constant;

a is the altitude of the triangle; and b is the base.

EXAMPLE Find the area of the triangle shown in figure 1-8.

FIRST: Substitute the known values in the area formula.

NEXT:

I A= -ab= A 2 1 X 2 16" X 31 211 2 Solve the formula for the unknown value.

I A = - X 30 X 38 2 A = 570 sq. in.

1140 2 Circumference and Area of a Circle To find the circumference (distance around) or the area of a circle it is necessary to use a number called pi (11"). This number represents the ratio of the circumference to the diameter of any circle.

Pi cannot be found exactly because it is a never­ ending decimal, but expressed to four decimal places it is 3.1416, which is accurate enough for most computations. (See figure 1-9.)

Circumference The circumference of a circle may be found by using the formula:

C = 1rd where C is the circumference; 1r is the given con­ stant, 3.1416; and dis the diameter of the circle.

18 Diameter d \ 1\ <:;- \ ~ \ " \ ' ' ' FIGURE 1-9. A circle.

EXAMPLE The diameter of a certain piston is 5 inches.

What is the circumference of the piston?

FIRST: Substitute the known values in the formula, C = 1rd.

C = 3.1416 X 5 NEXT: Solve the formula for the unknown value.

C = 15. 7080 inches.

Area The area of a circle, as in a rectangle or triangle, must be expressed in square units. The distance that is one-half the diameter of a circle is known as the radius. The area of any circle is found by squaring the radius and multiplying by 1r. The formula is expressed thus:

A = 1rr2 where A is the area of a circle; 1r is the given constant; and r is the radius of the circle.

EXAMPLE The bore (inside diameter) of a certain aircraft engine cylinder is 5 inches. Find the cross sectional area of this bore.

FIRST: Substitute the known values in the formula, A = 1rr2• A = 3.1416 X 2.52 NEXT: Solve the formula for the unknown value.

A = 3.1416 X 6.25 A = 19.635 sq. in.

### Page 29

b, FIGURE 1-10. A trapezoid.

The Trapezoid A trapezoid (figure 1-10) is a quadrilateral having one pair of parallel sides. The area of a trapezoid is determined by using the formula:

1 A = 2(b, + b,)h where A is the area; ·} is the given constant;

b1 and b2 are the lengths of the two paraHe] sides;

and h is the height.

EXAMPLE What is the area of a trapezoid whose hases are 14 inches and IO inches, and whose altitude is 6 inches? (Sec fig. 1-11.)

FIRST: Substitute the known values in the formula.

1 A = 2(b, + b2 )h 1 A = 2(10 + 11)6.

NEXT: Solve the formula for t hP, unknown value.

Wing Area A= 1 A = - X lH 2 A = 72 sq. in.

To dC'scribc lhc planform of a '"'·ing (figure ]-12), several terms arc requlred. To calculate wing area, it will be necessary to consider the meaning of the terms-span and chord. The wing span is the length of the wing from wing tip to wing tip.

The chord is the width of the wing from leading 19 FIGURE 1-11. Computing the area of a trapezoid.

edge to trailing edge. If the wing is a tapered wing, the average width or chord, known as the mean chord, must be known in finding the area.

The formula for caJculating wing area is:

A= SC where A is the area expressed in square feet, S is the wing span, and C is the average chord.

The process used in caJculating wing area will depend upon the shape of the wing. In some instances it will be necessary to use the formula for finding wing area in conjunction with one of the formulas for the area of a quadrilateral or a circle.

**EXAMPLES**

1. Find the area of the wing illustrated in figure 1-13.

To determine the area, it is necessary to decide what formula to use. It can be seen that the wing tips would form a 7-foot-diameter circle; the re­ mainder of the wing planform is then in the shape of a rectangle. By combining the formulas for wing area and area of a circle, the area of a wing having circular tips can be calculated.

FIRST: Substitute the known value in the formula.

A A SC+ 1rR2 (25 - 7) (7) + (3.1416) (3.52).

The value for Sis represented by the original wing span less the diameter of the circular tips.

NEXT: Solve the formula for the unknown value.

A (18 X 7) + (3.1416 X 12.25) A 126 + 38.5 A = 164.5 sq. ft.

.; "

### Page 30

r. s ' C A= Wing Area, ft.s C = Average chord, ft.

S = Span, ft.

FIGURE 1~ 12. Wing planform.

2. Find the area of a tapered wing (figure 1-14) whose structural span is 50 feet and whose mean chord is 6'8".

FIRST: Substitute the known values in the formula.

A SC A 50' X 6'8".

NEXT: Solve the formula for the unknown value.

A = 50' X 6.67' A = 333.5 sq. ft.

3. Find the area of a trapezoidal wing (shown in figure 1-15) whose leading edge span measures 30 feet, whose trailing edge span measures 34 feet, and whose chord is 5 feet.

FIRST: Substitute the known values in the formula.

1 A = 2(b1 + b2 )h A = ~(30 + 34)5.

NEXT: Solve the formula for the unknown value.

1 -A = ·-(64)o 2 1 A = 2(320) A = 160 sq. ft.

FIGURE 1-13. Wing with circular tips.

COMPUTING THE VOLUME OF SOLIDS Solids are objects with three dimensions­ length, breadth, and thickness. They are of many shapes, the most common of which are prisms, cyHnders, pyramids, cones, and spheres. Occa­ sionaBy, it is necessary to determine the volume of a rectangle, a cube, a cylinder, or a sphere.

Since all volm 1es are not measured in the same units, it is necessary to know all the common units of volume and how they are related to each other. For example, the mechanic may know the volume of a tank in cubic feet or cubic inches, but when the tank is full of gasoline, he will be interested in how many gallons it contains. The foHowing table shows the relationship between some of the common units of volume.

UNITS OF SPACE MEASURE 1,728 cu. in. 1 cu. ft.

27 cu. ft. 1 cu. yd.

231 cu. in. 1 gal.

7.5 gals. 1 cu. ft.

2 pts. 1 qt.

4 qts. 1 gal.

Volume of a Rectangular Solid A rectangular solid is a solid bounded by rec­ tangles. In other words, it is a square-cornered FIGURE 1-14. Tapered wing with sweepback.

### Page 31

30 feet ;1 feet \ 34 feet FIGURE 1-15. Trapezoid wing.

volume such as a box (figure 1-16). If the solid has equal dimensions, it is called a cube.

The formula for determining the volume of a rectangular solid may he expressed thus:

V = lwh where: V = Volume.

l = length.

w = width.

h = height.

EXAMPLE A rectangular-shaped baggage compartment measures 5 feet 6 inches in length, 3 feet 4 inches in width, and 2 feet 3 inches in height. How many cubic feet of baggage will it hold?

FIRST: Substitute the known values into the formula.

V = lwh V = 5'6" X 3 1 4" X 2'3".

NEXT: Solve the formula for the unknown value.

T h 1 1 1 V = 5-X 3- X 2-2 3 4 11 10 9 V=-X-X-2 3 4 165 V = 4 = 41.25 cu. ft.

1'-----1 FIGURE 1-16. A rectangular solid.

21 , ... ___ , -•• !IA'/

• ::,..J FIGURE 1-17. A cube.

If 1he rectangular solid is in the shape of a cube (figure 1-17), the formula can be expressed as the cube of the sides:

V = 5' where Vis the volume and S is the side measure­ ment of the cube.

Area and Volume of a Cylinder A solid having the shape of a can, length of pipe, or other such object is called a cylinder.

The ends of a cylinder are identical circles as shown in figure 1-18.

Surface Area The surface area of a cylinder is found by multiplying the circumference of the base by the altitude. The formula may be expressed as:

A = 1rdh where A is the area, 1r is the given constant, d is the diameter, and h is the height of the cylinder.

h FIGURE 1-18. A cylinder.

;' -·,r.

### Page 32

-----d -- -----d----- T 0 Piston II 0 / ' / -----/ ' / " I \ I -- \ ,,...-., \ -I I I \ t \ \ , I ' I -- \ \ I \. / "- / "- / -- /

PISTON AT TOP CENTER PISTON AT BOTTOM CENTER FIGURE 1-19. Cylinder displacement.

EXAMPLE How many square feet of aluminum sheet would be needed to fabricate a cylinder 12 feet long and 3 feet 6 inches in diameter?

22 FIRST: Substitute the known values in the formula.

A = 1rdh A = 3.1416 X 3'6" X 12'.

### Page 33

NEXT: Solve the formula for the unknown value.

A 3.1416 X 3.5' X 12' A = 132.95, or 133 sq. ft.

Volume The volume of a cylinder may he found by nmltiplying the cross-sectional area by the height of the cylinder. The formula may be expressed as:

V = 1rr2h where V is the volume; 1r is the given constant;

r2 is the square of the radius of the cylinder; and his the height of the cylinder (figure 1-19).

EXAMPLE The cylinder of an aircraft engine has a bore (inside diameter) of 5.5 inches, and the engine has a stroke of 5.5 inches. What is the piston displacement of one cylinder? The stroke repre­ sents the height of the cylinder to he measured, .:.;.,ecause the volume displaced by the piston de­ pends on the length of the stroke.

FIRST: Substitute the known values in the formula.

V = 1rr2h V = (3.1416) (2.75 2) (5.S).

NEXT: Solve the formula for the unknown value.

V = 17.28 X 7.56 V = 130.64 cu. in.

GRAPHS AND CHARTS Graphs and charts are pictorial presentations of data, equations, and formulas. Through their use the relationship between two or more quan­ tities may be more clearly understood. Also, a person can see certain conditions or relationships at a glance, while it would require considerable time to obtain the same information from a written description. Graphs may be used in a number of ways, such as representing a single equation or formula, or they may be used to solve two equa­ tions for a common value.

Graphs and charts take many forms. A few of the more common forms are called bar graphs, pictographs, broken-line graphs, continuous­ curved-line graphs, and circle graphs. An example of each is shown in figure 1-20. The most useful 23 of these graphs in technical work is the continuous­ curved-line graph.

Interpreting or Reading Graphs and Charts It is more important, from the mechanic's view­ point, to be able to read a graph properly than it is to draw one. The relationship between the horsepower of a certain engine at sea level and at any altitude up to 10,000 feet can be determined by use of the chart in figure 1-21. To use this type of chart, simply find the point on the hori­ zontal axis that represents the desired altitude;

move upward along this line to the point where jt intersects the curved line; then move to the left, reading the percent of sea level horsepower avail­ able on the vertical axis.

EXA.WPLE "\Vhat percent of the sea level horsepower is available at an altitude of 5,000 feet?

FIRST: Locate the point on the horizontal axis that represents 5,000 feet. Move upward to the point where the line intersects the curved line.

',EXT: Move to the left, reading the percent of sea level horsepower available at 5,000 feet. The available horsepower is 80%.

Nomograms It is often necessary to make calculations using the same formula, but using different sets of values for the variables. It is possible to obtain a solution by use of a slide rule or by preparing a table giving the solution of the formula resulting from successive changes of each variable. However, in the case of formulas involving several mathe­ matical operations, the labor entailed would usu­ ally be very great.

It is possible to avoid aJI this labor by using a diagram representing the formula, in which each variable is represented by one or more graduated lines. l<'rom this diagram, the solution of the formula for any given variable may be read by means of an index line. A diagram of this type is known as a nomogram.

Much of the information needed to solve aero­ nautical problems will be presented in nomogram form. Instruction manuals for the various aircraft contain numerous nomograms, many of which . , r -, ·~·

### Page 34

(a) Bar graph ( c) Broken line graph 1955 ++ 1960 +++ 1965 +++++ ( b) Pictograph ( d) Continuous curved-line graph ( e) Circle graph FIGURE 1-20. Types of graphs.

### Page 35

100 90 ~ r--,..._ I 80

- 70 ] 60 ., ~ " 50 1 40 & 30 20 10 0 SL 1 -,.... ...... r--....

' "- 2345678 Altitude X 1000 h ' 9 10 FIGURE 1-21. Horsepower vs. altitude chart.

appear quite complex. Many of the presentations will possess several curves on the same coordinate axis, each curve drawn for different constants in the equation. In the latter case, it is essential to select the proper curve for the desired conditions.

Again, as with the simpler graphs, it is more important for the mechanic to be able to read nomograms than it is to draw them.

The following example is taken from the main­ tenance manual for the Allison 501-DI3 turboprop 25 engine. A nomogram (figure 1-22) is used to de­ termine the power requirements when the engine is operating at minimum torque. The OAT (out­ side air temperature), station barometric pressure, and engine r.p.m. are three factors that must be known to use this particular nomogram.

EXAMPLE Determine the calculated horsepower of a cer­ tain engine, using the nomogram in figure l-22.

Assume that the OAT is 10° C., the barometric pressure is 28.5 in. Hg, and the engine is operating at 10,000 r.p.m.

FIRST: Locate the reference points on the OAT scale and on the barometric pressure scale that correspond to the given temperature and pressure read­ ings. These are identified as (0 and ®, respectively, on the chart. With the aid of a straightedge, connect these two points and establish point ® on the pivot line.

NEXT: Locate the engine speed, identified as @, on the engine speed r.p.m.

scale. Using a straightedge, connect points ® and © and establish point ® on the calculated horsepower scale. The calculated horsepower is read at point ®· The calculated horsepower is 98%.

### Page 36

l ., •., MODEL 501-Dl3 ENGINE AND MODEL 606 PROPELLER

**CALCULATED TORQUEMETER**

OUTSIDE AIR (READING) HORSEPOWER TEMP ENGINE SPEED PIVOT BAROMETRIC RPM ·c •F PRESSURE - IN. HG LINE 140 10500 -10 32.0 -20 130 31.0 10400 0 -15 NOTE: VALID FOR WINDS 120 30.0 BELOW 11 M. P. H. 10300 10 ® -10 29.0 110 20 10200 -5 28,0 0 30 --

27.0 10100 "° --- __... ........ °' ........ 40 26.0 .. 5 -- - 10000 I _,__... © 10 50 25.0 9900 15 60 80 24.0 20 9800 70 23.0 25 70 80 22.0 9700 30 90 EXAMPLE 35 21.0 9600 100 60 40 110 55 20.0 9500 FIGURE 1-22. Power requirements at minimum torque.

### Page 37

MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS Our customary system of measurement ( figure 1-23) is part of our cultural heritage from the days when the thirteen colonies were under British rule.

It started as a hodge·podge of Anglo-Saxon, Roman, and Norman-French weights and measures. Since medieval times, commissions appointed by various English monarchs had reduced the chaos of meas­ urement by setting specific standards for some of the most important units. Early records, for in­ stance, indicate that an inch was defined as the length. of "three barleycorns, round and dry" when laid together; a pennyweight, or one-twentieth of a Tower ounce, was equal to 32 wheatcorns from the "midst of the ear."

The U.S. gallon is the British wine gallon, stand­ ardized at the beginning of the 18th century (and about 20 percent smaller than the Imperial gallon that the British adopted in 1824 and have since used to measure most liquids).

In short, as some of the founders of this country realized, the customary system was a makeshift based largely on folkways.

LENGTH MASS VOLUME METRIC Meter Kilogram Liter

CUSTOMARY inch ounce fluid ounce foot pound teaspoon year ton tablespoon fathom grain cup rod dram pint mile quart gallon barrell peck bushel Metric System The metric system is the dominant language of measurement in use today. Most of the world countries used the metric system prior to World War II. Since the war, more countries have con­ verted or are in the process of converting to the metric system. Only the United States and 13 smaller countries have not made the conversion.

Congress has the power to define the standa~d of weights and measures. Repeated~y the metnc system has been proposed and each time the ques­ tion has been voted down.

The metric system was developed by a French statesman, Talleyrand, Bishop of Autum, using a "meter" as a standard; the meter being a specific portion of the circumference of the earth at the equator. From this base measurement the meter was developed and accepted as the standard. Di­ visions and multiples of the meter are based on the decimal system.

**ELECTRIC**

TEMPJ,RATURE CURRENT TIME Celsius (Centigrade) Ampere Second Fahrenheit ampere second FIGURE l-23. Some common units.

- '. 1

### Page 38

'·' .

The Logic of Metric No other system of measurement that has heen actually used can match the inherent simplicity of International Metric. It was designed ·deliberately to fill all the needs of scientists and engineers.

Laymen need only know and use a few simple parts of it. It is logically streamlined, whereas other system:c. developed more or less haphazardly.

At this time there are only six base units in the lntC'rnational ~·fetric System. The unit of length is the meter. The unit of mass is the kilogram.

The unit of time is the second. The unit of electric current is the ampere. The unit of temperature is the kelvin ( which in common use is translated into the dPgree Celsius, formerly called degree centi­ grade). The unit of luminous intensity is the candela.

All the other units of measurement in the Inter­ national Metric System are derived from these six ba:-.e units. Area is measured in square meters;

speed in meters per second; density jn kilograms per cubic meter. The newton, the unit of force, i,- a simple relationship involving meters, kilograms, an<l second.<-; and the pascal, unit of pressure, is d~fowd as one newton per square meter. In some other cas(~S. the relationship between the derived and base units must he expressed by rather more cotnplicatcd formulas-which is inevitable in any rncasurcmc11t system, owing to the innate complex­ ity of some of the things we measure. Similar relationship:-. among mass, area, time and other quanlitics in the customary system n:-.ually require

s.irnilar formulas, made all the more complicated because they can contain arbitrarv constants. For (·xcrniple, 0;1c horsepower is dcfi~ed as 550 foot.

pound~ per second.

The third intrinsic a<lvantB.ge is that metrjc is based 011 the decimal system. }lultiples and sub­ Jllultiplcs of any given unit are always related by power~ of .l 0. For instance 1 there are 10 milli­ mC'tf'rs in one centimeter; ] 00 centimeters in one mPtPr; and l,000 meters in one kilometer. This greatly simplifies converting larger to smaller measurements. For example 1 in order to calculate the number of meters in 3.794 kilometers, multiply by 1,000 ( move the decimal point three places to the right) and the answer is 3,794,. For compari­ son. in order to find the number of inches in 3.794, miles. it is necessary to multiply first Ly 51 280 and then by 12.

l\.Toreover, multiples and submultiples of all the T ntnnational Metric units follow a consistent narn· ing schrmP. 1vhich consists of attaching a prefix to 28 the unit 1 whatever it may be. For example, kilo stands for 1,000: one kilometer equals 1,000 meters, and one kilogram equals 1,000 grams. Micro is the prefix for one millionth: one meter equals one rniIIion micrometers, and one gram equals one mil­ lion micrograms ( figure 1-24).

PREFIX tera ( 1012 ) giga (10') mega ( 10') kilo ( 10') hecto ( 10') MEANS One trillion times One billion times One million times One thousand times One hundred times dee a ( 10) Ten times ·------· -------·------- deci (I0- 1 } One tenth of centi ( 10- 2 } One hundredth of milli ( 10- 3 ) One thousandth of micro ( 10- 6 ) One millionth of nano ( l0- 9 ) One billionth of pico ( 10- 12 ) One trillionth of F1cun:E ]-2·1,. 1\ames and symbols for metric prefixes.

Conversion: Metric To Conventional People tend to resist changes, usually because they do not under_c:.tand either the purpose of the cban~e or the new order. Terminology for custom­ ary units and metric units have been discussed. A conversion table also has been included. Examples of its use follow:

To convert inches to millimeters, multiply the number of inches hy 25. (Ex. 25 into mm=25 X25=625 mm) To convert miUimeters to inches multiply milli­ meters by .01. ( Ex. 625 mm X .04 = 25 inches.)

To convert square multiply by 6.5.

sq. cm.)

inches to square centimeters (Ex. 100 sq. in.X6.5=650 To convert square centimeters to square inches multiply by .16. (Ex. lOOX.16=16 sq. in.)

### Page 39

IF YOU WHEN YOU KNOW: YOU CAN FIND: MULTIPLY BY:

LENGTH inches millimeters 25 feet centimeters 30 yards meters 0.9 miles kilometers 1.6 millimeters inches 0.04 centimeters inches 0.4 meters yards 1.1 kilometer miles 0.6 AREA square inches square centimeters 6.5 square feet square meters 0.09 square yards square meters 0.8 square miles square kilometers 2.6 acres square hectometers (hectares) 0.4 square centimeters square inches 0.16 square meters square yards 1.2 square kilometers square miles 0.4 square hectometers (hectares) acres 2.5 MASS ounces grams 28 pounds kilograms 0.45 short tons mega grams ( metric tons) 0.9 grams ounces 0.035 kilograms pounds 2.2 megagrams ( metric tons) short tons 1.1 LIQUID ounces milliliters 30 VOLUME pints liters 0.47 quarts liters 0.95 gallons liters 3.8 milliliters ounces 0.034 liters pints 2.1 liters quarts 1.06 liters gallons 0.26 TEMPER- degrees Fahrenheit degrees Celsius 5/9 ( after subtracting 32) ATURE degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit 9/5 (then add 32) FIGURE 1-25. Converting customary to metric.

### Page 40

Figure 1-26 is practically self e~planatory. Meas­ urements starting at %4 inch up to 20 inches have lnchc, ln~h~s MM \!M Fraction, Decimal, Fractions Decimal~

- .0004 .OJ :'.5/32 .781 19.844

- 004 .JO - 7874 20.

- OJ 25 51/64 .797 20.241 1/64 0156 .397 13/16 .8125 20.638

- .0197 .50 - .8268 '1

- 0295 .75 53/64 .828 21.034 I/.'32 .0312.5 .794 27/32 844 21.431

- .0394 L .S.5/64 859 21.82/l 3/64 .0~68 1.]9J - 866! 22.

.059 1..5 7/8 ,875 ::t2.2:25 1/16 062 1.588 57/M 8906 22.622 5/84 .0781 1.88-1 - .D05:'i 23

- .0787 '

21)/3"2 ')062 2,3.0l!J 3/.'32 094 2 .. 381 ,)\,/f,4 .422 ~3.416

- 0984 2.5 !5/16 .9375 23.813 7/64 mo 2.77/l - .fJ.149 24 .

- .1181 .1. 6!/64 .953 24.209 1/)j 125 3.17.5 31/.'32 .96\J 24.fl06

- !.178 3.5 - . 'J843 25 .

9/64 HJ "l.572 6,1/64 9844 25.00.'l 5/32 .156 3.!169 ' !.000 25.400

- 1575 4 - J.0236 :26.

11/64 .172 4.366 1-J/.'32 1.0312 W.l'l4

- .177 4.5 1-1/16 1.062 26.988 3/16 .1875 4.763 - 1.063 Z7

- .1969 5. ] •. 'J/32 1.094 27.781 13/64 ,203 5,]5') - l.102·1 .w - 2165 5.5 I· I//, l.125 2f\ 57;, 7/32 2:19 5 556 - ' 1417 c:w 15/M 214 .5.953 1-.5/3~ 1.156 2'l.16'l

- .236:?: 6. - I. 1811 )0.

1/4 2,50 fi .. '350 1-3/16 ' 1875 llll(i."l

- .2,5,5\J S .5 T -7/32 1.219 10.')56 17/64 2656 6.747 - l.220.5 .11

- .27,% 7 1-1/4 1.250 .'"JJ.7.51l 9/32 281 7.lH - l.2,'508 :32

- :?.'l.5.3 7.5 J.<)/32 l.:?.81 .12.,544 19/64 207 7.,541 - J .2'l02 3.1 5/16 .'312 7.938 l-5/16 l.,'31". J.).3,18 .. )15 8. 1.3386 .14 21/64 . 328 8.334 1-11/32 1.344 34.131

- .335 8.5 l-3/8 1.375 34,925 11/32 344 8.731 - 1.1779 .35

- 3543 9. 1-13/32 1.406 35.719 23/64 .359 9.128 - 1.4173 36

- 374 9.5 1-7/16 1.4-18 ,"J6.5t.'3 3/8 .175 9.525 - 1.4567 -17.

25/64 .391 9.022 1-15/32 ].4fl!J 37.306

- .aim JO. - 1.496] .)8.

13/32 .406 10.319 1-1/2 1.500 ::JS.JOO

- .41-1 10.5 1-17/32 1.531 38.804 27/64 422 10.716 - !.5354 39.

- .4-131 ll 1-9/16 1.362 30.688 7/16 .438 ll.l l3 - l.5748 40.

29/64 453 11.509 1-19/32 1.594 40.481 15/32 469 11.906 - 1.6142 41.

- 4724 12, 1-5/8 1.625 41.275 31/64 484 12 .. 103 - 1.651.5 12.

- 492 12.5 1-21/32 1.6562 42.06!) ,;2 .500 12.700 l-11/JG 1.6875 4~.86.3

- ,5118 '3 - 1.6929 43 33/64 .5156 13.097 1-2:.1/32 1.719 4.'J.6.56 17/32 5.31 13.484 - !.7323 " 35/64 .547 ]3.801 i .:)/4 1.7,50 44.450

- 5512 14 - J 7717 4.5.

9/16 .563 14.288 1-25/32 J.781 45.244

- .571 14.5 - 1.8110 46. 37/64 578 H.684 1-l.'3/16 1.8125 46.038

- .5006 15 1-27/32 1.844 46.fl31 19/32 594 15.081 1.8.504 47.

39/64 oos 15.478 l-7/8 1.875 47.6:25 5/8 625 15.875 - 1.8898 48

- .6299 JS 1-29/32 1.9062 48 419 41/64 ,6406 16.272 - 1.9291 49.

- 6486 16.5 1-15/16 ].,J.375 49.21.1 21/32 .C56 16 669 - l 9685 50

- .669.) 17. J-31/32 Ul69 .50 006 43/64 .672 17.066 '

2.DOO 50.800 1~,:16 .6875 17.46.1 - 2.007') 51 4,5 f,4 7().'J 17.859 2·1/32 2.03125 .51 5'l4

- 7087 "

- 2 0472 .52 23/,12 719 18 2.'56 2-1116 2.062 52 .. 188

- 728,1 J8 5 - 2.0f\68 53.

47/64 .7:34 Hl.6s.'.l 2--1/32 2.004 .~.).181

- 7480 19. 2-1/8 2.1~5 .5.1.()75 3/4 .750 Hl.050 - 2.126 54.

49/64 7656 19.447 2-5/32 2.156 ,'>4.7ff.l been converted to decimal divisions of inches and to millimeters.

lnchc, Inch .. , \1).1 MM Fra~tinm D<·c•mals Fractim1s J),.dmals

- "2.165 55 3-11/16 3.6875 93.663 :'.-3/16 2. 187,5 55.,563 - 3.7008 '" - 2.2047 56 "l-23/32 3.7Hl 84.456 :'.-7/32 2.219 5(;.356 - ,1.7401 95

- 2.244 S7 l-.1/4 3.7.50 85.2.50 2-1/4 2.2,;o 57.150 - 3.779.5 96.

2-1)/32 2.:'.81 .57.944 3-25/32 3.781 96.()44

- :'..281.5 58. -1-1-'3/16 .'3.812,5 96.838 2-5/16 2.112 58.7,18 - l.8188 97.

- 2.:)228 59. 3-27/32 .1.844 87.6,11 2-l 1/,12 2.344 59.531 - 1.858.1 98.

- 2.3622 BO. J-7/8 .1.875 98.42,5 2-.318 2,37,) 60.325 - 3.8976 99.

- 2.4016 OJ l-2\J/J2 3.8062 99.21\J 2-l:3/32 2.406 61.1 JH - .'3.IJ.170 WO 2·7/!f; 2.4.'38 61.91,1 .}.J.5/lfl 3.().'375 l!10.0J3

- 2.HO\J 62. .'3-11/32 ,3.%:J 100.f'l()fi 2-l.5/1/i 2.468 62.70fl - J.8764 101.

- 2.4803 63. 4 4.000 !OJ.HOO

2.(/2 2.500 63 .. 500 4-1/16 4.0fl2 103.188

- 2:.5197 64. 4-1/8 4.125 104.775 2-17/:32: 2.5.'J.l 64.2()4 - 4.1338 105

- 2 .. 559 65. ~--1/16 4.1875 106.363 2·9/l(i 2.562 65.088 4-l/4 4.250 107.!150 2-1\)/.'32 2.594 Wl.881 ·1--5/16 4 .. 112 100 . .538

- 2.S%4 66 - 4.3307 I JO.

2-.5/8 2:.625 M.fi75 4"3/8 4.375 111.125

- :.f),'l8 e7 l-7/16 4.4.18 112.713 :."-21 /.J2 2.fl5(S 67.4E\'l 1-1/2 4_;)00 l 14 .. 100

- 2:.677:?: 6S 4.5275 l l.5.

2-11/16 2.fl875 i>8.2Wl ~-9/16 ·1..562 115.888

- 2.71(15 60 4-5/H 4.625 J 17.475 :?.-2.'J/32 2.718 69.0,5(; 4-1 J /lfl 4.6875 !19.0fi3 2-,1/4 2.7.5() 6fl.f'l50 - ,1 7:':44 l20

- :?..755,J 70 4-:3/4 4.750 120.650 :?.-2'>/12 2.781 70.fl43'1 4-J:J/1(; 4.8125 122 238

- 2.7!153 71 4-7/8 4.875 12,3.825

2.131](; 2.SW) 71.437/i - 4.9212 125.

- 2 8346 72 4-1')/lfl 4.9.175 125.413 2-27/32 2 844 72.2314 5 5.000 127 000

- 2.8740 73 . - 5.1181 130.

2-7/8 2x:-s 73.02S .5-1/4 .5.250 1.13.350 2-2\)/32 2.9002 73.819 .5-1/2 5.500 13H.700

- 2.!1114 74. - 5.518 140 2-15/16 :?. 0375 74.611 .5-1/4 5 750 146.050

- 2.U,527 75 - 5.9()55 150 2-31132 2.869 75 406 (; 6.()00 152.400

- 2.9\J:?.J 76 6-1/4 {l.2.50 1,58.750 3 3.000 76.200 - 6.2!1()2 160.

'3-1/12 2.0.112 76.9!.J.~ fl-1/2 R.500 165.100

- l.0,)15 77. - 6.6929 170. 'J-1/16 .1.062 77.7S8 {l-3/4 6.750 171.450

- 3.0"iM 78 7 7.000 177.800 3-3/32 3.094 78.581 - 7.0866 UlO.

- 3.1 Hl2 78 - 7.4fl03 ]90 J-1/8 3.12.5 70.375 7-1/2 7.500 !fJ0.,500

- . 3.1486 80 - 7.8740 200 .

3-5/32 'l.J.56 80.169 8 8.000 20.3.2(){) 3-.1/Tfi 3.lll75 80.00~J - 8.2677 210,

- .1.1880 81. 8-1/2 8.5DO 215.900 "l-7 /12 .1.ZHJ 81.7.58 - 8.(,614 220.

- .}.228.3 SC ,, n.r100 228.600 l-1/4 .1.25() s2.s5n - 'l.0551 230

- 1.2n77 8.1. - ').4488 240.

l-\j/32 3.28! 83.344 !J-1/2 0.500 241.300 3 .')Oil 84. - 9.842,5 250.

3-5/16 3.312 84.1.177 '" I0.000 254.001 .3-11/,12 3.341 84.8314 10.2162 260.

- .1.3464 85. .. JO 6299 :?:70.

->-V8 .1.375 83.72~ "

11.000 279.4111

- .'3.3858 "'

- 11.0236 280.

.).\.3/,12 3.406 86 .. 5!\J - 11.4173 290,

- 3.42,52 87. - 11.8110 100.

3-7/16 3.438 ~7.313 12 12.000 :J04.8{JJ

- 3.4646 88. ,1 13.000 .130.2n1 3-15/.32 J.4fl0 8f!.l06 - 13.7795 350.

.3-1/2 ., 500 88 'll"lO '4 1.1.000 3.'>.5.601

- 3 .. )0,')9 fl9. \.5 15.000 381.001 .'3-17/32 .1.5.11 fl'l.694 - 15.7-180 400.

.1.5433 80 rn 16.000 l06.40] l-'J/16 .'l.562 00 4877 '7 17.000 43U;GJ

- 1.5fl27 91 - 17.7165 450 3-19/.)2 .1.594 91.281 rn 18.000 457.201

- 3.622 92 HJ rn.ooo 482 601 3-.'5/8 3.625 92.075 - 18.63,50 500 ,1-21/.'32 3 656 02.869 20 20.000 .508.001

- .1.1m14 91.

FIGl~RE 1-26. Fractions, decimals, and millim('ters.

### Page 41

FUNCTIONS OF NUMBERS The Functions of Numbers chart (figure 1-27) is included in this chapter for convenience in mak- No. Square Cube Square Root 1 1 1 1.0000 2 4 8 1.4142 3 9 27 1.7321 4 16 64 2.0000 5 25 125 2.2361 6 36 216 2.4495 7 49 343 2.6458 8 64 512 2.8284 9 81 729 3.0000 10 100 1,000 3.1623 11 121 1,331 3.3166 12 144 1,728 3.4641 13 169 2,197 3.6056 14 196 2,744 3.7417 15 225 3,375 3.8730 16 256 4,096 4.0000 17 289 4,913 4.1231 18 324 5,832 4.2426 19 361 6,859 4.3589 20 400 8,000 4.4721 21 441 9,261 4.5826 22 484 10,648 4.6904 23 529 12,167 1.7958 24 576 13,824 4.8990 25 625 15,625 5.0000 26 676 17,576 5.0990 27 729 19,683 5.1962 28 784 21,952 5.2915 29 841 24,389 5.3852 30 000 27,000 5.4772 31 1,961 29,791 5.5678 32 1,024 32,768 5.6569 33 1,089 35,937 5.7446 34 1,156 39,304 5.8310 35 1,225 42,875 5.9161 36 1,296 46,656 6.0000 37 1,369 50,653 6.0828 38 1,444 54,872 6.1644 39 1,521 59,319 6.2450 40 1,600 64,000 6.3246 41 1,681 68,921 6.4031 42 1,764 74,088 6.4807 43 1,849 79,507 6.5574 44 1,936 85,184 6.6332 45 2,025 91,125 6.7082 46 2,116 97,336 6.7823 47 2,209 103,823 6.8557 48 2,304 110,592 (i.9282 49 2,401 117,649 7.0000 50 2,500 125,000 7.0711 ing computations. Familiarization with the various parts of this chart will illustrate the advantages of using "ready-made" computations.

Cube Circum- Root ference Area

1.0000 3.1416 0.7854

1.2599 6.2832 3.1416

1.4422 9.4248 7.0686

1.5874 12.5664 12.5664

1.7100 ]5.7080 !9.635

1.8171 18.850 28.274

1.9129 21.991 38.485

2.0000 25.133 50.266

2.0801 28.274 63.617

2.1544 31.416 78.540

2.2240 34.558 95.033

2.2894 37.699 113.10

2.3513 40.841 132.73

2.4101 43.982 153.94

2.4662 47.124 176.71

2.5198 50.265 201.06

2.5713 53.407 226.98

2.6207 56.549 254.47

2.6684 59.690 283.53

2.7144 62.832 314.16

2.7589 65.973 346.36

2.8020 69.115 380.13

2.8439 72.257 415'.48

2.8845 75.398 452.39

2.9240 78.540 490.87

2.9625 81.681 530.93

3.0000 84.823 572.56

3.0366 87.965 615.75

3.0723 9!.106 660.52

3.1072 94.248 706.86

3.1414 97.389 754.77

3.1748 100.53 804.25

3.2075 103.67 855.30

3.2396 106.81 907.92

3.2717 109.96 962.11

3.3019 IJ.3.10 1,017.88

3.3322 116.24 1,075.21

3.3620 119.38 1,134.11

3.3912 122.52 1,194.59

3.4200 125.66 1,256.64

3.4482 128.81 1,320.25

3.4760 131.95 1,385.44

3.5034 135.09 1,452.20

3.5303 138.23 1,520.53

3.5569 141.37 1,590.43

3.5830 144.51 1,661.90

3.6088 147.65 1,734.94

3.6342 J.50.80 1,809.56

3.6593 153.94 1,885.74

3.6840 157.08 1,963.50 FIGERE 1-27. Functions of numbers.

31 ' .

' .'.;~

### Page 42

Numbers The number column contains the numbers 1 Square No. Square Cube Root 51 2,601 132,651 7.1414 52 2,704 140,608 7.2111 53 2,809 148,877 7.2801 54 2,916 157,464 7.3485 55 3,025 166,375 7.4162 56 3,136 175,616 7.4833 57 3,249 185,193 7.5498 58 3,364 195,112 7.6158 59 3,481 205,379 7.6811 60 3,600 216,000 7.7460 61 3,721 226,981 7.8102 62 3,844 238,328 7.8740 63 3,969 250,047 7.9373 64 4,096 262,144 8.0000 65 4,225 274,625 8.0623 66 4,356 287,496 8.1240 67 4,489 300,763 8.1854 68 4,624 314,432 8.2462 69 4,761 328,509 8.3066 70 4,900 343,000 8.3666 71 5,041 357,911 8.4261 72 5,184 373,248 8.4853 73 5,329 389,017 8.5440 74 5,476 405,224 8.6023 75 5,625 421,875 8.6603 76 5,776 438,976 8.7178 77 5,929 456,533 8.7750 78 6,084 474-,552 8.8"318 79 6,214 493,039 8.8882 80 6,400 512,000 8.9443 81 6,561 531,441 9.0000 82 6,724 551,368 9.0554 83 6,889 571,787 9.1104 84 7,056 592,704 9.1652 85 7,225 614,125 9.2195 86 7,396 636,056 9.2376 87 7,569 638,503 9.3274 88 7,744 681,472 9.3808 89 7,921 704,969 9.4340 90 8,100 729,000 9.4868 91 8,281 753,571 9.5394 92 8,464 778,688 9.5917 93 8,649 804,357 9.6437 94 8,836 830,584 9.6954 95 9,025 857,375 9.7468 96 9,216 884,736 9.7980 97 9,409 912,673 9.8489 98 9,604 941,192 9.8995 99 9,801 970,299 9.9499 100 10,000 1,000,000 10.0000 through 100. The other columns contain compu­ tations for each number.

Cube Circum- Root ference Area

3.7084 160.22 2,042.82

3.7325 163.36 2,123.72

3.7563 166.50 2,206.18

3.7798 169.65 2,290.22

3.8030 172.79 2,375.83

3.8259 175.93 2,463.01

3.8485 179.07 2,551.76

3.8709 182.21 2,642.08

3.8930 185.35 2,733.97

3.9149 188.50 2,827.43

3.9365 191.64 2,922.47

3.9579 194.78 3,019.07

3.9791 197.92 3,117.25

4.0000 201.06 3,126.99

4.0207 204.20 3,381.31

4.0412 207.34 3,421.19

4.0615 210.49 3,525.65

4.0817 213.63 3,631.68

4.1016 216.77 3,739.28

4.1213 219.91 3,848.45

4.1408 233.05 3,959.19

4.1602 226.19 4,071.50

4.1793 229.34 4,185.39

4.1983 232.48 4,300.84

4.2172 235.62 4,417.86

4.2358 238.76 4,536.46

4.2543 241.90 4,656.63

4.2727 245.05 4,778.36

4.2908 248.19 4,901.67

4.3089 251.33 5,026.55

4.3267 254.47 5,153.00

4.3445 257.61 5,281.02

4.3621 260.75 5,410.61

4.3795 263.89 5,541.77

4.3968 267.04 5,674.50

4.4140 270.18 5,808.80

4.4310 273.32 5,944.68

4.4480 276.46 6,082.12

4.4647 279.60 6,221.14

4.4814 282.74 6,361.73

4.4979 285.88 6,503.88

4.5144 289.03 6,647.61

4.5307 292.17 6,792.91

4.5468 295.31 6,939.78

4.5629 298.45 7,088.22

4.5789 301.59 7,283.23

4.5947 304.73 7,389.81

4.6104 307.88 7,542.96

4.6261 311.02 7,697.69

4.6416 314.16 7,853.98 FIGURE 1-27. Functions of numbers (continued).

### Page 43

Square Square is the prO'duct obtained by multiplying a number by itself: lXl=l, 2X2=4, 17Xl7=289, Squaring may be considered a special form of area computation: Area= Length multiplied by Width, A=LXW, Cube Cube is the product obtained by multiplying a number by itself, then multiplying that product by the number again: lXlXl=l, 2X2X2=8, 13 X 13 X 13 =2,197, Cubing may be considered a specialized form of volumn computation:

Volume= Length multiplied by Width by Heigh th, V=LXWXH.

Square Root Square root is the opposite of a "squared" num­ ber. The square root of a number is, that number which when multiplied by itself (squared) will produce the original or desired number: For ex­ ample, the square root of 1 is 1, 1 X 1 = l. The square root of 4 is 2. The square root of 24 is

4.8990. If an area of 24 square inches must be a perfect square, the length of each side would be

4.8990 inches.

Cube Root A cube root is the opposite of a "cubed" number.

The cube root of a number is that number which 33 when multiplied by itself (cubed) will produce the original or desired number. The cube root oJ 1 is 1, 1 X 1 X l = 1. The cube root of 27 is 3, 3X3X3=27. If a container of 100 cubic inches and cubic in shape is desired, then the length of each side would be 4.6416.

Circumference of A Circle Circumference is the linear measurement of the distance around a circle. The circumference is calculated by multiplying the diameter of the circle by the constant 3.1416 (.,,). This constant was calculated by dividing the circumference of circles by their ·diameter. For example, diameter=!, circumference=3.1416, 1X3.1416=3.1416. Di­ ameter=lO, 10X3.1416=31.4160, diameter=l2, 12X3.1416=37.699.

Area of A Circle Area of a circle is the number of square units of measurement contained in the area circumscribed by a circle of the diameter of the listed number.

This is calculated by the formula ( ,,-) X r' = a, ( ,r) multiplied by the radius squared equals area.

The radius is equal to one half the diameter. For example, diameter=2, radius= 1. 3.1416X 1 =

3.1416 square units in a circle which has a diam­ eter of 2. Another example, diameter =4, radius=

2. 3.1416X2'=3.1416X4,=12.5664 square units.

lion micrograms.

### Page 44

PRINTS The exchange of ideas is essential to everyone, regardless of his vocation or position. Usually, this exchange is carried on by the oral or written word; but under some conditions the use of these alone is impractical. Industry discovered that it could not depend entirely upon written or spoken words for the exchange of ideas because mis­ understanding and misinterpretation arose fre­ quently. A written description of an object can be changed in meaning just by misplacing a comma; the meaning of an oral description can be completely changed by the use of a wrong word. To avoid these possible errors, indus­ try uses drawings to describe objects. For ·this reason, drawing is called the Draftsman's Lan­ guage.

Drawing, as we use it, is a method of conveying ideas concerning the construction or assembly of objects. This is done with the help of lines, notes, abbreviations, and symbols. It is very important that the aviation mechanic who is to make or assemble the object understand the meaning of the different lines, notes, abbreviations, and sym~ bols that are used in a drawing. (See especialJy ~rThe Meaning of Lines" section of this chapter.)

Prints are the link between the engineers who design an aircraft and the men who build, main~ tain, and repair it. A print may be a copy of a working drawing for an aircraft part or group of parts, or for a design of a system or group of systems. They are made by placing a tracing of the drawing over a sheet of chemically treated paper and exposing it to a strong light for a short period of time. When the exposed paper is developed, it turns blue where the light has penetrated the transparent tracing. The inked lines of the tracing, having blocked out the light, show as white lines on a blue background. Other types of sensitized paper have been developed;

prints may have a white background with colored lines or a colored background with white lines.

**35 CHAPTER 2**

AIRCRAFT DRAWINGS A print shows the various steps required in building anything from a simple component to a complete aircraft.

WORKING DRAWINGS Working drawings must give such information as size of the object and all of its parts, its shape and that of all of its parts, specifications as to the material to be used, how the material is to be finished, how the parts are to be assembled, and any other information essential to making and assembling the particular object.

Working drawings may be divided into three classes: (1) Detail drawings, (2) assembly draw­ ings, and (3) installation drawings.

Detail Drawing A detail drawing is a description of a single part, given in such a manner as to describe by Jines, notes, and symbols the specifications as to size, shape, material, and methods of manufacture that are to be used in making the part. Detail drawings are usually rather simple; and, when single parts are sma1l, several detail drawings may be shown on the same sheet or print. (See detail drawing at the top of figure 2-1.)

Assembly Drawing An assembly drawing is a description of an object made up of two or more parts. Examine the assembly drawing in the center of figure 2-l.

It describes the object by giving, in a genera] way, the size and shape. Its primary purpose is to show the relationship of the various parts. An assembly drawing is usua11y more complex than a detail drawing, and is often accompanied by detail drawings of various parts.

### Page 45

NOTE:

-ALL BEND RADII 3/16 -RADIUS OF CUT OUT

- IS 1/4 -L.H. IS SHOWN -R.H.-! OPPOSITE 4 3/8 1 DETAILS i-= 2-3/18 :Ct

**MATERIAL -024 24ST ALCLAD 4 1/8 ASSEMBLY 3 J/2 , , 5/16 SYM.**

**81219AD4 RIVETS 12 REQ, 2 PLATE .064 24ST ALCLAD I REQ.**

**36-31290 SIDE I REQ 36-31290 SIDE I REQ.**

**4---- FORWARD I I I I I I I**

I INSTALLATION I I I I I I I STA 167 FIGVRE 2-l. Working drawings.

36 Installation Drawing An installation drawing is one which includes all necessary information for a part or an assembly of parts in the final position in the aircraft. It shows the dimensions necessary for the location of specific parts with relation to tP,e other parts and reference dimensions that are helpful in later work in the shop. (See installation drawing at the bottom of figure 2-1.)

CARE AND USE OF DRAWINGS Drawings are both expensive and valuable;

consequently, they should be handled carefully.

Open drawings slowly and carefully to prevent tearing the paper. When the drawing is open, smooth out the fold lines instead of bending them backward.

To protect drawings from damage, never spread them on the floor or lay them on a surface covered with tools or other objects that may make holes in the paper. Hands should be free of oil, grease, or other unc1ean matter than can soil or smudge the print.

Never make note-s or marks on a print, as they may confuse other persons and lead to incorrect work. Only authorized persons are permitted to make notes or changes on prints, and they must sign and date any changes they make.

W'hen finished with a drawing, fold and return it to its proper place. Prints are folded originally in a proper size for filing, and care should be taken so that the original folds are always used.

TITLE BLOCKS Every print must have some means of identifi­ cation. This is provided by a title block (see figure 2-2). The title block consists of a drawing number and certain other data concerning the drawing and the object it represents. This infor­ mation is grouped in a prominent place on the print, usually in the lower right-hand corner.

Sometimes the title block is in the form of a strip extending almost the entire distance across the bottom of the sheet.

Although title blocks do not follow a standard form, insofar as layout is concerned, all of them will present essentially the following information:

l. A drawing number to identify the print for filing purposes and to prevent confusing it with any other print.

### Page 46

**FEDERAL AVIATION ADMIN.**

**AERONAUTICAL CENTER OKLAHOMA CITY, OKLA.**

N~ I ADF" "T" ANTE N lsJA LOCATION ~ DETAILS SCALE, FULL s IZ:E APPROVED: SUBMITTED:

,TO$El"H OOE 8.8.l!LACK DR.BY: IISF I DATE DR. AC-A-735 CK.BY, TDY J 4-8-68' FIGURE 2-2. Title block.

2. The name of the part or assembly.

3. The scale to which it is drawn.

4. The date.

5. The name of the firm.

6. The name of the draftsmen, the checker, and the person approving the drawing.

Drawing or Print Numbers All prints are identified by a number, which appears in a number block in the lower right-hand corner of the title block. It may also be shown in other places-such as near the top border line, in the upper right-hand corner, or on the reverse side of the print at both ends-so that the number will show when the print is folded or rolled. The purpose of the number is for quick identification of a print. If a print has more than one sheet and each sheet has the same number, this information is included in the number block, indicating the sheet number and the number of sheets in the series.

Reference and Dash Numbers Reference numbers that appear in the title block refer a person to the numbers of other prints. When more than one detail is shown on a drawing, dash numbers are used. Both parts would have the same drawing number plus an individual number, such as 40267-1 and 40267-2.

In addition to appearing in the title block, dash numbers may appear on the face of the drawing near the parts they identify. Dash numbers are also used to identify right-hand and left-hand parts.

In aircraft, many parts on the left side are like the corresponding parts on the right side but in reverse. The left-hand part is always shown in the drawing. The right-hand part is called for in 37 the title block. Above the title hlock will be found a notation such as: 470204-lLH shown; 470204- 2RH opposite. Both parts carry the same number, but the part called for is distinguished hy a dash number. Some prints have odd numbers for left­ hand parts and even numbers for right-hand parts.

Universal Numbering System The universal numbering system provides a means of identifying standard drawing sizes. In the universal numbering system, each drawing number consists of six or seven digits. The first digit is always 1, 2, 4, or 5 (figure 2-3), and indicates the size of the drawing. The remaining digits identify the · drawing. Many firms have modified this basic svstem to conform to their particular needs. Lett~rs may be used instead of numbers. The letter or number depicting the standard drawing size may be prefixed to the num­ ber, separated from it by a dash. Other number­ ing systems provide a separate box preceding the drawing number for the drawing size identifier.

In other modification of this system the part num­ ber of the depicted assembly is assigned as the drawing number.

SIZE I 2 4 5 LENGTH I t" 17 11 22" INDEFINITE (ROLL) WIDTH 8-1/2" 11" 17 11 17, 22,25.50,34, and 36 inches FIGURE 2-3. Standard blueprint paper sizes.

BILL OF MATERIAL A list of the materials and parts necessary for the fabrication or assembly of a component or system is often included on the drawing. The list usually will be in ruled columns in which are listed the part number, name of the part, material from which the part is to be constructed, the quantity required, and the source of the part or material. A typical bill of material is shown in figure 2-4. On drawings that do not have a hill of material, the data may be indicated directly on the drawing.

On assembly drawings, each item is identified by a number in a circle or square. An arrow con­ necting the number with the item assists in lo­ cating it in the bill of material.

.· ,-:

### Page 47

BILL OF MATERIAL ITEM PART NO. REQUIRED SOURCE CONNECTOR UG-210/U 2 STOCK FIGURE 2-4. A typical bill of material.

OTHER DATA Revision Block Revisions to a drawing arc necessitated by changes in dimensions, design, or materials. The changes are usually listed in ruled columns either adjacent to the title block or at one corner of the drawing. All changes to approved drawings must be carefully noted on all existing prints of the drawing.

'When drawings contain such correction:-., atten­ tion is directed to the changes by lettering or numbering them and listing those changes against the symbol in a revision block (figure 2~5). The revision block contains the identification symbol, the date, the nature of the revision, the authority for the change, and the name of the draftsman who made the change.

To ·distinguish the correctPd dra,ving from its previous version, many firms are including, as part of the title block, a space for entering the appro­ priate sjrmhol to designate that the drav,.ring has been changed or revised.

**2 CHANGED PART NO. 5 E.0.1 2/3/7( 8.K.**

**I REVISED DIMENSIONS J.L.M. 7/1/69 E.K.P.**

**NO. REVISION AUTH. DATE SIGN.**

FIGCRE 2-.S. Revision block.

Notes Notes are added to dra,vings for various rea­ sons. Some of these notes refer to methods of attachment or construction. Others give alter­ natives, so that the drawing can be used for different styles of the same object. Still others list modifications that are available.

Notes may be found alongside the item to which they refer. If the notes are lengthy, they may be placed elsewhere on the drawing and identified by letters or numbers. Notes are used 38 only when the information cannot be conveyed in the conventional manner or when it is desirable to avoid crowding the drawing. Figure 2-1 illus­ trates one method of depicting notes.

When the note refers to a specific part, a light line with an arrowhead leads from the note to the part. If it applies to more than one part, the note is so worded that no mistake can be made as to the parts to which it pertains. When there are several notes, they are generally grouped together and numbered consecutively.

Zone Numbers Zone numbers on dra,v·ings are similar to the numbers and letters printed on the borders of a map. They arc there to help locate a particular point. To find a point, mentally draw horizontal and vertical lines from the letters and numerals specified; the point where these lines would inter­ sect is the area sought.

Cse the same method to locate parts, sections, and views on large drawings, particularly as­ sembly drawings. Parts numbered in the title block can be located on the drawing by finding the numbers in squares along thP. lower border.

Zone numbers read from right to left.

Station Numbers A numbering system is used on large assemblies for aircraft to Jocate stations such as fuselage frames. Fuselage Frame-Sta 18.S indicates that the frame is lK) inches from the datum of the aircraft. The measurement is usuaily taken from the nose or zero station, but in some instances it may be taken from the fire wall or some other point chosen by the manufacturer.

The same station numbering system is used for wing and stabilizer frames. The measurement is taken from the center line or zero station of the aircraft.

Finish Marks Finish marks are used to indicate the surface that must be machine finished. Such finished surfaces have a better appearance and allow a doser fit with adjoining parts. During the finishing process the required limits and tolerances must be observed. Do not confuse machined finishes with those of paint, enamel, chromium plating, and similar coating.

### Page 48

F1GlJRE 2-6. Pictorial drawing.

Tolerances When a given dimension on a print shows an allowable variation, the plus ( +) figure indicates the maximum, and the minus ( - ) figure the minimum, allowable variation. The sum of the plus and minus allowance figures is called toler­ ance. For example, using .225 + .0025 - .0005, the plus and minus figures indicate the part will he acceptable if it is not more than .0025 larger than the .225 given dimension, or not more than . 0005 smaller than the .225 dimension. Tolerance in this example is .0030 (.0025 max. plus .005 min.).

If the plus and minus aHowances are the same, you will find them presented as .224 ± .0025. The tolerance would then be .0050. Allowance can be indicated in either fractional or decimal form.

When very accurate dimensions are necessary, decimal allowances are used. :Fractional allow­ ances are sufficient when close dimensions are not required. Standard tolerances of -.010 or -%2 may be given in the title block of many drawings, to apply throughout the drawing.

METHODS OF ILLUSTRATING OBJECTS A number of methods are used to illustrate objects graphically. The most common are pic­ torial drawings, orthographic projections, and diagrams.

Pictorial Drawings A pictorial drawing, figure 2-6, is similar to a photograph. It shows an object as it appears to the eye, but it is not satisfactory for showing complex forms and shapes .. Pictorial drawings are useful in showing the general appearance of an object and are used extensively with orthographic projection drawings. Pictorial drawings are used in maintenance, overhaul, and part numbers.

39 Orthographic Projection Drawings fn order to show the exact size and shape of all the parts of complex objects, a number of views are necessary. This is the system used in ortho­ graphic projection.

In orthographic projection there are six possible views of an object, because all objects have six sides~front, top, bottom, rear, right side, and left side. Figure 2-7(a) shows an object placed in a transparent box, hinged at the edges. The projections on the sides of the box are the views as seen looking straight at the object through each side. If the outlines of the object are drawn on each surface and -ihe box opened as shown in (b), then laid flat as shown in (c), the .result is a six­ view orthographic projection.

It is se]dom necessary to show all six views to portray an object clearly; therefore, only those views necessary to iHustrate the required char­ acteristics of the object are drawn. One-view, two.

view, and three~view drawings are the most com­ mon. Regardless of the number of views used, the arrangement is generaHy as shown in figure 2-7, with the front .view being the principal one .

If the right-side view is shown, ii will be to the right of the front view. If the left-side view is shown, it will be to the left of the front view.

The top and bottom views, if included, will be shown in their respective positions relative to the front view.

One-view drawings are commonly used for ob­ jects of uniform thickness, such as gaskets, shims, and plates. A dimensional note gives the thickness as shown in figure 2-8. One-view drawings are also commonly used for cylindrical, spherical, or square parts if all the necessary dimensions can be properly shown in one view.

When space is limited and two views must be shown, symmetrical objects are often represented by ha1f views, as illustrated in figure 2-9.

Aircraft drawings seldom show more than two principal, or complete, views of an object. In­ stead, generally there will he one complete view and one or more detail views or sectional views.

Detail View A detail view shows only a part of the object but in greater detail and to a larger scale than the prindpal view. The part that is shown in detail elsewhere on the drawing is usually encircled by a heavy line on the principal view. Figure 2-10 is an example of the use · of detail views. The

### Page 49

r---- ~ /OJ--7) //; I I ,- ,~I / -- ~,,-/ : I --..... / W '\.,...,.. I I -,- - _ _ _ / _ ---1 I I tJ I ---L-- J I I \ I / I -.. I cs I g : ,,,..- ,,,,-- __ _ // l - /1 ,, I ,, I I":--~' //,,- I I -- I 1 I I I ,,-l I I I ,,,...-

- I 1/ - -1 I _ _,, I I I I ,,- __ I

I / I -- -) I / I _,, le,, /

- I .,,/''

- -- -.1/

(a) OhJect ,---------, I I CD TOP I I I I ,-- - I -----+--- \ I I Q\ \ I I I \ I I L. ______ j

(b) Hotated I I r------------ --l------- -------, 1 I I I 1 I I I I I ID I : -- I I I : LEFT SIDE FRONT I RIGHT SIDE I REAR J

L------------I I I I I I --f------------J I DJ : BOTTOM I L _ - - - - __ J

(c) FIGURE 2-7. Orthographic projection.

principal view shows the complete control wheel, while the detail view is an enlarged drawing of a portion of the control wheel.

Sectional Views A section or sectional view is obtained by cutting away part of an object to show the shape and construction at the cutting plane. The part or parts cut away ~re shown by the use of section (cross-hatching) lines.

Sectional views are used when the interior con­ struction or hidden features of an object cannot 40 he shown clearly by exterior views. For example, figure 2-11, a sectional view of a coaxial cable connector, shows the internal construction of the connector. This is known as a full section. Other types of sections are described in the following paragraphs.

Half Sections In a half section, the cutting plane extends only halfway across the object, leaving the other half of the object as an exterior view. Half sections are

### Page 50

I -4-- --4- 1 , 032 I THICK - -- - - +- - - "--.:: I I I I I -$-- I --~-- - FIGURE - . 2 8 One-view drawing.

3 . I oh3"ect with exterior F E 2 9 Symmetnca IGI;R - • • half view.

:FIGURE 2-10. Detail view.

41 ',:---'

### Page 51

FIGURE 2-11. Sectional view of a cable connector.

used to advantage with symmetrical objects to show both the interior and exterior.

Figure 2-12 is a half-sectional view of a quick disconnect used in aircraft fluid systems.

Revolved Sections A revolved section drawn directly on the ex­ terior view shows the shape of the cross section of a part, such as the spoke of a wheel. An example of a revolved section is shown in figure 2-13.

Removed Sections Removed sections illustrate particular parts of an object. They are drawn like revolved sections, except that they are placed at one side and, to QUICK

DISCONNECT COUPLING -- bring out pertinent details, are often drawn to a larger scale than the view on which they are indicated.

Figure 2-14 is an illustration of removed sec­ tions. Section A-A shows the cross-sectional shape of the object at cutting plane line A-A. Section B-B shows the cross-sectional shape at cutting plane line B-B. These sectional views are drawn to the same scale as the principal view; however, as already mentioned, they are often drawn to a 1arger scale to bring out pertinent details.

THE MEANING OF LINES Every drawing is composed of lines. Lines mark the boundaries, edges, and intersection of surfaces.

Lines are used to show dimensions and hidden surfaces, and to indicate centers. Obviously, if the same kind of line is used to show all of these things, a drawing becomes a meaningless collection of lines. For this reason, various kinds of standard­ ized lines are used on aircraft drawings. These are illustrated in figure 2-15, and their correct uses are shown in figure 2-16.

Most drawings use three widths, or intensities, of lines: thin, medium, or thick. These lines may vary somewhat on different drawings, but there will always be a noticeable difference between a thin and a thick line, with the width of the medium line somewhere between the two.

FIGURE 2-12. Half section.

### Page 52

FIGURE 2-13. Revolved sections.

Center Lines Center lines are made up of alternate long and short dashes. They indicate the center of an object or part of an object. Where center lines cross, the short dashes intersect symmetrically. In the case of very smaJI circles, the center lines may be shown unbroken.

Dimension Lines A dimension line is a light solid line, broken at the midpoint for insertion of measurement indi· cations, and having opposite pointing arrowheads at each end to show origin and termination of a measurement. They are generally parallel to the line for which the dimension is given, and are usually placed outside the outline of the object and between views if more than one view is shown.

All dimensions and lettering are placed so that they will read from left to right. The dimension of an angle is indicated by placing the degree of the angle in its arc. The dimensions of circular parts are always given in terms of the diameter of the circle and are usually marked with the letter D or the abbreviation DIA following the dimension.

The dimension of an arc is given in terms of its radius and is marked with the Jetter R following the dimension. ParalJel dimensions are placed so that the longest dimension is farthest from the outline and the shortest dimension is closest to 43 4

• B-B FIGURE 2-14. Removed sections.

the outline of the object. On a drawing showing several views, the dimensions will be placed upon each view to show its details to the best advantage.

In dimensioning distances between holes in an object, dimensions are usually given from center to center rather than from outside to outside of the holes. When a number of holes of various sizes are shown, the desired diameters are given on a leader followed by notes indicating the ma­ chining operations for each hole. If a part is to have three holes of equal size, equally spaced, this information is given. For precision work, sizes are given in decimals. Diameters and depths are given for counterbored holes. For countersunk holes the angle of countersinking and the diam­ eters are given. Study the examples shown in figure 2-17.

The dimensions given for fits signify the amount of clearance allowable between moving parts. A positive allowance is indicated for a part that is to slide or revolve upon another part. A negative allowance is one given for a force fit. Whenever possible, the tolerance and allowances. for desired fits conform to those set up in the American Standard for Tolerances, Allowances, and Gages for Metal Fits. The classes of fits specified in the standard may be indicated on assembly drawings.

·, -~

### Page 53

CE:\TER LINE Till:\ DU.fEi\:SION TIil:\ LEADER THI/\ BHEAK (LONG) 'J;1, ii THIX

BHEAK I SHORT) THICK Pl!AXTOM THIX SECTIO:\INC: TIIIX I IIDDEN \IEDl\'M STITCH LIXE --- - - - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - -- - - -- ------ \IEDIU~f

01.'TLIXE OR VISIBLE L!XE DAT\'~! L!:\E Cl 1TTl'.\C PI.A:\'E i C\'TTl:\C: PLAXE FOR

COMPLEX OH OFFSET V!E\\'S r ---, TllICK THICK i EXTHA T!IICK I EXTRA T!IICK 4irlt' - - -...., EXTRA TIIICK FIGURE 2-15. The meaning of lines.

Phantom i-line ,,--- ' ' -- ~ :

' ' ---r::-- Dimension line Center line " ,, ( ') . :

\ , I -----t--------'-L._ __ _y- { '-"·· Outline Hidden line A Cutting plane !me FIG-URE 2-16. Correct uses of lines.

44 Extension line Leader line Sectioning line

**SECTION AA**

### Page 54

.312t5 DRILL ~

• 3217 REAM_) •• __ / 1/4 DRILL ¥ 7/16 C' BORE 1/8 DEEP 2 HOLES , •• 2560 DR~ 3/16 DRILL ao0 c'stc TO 6/16 DIA 1/8 Df!EP, 3 HOLES FIGURE 2-17. Dimensioning holes.

Leader Lines Leaders are solid Jines with one arrowhead and indicate a part or portion to which a note, number, or other reference applies.

Break Lines Break lines indicate that a portion of the object is not shown on the drawing. Short breaks are made by solid, freehand lines. For long breaks, solid ruled lines with zigzags are used. Shafts~ rods, tubes, and other such parts which have a portion of their length broken out, have the ends of the break drawn as indicated in figure 2-16.

Phantom Lines Phar1tom lines indicate the alternate position of parts of the object or the relative position of a missing part. Phantom lines are composed of one long and two short evenly spaced dashes.

Sectioning Lines Sectioning lines indicate the exposed surfaces of an object in sectional view. They are generally thin, full lines, hut may vary with the kind of material shown in section.

45 Hidden Lines Hidden lines indicate invisible edges or con­ tours. Hidden lines consist of short dashes evenly spaced and are frequently referred to as dash lines.

Outline or Visible Lines The outline or visible line is used for all lines on the drawing representing visible lines on the object .

Stitch Lines Stitch lines indicate stitching or sewing lines and consist of a series of evenly spaced dashes.

Cutting Plane and Viewing Plane Lines Cutting plane lines indicate the plane in which a sectional view of the object is taken. In figure 2-16, plane line A-A indicates the plane in which section A-A is taken.

Viewing plane lines indicate the plane from which a surface is viewed.

READING DRAWINGS A drawing cannot be read all at once any more than a whole page of print can be read at a glance. Both must be read a line at a time. To read a drawing effectively, follow a systematic procedure.

Upon opening a drawing, read the drawing number and the description of the article. Next, check the model affected, the latest change letter, and the next assembly listed. Having determined that the drawing is the correct one, proceed to read the illustration(s).

In reading a multiview drawing, first get a general idea of the shape of the object by scanning all the views; then select one view for a more careful study. By referring hack and forth to the adjacent view, it will be possible to determine what each line represents.

Each line on a view represents a change in the direction of a surface, hut another view must be consulted to determine what the change is. For example, a cirde on one view may mean either a hole or a protruding boss, as in the top view of the object in figure 2-18. Looking at the top view, we see two circles; however, the other view must be consulted to determine what each circle repre­ sents. A glance at the other view tells us that the smaller circle represents a hole, and the larger

### Page 55

I : : I ' ' I I I I I I : I : L_t_.J I _j ~----+- F.wm:u: 2--18. Reading views.

circle represenH~ a protruding .bo~s. Jn the same way, the top vie\v must he t'On$u.!t,·d to <klerm!ne the shape of the hole and the protruding hot.-~.

It can be seen from thi:c- exam pk· that on(" eannot read a print by looking at a i;ingfo vic'i'•·, when more than one view is given. Two views wm not always describf': an ohj~ct. and \dwn three vie-.\·~ are given. all three must he consuher1. t(} be 1-u:e the shape has been read correctiy.

After determining the shape of an object. <.foR termine its size. Information on d.im{:m.don.s and tolerances is given so that <·crtain design requir(:R roents may be met. Dimens~ons are indicatr-d by figm.·es either with or without th.e inch :rnark. lf no inch mark is used. the dimension is in inches.

It is customary to give part dimensions and an.

overaH dimension that gives the greatest length of the part. If the ov.craU dimension is missing, it can be determined by add·ing the separate part dimensions.

Drawings may be dimensioned in tlel'..·.:imals or fractions. This ii-i especially true· in ref~renee to tolerances. Many firms. instead of using plus .an<l minus signs for tolerances~ give tJv, complete diM mension for both tolerance~. For example. if a.

dimension is 2 inches with a plus or minus tnlerance of 0.01, the drawing would show the total dimensions as: i:~t- A print tolerance (usually foi;nd in the title block) is a general tolerance that can be applied to parts ,vhere the dimensions are noncritical. Where a tolerance is not shown on a dimension line, the print tolerance applies.

To complete the reading of a drawing, read the general notes and the contents of the material block, check and find the variouf' changes in­ corporated, and read the special information given in or near views and sections.

DIAGRAMS A diagram may be defined as a graphic represen­ tation of an assembly or system, indicating the various parts and expressing the methods or principles of operation.

There are manv tvpei::. of di2grams; however~ thOti'¢ ,,rith which the aviation mechanic wiJI he concerned during the performance of liis joh may be grouped into two e!asRcs or ·types- insta1lation djagram$ and i,;chemati('. Jiagrams.

lnstuUation Diagrams Figure 2~-19 i:-, an exampJP, of an installation diagram. Thi~ is .a diagram of the gust lock sys­ tem.:; of an ain:raft. ft jdcntifie::; ead1 of the com­ ponent:;, in the :.:i,:;tems and :::;howi,; their ]oca'tion in the .aircraft. Each letter (A, .B, C, etc.) on the pr,n,jpal v,;~:w refor.~ to 8 detail -..,iiew located else­ ,,1--Ju:n~ on tlH~ di.:.i~r;Jm. Eai'h dctaH view is an enlarged dra\•.:in,!! of a portion of a ~vstem. The numbers on the v,1rion,;; v(r"'" an:>: referred to as caH out:;, and ,:,en'<' t(1 ideniHy t:>.ach component.

fos·wllati0r dia~nn.nC" arr:: rn,;ed extensively in aircraft maintcnann~ and repair manuals and arc invahwbl(' in idt~ntif:~iug and locating com.

fH>nents an,1 1.m<lerstanding thf' operation of vari­ n1b :--ystem~.

Sch~manc Die:grram t;chemc..ric diag:nnrn, do not indicate the location.

of indiviflaaI (~ompnnen1s .in the aircraft, hut do locat-3 comporn~,1t..: with rnsp~f't. to each other within the sy;.:.em .. Figun· :!---:.!:I) iHnstrates a sche­ matic diagrnm nf an nircrnft hydraulic system.

The hydraulic pre:-sure ;rag:c j1, not necessarily locat<r·<l ;;;.bo;;f: 1 be landing gear selector valve in thf': aircr::d:~ how:o:vcr, it j~ conm~cted to the pres­ :-u.rc line that leu<l.~· w ibe seleetor valve.

5d1ematfr d1a,:;rmn~ (if this typ~ arc used mainly m !n-.~,bJl':.;.,hooting. Nof.c dwt ~ad1 line is eodcd

### Page 56

L Gust lock handle

2. Right aileron latch

3. Retracting sp .

4. Sprin b nngs (3) g ungee

5. Push Rod

6. Rudder latch 7, Elevator latch 8· Turnbuckles

9. Seals

10. L f e t aileron

11. Tie cable

12. Lock cable FIGURE 2-19 E 13. Unlock cab!

• xampl f" e e o mstallation d" iagram ( gust lock system) • .. ) ("'

### Page 57

SYSTEM PRESSURE II I I I I I I I 11! ENGINE PUMP SUCTION f??22?Z3 IDLING CIRCUIT PUMP PRESSURE fyooo6c,d RETURN FLOW

**HAND PUMP PRESSURE**

HAND PUMP SUCTION ~ CHECK VALVE

BRAKE ACCUMULATOR TO BRAKE SYSTEM_.,- ~ rF RESTRICTOR

**THERMAL RELIEF VALVE EMER. /**

**SELECTOR VAL VE**

**UNLOADING AND RELIEF VALVE**

**RESERVOIR**

**RH ENGINE PUMP**

**VENT LINE**

LH ENGINE PUMP FIGURE 2-20. Aircraft hydraulic system schematic.

for ease of reading and tracing the flow. Each component is identified by name, and its location within the system can be ascertained by noting the lines that lead into and out of the unit.

In tracing the flow of fluid through the system, it can be seen that the engine-driven pumps re­ ceive a supply of fluid from the reservoir. One-way check valves are installed in both left and right pump pressure lines so that failure of one pump 48 will not render the pressure from the other pump ineffective. Fluid flows to the relief side of the unloading and relief valve, and through the check valve, which will hold pressure built up beyond this point. Pressure is then directed through all lines leading to each selector valve, where it is checked if no units are being operated.

Pressure builds up in the line routed to the control port of the unloading valve and begins to

### Page 58

**BLOCK IN ADD DETAIL I I .**

I I .

. : - -

**DARKEN VIEWS ADD DIMENSIONS**

1.1<--r -.i 1-- J·f _, L I I I I" I I I ] T ~ B lr.~~a .l ¥+' i-- 3" ~T 'N?-,7 WEiOGE'" WOK FIGURE 2-21. Steps in sketching.

charge the system accumulator. Pressure to charge the brake accumulator is routed through a check valve incorporated in the thermal relief valve; this prevents the pressure from returning to the general system.

Although the general system accumulator starts charging at the same time, it will not charge as fast, because the fluid passes through a restrictor valve. The general system pressure will bleed into the brake system whenever the brake pressure drops below system pressure.

As soon as the pressure reaches the relief valve setting, the valve will open slightly. General sys­ tem pressure increases unti1 it reaches the value established as the system operating pressure. At this point, through the line leading to the control part of the unloading valve, the pressure will force the unloading and relief valve completely open. The pressure trapped in the system by the one-way check valve holds the value open to create an idling circuit, which prevails until some unit-of the hydraulic system is operated.

Schematic diagrams, like installation diagrams, are used extensively in aircraft manuals.

DRAWING SKETCHES A sketch is a simple, rough drawing that is made rapidly and without much detail. Sketches 49 may take many forms-from a simple pictorial presentation to a multiview orthographic pro­ jection.

A sketch is frequently drawn for use in manu­ facturing a replacement part. Such a sketch must provide all necessary information to those persons who must manufacture the part.

A mechanic need not be an accomplished artist.

However, in many situations, he will need to prepare a drawing to present an idea for a new design, a modification, or a repair method. The medium of sketching is an excellent way of ac­ complishing this.

The rules and conventional practices for making mechanical drawings are followed to the extent that all views needed to portray an object accu­ rately are shown in their proper relationship. It is also necessary to Observe the rules for correct line use (figures 2-15 and 2-16) and dimensioning.

To make a sketch, first determine what views are necessary to portray the object; then block in the views, using light c~mstruction lines. Next, complete the details~ darken the object outline, and sketch extension and dimension lines. Com­ plete the drawing by adding notes, dimensions, title, date and, when necessary, the sketcher's name. The steps in making a sketch of an object are illustrated in figure 2-21.

### Page 59

**CAST IRON STEEL**

**BRASS, ERONZE,**

AND COPPER WOOD ACROSS GRAIN MAGI\"ESIUM,

**ALUMINUM AND**

**ALUMINUM ALLOYS**

**RUBBER, PLASTIC**

**ELECTRICAL INSULATION**

**BABBITT, LEAD,**

**ZINC AND ALLOYS**

**WOOD WITH GRAIN**

**CORK, FELT, FABRIC**

**ASBESTOS, LEATHER**

AND FIBRE FIGURE 2-22. Material symbols.

The degree to which a sketch is complete will depend on its intended use. Obviously, a sketch used only to represent an object pictoria1Iy need not be dimensioned. If a part is to be manu­ factured from the sketch, it should show all the necessary construction details.

DRAWING SYMBOLS The drawings for a component are composed largely of symbols and conventions representing its shape and material. Symbols are the shorthand of drawing. They graphically portray the char­ acteristics of a component, with a minimum amount of drawing.

Material Symbols Section-line symbols show the kind of material from which the part is to be constructed. The material may not be indicated symbolically when its exact specification must also be shown else- 50 where on the drawing. In this case, the more easily drawn symbol for cast iron is used for the sectioning, and the material specification is listed in the bill of materials or indicated in a note.

Figure 2-22 iilustrates a few standard material symbols.

Shape Symbols Symbols can be used to excellent advantage, when it is desired to show the shape of an object.

Typical shape symbols used on aircraft drawings are shown in figure 2-23. Shape symbols a:re usua1ly shown on a drawing as a revolved or removed section.

Electrical Symbols Electrical syu bols (figure 2-24) represent vari­ ous electrical de ·ices rather than an actual draw­ ing of the units. Having learned what the various symbols indicate, it becomes relatively simple to look at an electrical diagram and determine what each unit is, what function it serves, and how it is connected in the system.

CARE OF DRAFTING INSTRUMENTS Good drawing instruments are expensive pre­ cision tools. Reasonable care given to them during their use and storage will prolong their service life.

T-squares, triangles, and scales should not be used, or placed, where their surfaces or edges may be damaged. Use a drawing board only for its intended purpose, and not in a manner that will mar the working surface.

Compasses, dividers, and pens will provide better results with less annoyance, if they are correctly shaped and sharpened, and they are not damaged by careless handling.

Store drawing instruments in a place where they are not likely to be damaged by contact with other tools or equipment. Protect compass and divider points by inserting them into a piece of soft rubber or similar material. Never store ink pens without first cleaning and drying them thoroughly.

MICROFILM The practice of recording drawings, parts cata­ logs, and maintenance and overhaul manuals on microfilms was introduced in recent years. Micro­ film is regular 16-mm. or 35-mm. film. Since 35-mm. film is larger, it provides a ·better repro­ duction of drawings. Depending on the size of

### Page 60

**SQUARE SECTION (METAL)**

**ROUND SECTION (SOLID)**

ANGLE SECTION (METAL) I BEAM (METAL) 22/ii~

SQUARE SECTION (WOOD) ~-@~ < ~== a

**ROUND SECTION (TUBULAR)**

**CHANNEL SECTION (METAL)**

SQUARE SECTION (TABULAR) ] FIGURE 2-23. Shape symbols.

the drawing to be reproduced, a varying number of drawings can be photographed on one reel of 35-mm. film. To view or read drawings or manuals on a reel of film, you need either a portable 35-mm.

film projector or a microfilm reader o:r viewer.

The advantage of microfilm is that several reels, which represent perhaps hundreds of drawings, require only a small amount of storage space.

Too, a person working on an aircraft may need to refer to a specific dimension. He can place the reel of microfilm in a projector, locate t_he drawing or desired information, and read the dimension.

If he has to study a detail of the drawing, or work with the drawing for a long period of time, an enlarged photographic reproduction can he ;made, using the microfilm as a negativr.

Microfilm of drawings has many other uses and advantages. However, microfilm js not intended to replace the need for original drawings, especially where the originals are modified and kept current over a long period of time.

51 When drawings are filmed on continuous reels, corrections can he made by cutting out super­ seded drawings and splicing in the revised ones.

When these corrections become numerous, the procedure becomes impractical and is discarded in favor of again filming all the related drawings.

A method that allows corrections to he made easily is to photograph the drawings and then cut up the film into individual slides. This has one disadvantage; it requires considerable time to convert the film into slides, insert them into transparent protective envelopes, and arrange them in sequence so that desired drawings can be located quickly.

A 70-mm. microfilm has become available very recently. With it, larger size drawings can be reproduced as individual frames or slides, and these can be inserted in regular paper envelopes and kept in an ordinary file. When held to the light, this large microfilm can be read with the naked eye.

. ~ .

### Page 61

~---- CONDENSERS --- ,----- LAMPS-Red, Green, White ---- --H- ,------CONDUCTORS--------..

¢ ¢ $ JIIC --n--+

SINGLE INTERSECTING CROSSING OVER ELECTRICALLY EACH 0TH ER ,------MOTORS-----~ A.C. D.C.

,------METERS-----~ ----0- --0--

VOLT AMMETER ,--------RELAYS---------~ SPST

**MOMENTARY ON**

**SPDT MPDT**

**NORMAL OR NORMAL OR**

**MOMENTARY MOMENTARY**

**CONTACTS CONTACTS**

TRANSFORMER SOLENOID ,------GENERATORS----~ D.C. A.C.

~

**RESISTOR RHEOSTAT ,------CONNECTORS---------..**

p s REMOVABLE []]B FIXED

NOT ALL C PINS D SHOWN p ALL PINS SHOW s p rn ,-------CIRCUIT BREAKERS -----~ s

**DESIGNATED PINS**

DESIGNATED SOCKETS ro n

**AUTOMATIC PUSH**

**RESET RESET**

**PUSH RESET SWITCH MOMENTARY**

**PULL OFF TYPE SWITCH TYPE**

**CURRENT BATTERY BUS**

LIMITER ~---------- 0 ---,--SWITCHES --0--------------..

0--0 .,-. ~ 0---. ~ 0---,: ~ 0-,0 0--.- SPST SPST SPOT SPDT SPOT $PDT I} BIMETAL-

**MOMENTARY CENTER MOMEN- SPDT CENTER OFF NORMAL OR PRES- IC THERM-**

ON OFF TARY ON NORMAL OR MOMENTARY SURE AL CUT- <Yfo o I 0-.-C, CONTACTS:

_,,.., ', 0 0-J 0

1...- ~ cY'O 'o MPST M~~ 0

CENTER OFF FUSE ~ IOA BASIC o NORMAL POSITION

• MOMENTARY POSITION

MECHANICAL LINKAGE SPLICE -<~

**ELECTRICAL**

**DISCONNECT**

**MOMENTARY OUT**

CONTACTS 00 /o ~USH-BUTTON TY~~~

C, ' C, 0 0 0 GROUND J_ C, ""

**MOMENTARY ON I**

**NORMAL NORMAL OR**

**ON MOMENTARY**

**CONTACTS**

POLARITY DC +

POSITIVE NEGATIVE FIGURE 2-24. Electrical symbols.

### Page 62

PURPOSE The primary purpose of aircraft weight and balance control is safety. A secondary purpose is to achieve the utmost in efficiency during flight.

Improper loading reduces the efficiency of an aircraft from the standpoint of ceiling, maneuver­ ability, rate of climb, speed, and fuel consumption.

It can be the cause of failure to complete a flight, or even to start it. Possible loss of life and de­ struction of valuable equipment may result from overstressed structures or from a sudden shift in cargo and consequent change in flight character­ istics.

The empty weight and the corresponding e.g.

(center of gravity) of all civil aircraft must be determined at the time of certification. The manu­ facturer can weigh the aircraft, or he can compute the weight and balance report. A manufacturer is permitted to weigh one aircraft out of each 10 produced. The remaining nine aircraft are issued a computed weight and balance report based on the aVeraged figures of aircraft that are actually weighed. The condition of the aircraft at the time of determining empty weight must be one that is well defined and can be easily repeated.

NEED FOR REWEIGHING Aircraft have a tendency to gain weight because of the accumulation of dirt, greases, etc., in areas not readily accessible for washing and cleaning.

The weight gained in any given period of time will depend on the function of the aircraft. its hours in flight, atmospheric conditions, and the type landing field from which it is operating. For this reason, periodic aircraft weighings are desirable and, in the case of air carrier and air taxi aircraft, are required by Federal Aviation Regulations.

Privately owned and operated aircraft are not required by regulation to be weighed periodicalfy.

They are usually weighed when originally certifi­ cated, or after making major alterations that can affect the weight and balance. Even though the 53 CHAPTER 3

AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND BALANCE aircraft need not be weighed, it must be loaded so that the maximum weight and e.g. limits are not exceeded during operation.

Airline aircraft (scheduled and nonscheduled) carrying passengers or cargo are subject to certain rules that require owners to show that the aircraft is properly loaded and will not exceed the author­ ized weight and balance limitations during oper­ ation.

THEORY OF WEIGHT AND BALANCE The theory of weight and balance is extremely simple. It is that of the familiar lever that is in equilibrium or balance when it rests on the fulcrum in a level position. The influence of weight is directly dependent upon its distance from the fulcrum. To balance the )ever the weight must be distributed so that the turning effect is the same on one side of the fulcrum as on the other. In general, a lighter weight far out on the lever has the same effect as a heavy weight near the fulcrum. The distance of any object from the fulcrum is called the lever arm. The lever arm multiplied by the weight of the object is its turning effect about the fulcrum. This turning effect is known as the moment.

Similarly, an aircraft is balanced if it remains level when suspended from an imaginary point.

This point is the location of its ideal e.g. An air# craft in balance does not have to he perfectly level, hut it must be reasonably close to it. Obtaining this balance is simply a matter of placing loads so that the average arm of the loaded aircraft falls FIGURE 3~ 1. An airplane suspended from its center of gravity (e.g.).

### Page 63

within the e.g. range. The exact location of the range is specified for each type of airplane.

MATHEMATICAL PROOF Weight and balance control consists of mathe­ matical proof of the correct weight, baJance, and loading withiri specified limits. These limits are set forth in the specifications for a particular air­ craft. The removal or addition of equipment changes the aircraft empty weight and the e.g.

The useful load is affected accordingly. The effects these changes produce on the balance of an air­ craft must be investigated to determine the effect on the flight characteristics of the aircraft.

WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA Weight and balance data can be obtained from the following sources:

a. The aircraft specifications.

b. The aircraft operating limitations.

c. The aircraft flight manual.

d. The aircraft weight and balance report.

When weight and balance records have been lost and cannot be duplicated from any source, the aircraft must be re-weighed. A new set of weight and balance records must be computed and compiled.

TERMINOLOGY In the study of weight and balance principles, computation, and control, it is necessary to know the meaning of the terms used. The following terminology is used in the practical application of weight and balance control, and should be thoroughly studied.

The Datum The datum is an imaginary vertical plane from which all horizontal measurements are taken for balance purposes, with the aircraft in level flight attitude. It is a plane at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the aircraft. For each aircraft make and model, all locations of equipment, tanks, baggage compartments, seats, engines, pro­ pellers, etc., are listed in the Aircraft Specification or Type Certificate Data Sheets as being so many inches from the datum. There is no fixed rule for the location of the datum. In most cases it is located on the ·nose of the aircraft or some point on the aircraft structure itself. In a few cases, 54 it is located a certain distance forward of the nose section of the aircraft. The manufacturer has the choice of locating the datum where it is most convenient for measurement, locating equipment, and weight-and~balance computation.

The datum location is indicated on most air ..

craft specifications. On some of the older aircraft, where the datum is not indicated, any convenient datum may be selected. However, once the datum is selected, it must be properly identified so that anyone who reads the figures wiH have no doubt about the exact datum location. Figure 3-2 shows some datum locations used by manufacturers.

The Arm The arm is the horizontal distance that an item of equipment is located from the datum. The arm's distance is always given or measured in inches, and, except for a location ,v·hich might .

be exactly on the datum (0), it is preceded by the algebraic sign for plus ( +) or minus (- ). The plus ( +) sign indicates a distance aft of the datum and the minus ( - ) sign indicates a distance for­ ward of the datum. If the manufacturer chooses a datum that is at the most forward location on an aircraft (or some distance forward of the aircraft), all the arms will be plus ( +) arms. Location of the datum at any other point on the aircraft will result in some arms being plus ( + ), or aft of the datum, and some arms minus ( - ), or forward of the datum.

The arm of each item is usually included in parentheses immediately after the item's name or weight in the specifications for the aircraft,

e.g., seat ( +23). W'hen such information is not given, it must be obtained by actual measurement.

Datum, arm, e.g., and the forward and aft e.g.

limits are illustrated in figure 3-3.

The Moment A moment is the product of a weight multiplied by its arm. The moment of an item about the datum is obtained by multiplying the weight of the item by its horizontal distance from the datum. Likewise, the moment of an item about the e.g. can be computed by multiplying its weight by the horizontal distance from the e.g.

A 20-pound weight located 30 inches from the datum would have a moment of 20 X 30 or 600 lb.-in. Whether the value of 600 lb.-in. is preceded by a plus ( +) or minus ( - ) sign depends on

### Page 64

Oatum

(a) Firewall location ( b) Nose location ( c) Nose locatlon ( d} Center line of rotation location FrGt:RE 3-2. Various datum locations.

whether the moment is the result of a weight being removed. or added and its locati()n in relation to the datum. Any item of weight added to the aircraft either side of the datum is plus weight.

55 Any weight item removed is a minus weight.

When multiplying a weight by an arm~ the re~ sulting moment is plus if the signs are a.like and minus if the signs are unlike.

### Page 65

Datum I 1~~~~~~~~~~-Arm~~~~~~~~~~~[__ I Ji-,(~--Arm ----1..i I D Limits Fwd. Aft ·

e.g.

(Average Arm) D .FIGURE 3-3. Dalmn, arm, e.g., and e.g. mits.

Center of Gravity The e.g. of an aircraft 1s a point about \.\'·hich the nose-heavy and tail-heavy moments are ex­ actly equal in nw.~nitudc. An aireraft suspended from thi~ point would have no tendency to rotate in either a noscup or nosetlown attitude. It is the point about ""'hich the ,veight of an airplane or any ohjcct iR concentrated.

Maximum Weight The maximum \\eight is the maximum author­ ized weight of the airnaft and its contents, and is indicated in the ,.;pccifications. For many air­ craft there arc variations to the maximum allow­ aLlc weight, depending on the purpose and ('011- dition:,,; under \'\ hieh the aircraft is to be flown.

For example. a certain airer.aft may he allowed a maxi1111nn groRs weiµ:ht of 2,750 pounds "\vhen flo\\Jl in the normal category, hut ,vhen flown in thf' utility category, the same aircraft's maximum a]lowalilc gross ,vt~iµ:ht would he 2,l'i5 pounds.

Empty Weight The empty weight of an aircraft inc]mles a11 operating- equipment. that has a fixed location and is actually installed in the aircraft. It includes the weight of the airframe, powcrplant, required equipment, optional or spt'eia] equipment, fixed La1laRt, hydraulic fluid. and residual fuel and oil.

Residual fuel and oil are the fluids that will not. norma1ly drain out because they are trapped in the fuel lines, oil lines, and tanks. They must he indudC'd in the aircraft's empty weight. Infor- 56 mation regarding residual fluids in aircraft systems which must be included in the empty weight will he indicated in the Aircraft Specification.

Useful Load The useful load of an aircraft is determined by subtracting the empty weight from the maximum allowable gross weight. For aircraft certificated in both the normal and utility categories, there may he two useful loads listed in the aircraft weight and balance records. An aircraft with an empty weight of 900 pounds will have a useful load of 850 pounds, if the normal category maximum weight is listed as 1,750 pounds. When the aircraft is operated in the utility category, the maximum gross weight may he reduced to 1,500 pounds, with a corresponding decrease in the useful load to 600 pounds. Some aircraft have the same useful load regardless of the category in which they are certificated.

The useful load consists of maximum oil, fuel, passengers, baggage, pilot, copilot, and crew­ members. A reduction in the weight of an item, where possible, may be necessary to remain within the maximum weight allowed for the category in which an aircraft is operating. Determining the distribution of these weights is called a weight check.

Empty Weight Center of Gravity The empty weight e.g., abbreviated EWCG, is the e.g. of an aircraft in its empty weight con­ dition. It is an essential part of the weight and

### Page 66

balance record of the aircraft. It has no usefulness in itself, but serves as a basis for other compu­ tations and not as an indication of what the loaded e.g. will be. The EWCG is computed at the time of weighing, using formulas established for tailwheel- and nosewheel-type aircraft.

Empty Weight Center of Gravity Range The EW'CG range is an allowable variation of travel within the e.g. limits. When the EWCG of the aircraft falls within this range, it is impos­ sible to exceed the EW.CG limits using standard specification loading arrangements. Not all air­ craft have this range indicated on the Aircraft Specifications or Type Certificate Data Sheets.

Where it is indicated, the range is valid only as long as the aireraft is loaded according to the standard specification. The installation of .items not listed in the specification will not permit use of this range.

Operating Center of Gravity Range The operating e.g. range is the distance be­ tween the forward an<l rearward e.g. limits indi­ cated in the pertinent .Aircraft Speeifieation or Type Certificate Data Sheets. These limits, de­ termined at the time of <lefign and manufacture, are the extreme loaded e.g. positions allowahle within the applicable regulations controJling the design of the aircraft. These limits are shown in either percent of 1\1AC (mean aerodynamic chord) or jnches from the datum of the air('raft.

The loaded aircraft e.g. location must remain within these limits at all times .. Accordingly, de­ tailed instructions for determining load distri­ bution are provide,l on plaeards, loading charts, and load adj 11~1 er,;.

Mean Aerodynamic Chord The j\1AC is the mean average chord of the wing. An airfoil scl'tion is a cross section of a wing from leading edge to nailing edge. A chord is usually defined as an imaginary straight line drawn parallel to the airfoil through the leading and trailing edges of the section. The J\LAC of a constant chord wing \\'ould be the same as the actual chord of the ,ving. Any departure from a rectangular wing plan form will affect the length of the J\Lt\.C and the resulting distance from the MAC leading edge to the aircraft wing leading edge. Figure 3-4 shows the MAC for a sweptwing aircraft.

57 The aircraft e.g. is usually placed at the maxiM mum forward position of the center of pressure on the MAC to obtain the desired stability. Be­ cause of the relationship between the e.g. location and the moments produced by aerodynamic forces, the greatest of which is lift, the e.g. location is generaily expressed with respect to the wing. This is done by specifying e.g. in percent of the wing's MAC.

The location of the MAC, in reJation to the datum, is given in the Aircraft Specifications or Type Certificate Data Sheets, the weight and balance report, or the aircraft flight manuaL Compute the e.g. _location in percent of .MAC as follows:

(1) J'ind the difference between the distance to the empty weight e.g. Jocation from the datum and the distance to the leading edge of MAC from the datum.

(2) Divide the difference by the length of the MAC.

(3) Multiply the answer by 100.

( 4). The final answer is then expressed m pereent.

An example problem that utilizes the equation for computing percent of :MAC is shown in figure

3-5.

Aircraft Leveling Means Reference points are provided for leveling the aircraft on the ground. They are designated by the manufacturer and are indicated in the perti­ nent Aircraft Specifications. The most common leveling procedure is to place a spirit level at designated points on the aircraft structure. Some aircraft have special leveling scales built into the airframe structure. The scale is used with a plumb l,oh to level the aircraft longitudinally and laterally.

Weighing Points In weighing an afrcraft, the point on the scale at which the weight is concentrated is called the "\,\,·eighing point. When weighing light- to medium­ ,veight land planes, the wheels are usually placed on the scales. This means that the weighing point is. in effect, the same location obtained by ex­ tending a vertical line through the center line of the axle and onto the scale.

Other structural locations capable of supporting the aircraft, such as jack pads on the main spar,

### Page 67

MAC

241.9" s- I I I -----+

e.g.

848.2" 786.2" Datum,--------'-------,-------~ FIGURE 3-4. The e.g. shown in relation to MAC.

may also he used if the aircraft weight is resting on the jack pads. The weighing points should he dearly indicated in the weight and balance report.

Zero Fuel Weight The zero fuel weight is the maximum allowable weight of a loaded aircraft without fuel. Included in the zero fuel weight is the weight of cargo, passengers, and crew. AU weights in excess of the zero fuel weight must consist of usable fuel.

58 Minimum Fuel The term "minimum fuel" should not be inter· preted to mean the minimum amount of fuel r~­ quired to fly an aircraft. Minimum fuel, as it applies to weight and balance, is the amount of fuel that must be shown on the weight and balance report ,vhen the airplane is loaded for an extreme­ condition check.

The minimum fuel load for a small aircraft with a reciprocating engine for balance purposes is based on engine horsepower. It is calculated in the METO (maximum except take-off) horsepower and

### Page 68

Datum MAC ~-H--..;

H = Distance from the datum to the EWCC = 170 inches.

X = Distance from the datum to the MAC leading edge == 150 inches.

C = Length of MAC = 80 inches.

e.g. in % of MAC= _H __ X_ X 100 C 170 - 150 :t of MAC = >< 100 = 80 20 X 100 = 25% 80 FIGURE 3-5. Finding percent of MAC.

is the figure used when the fuel load musl' Le re­ duced to obtain the most critical loading on the

e.g. limit being investigated. Either of 2 formulas may be used.

Formula 1:

Minimum fuel= ~']_2 gallons per horsepower.

hpXY, 2 X6 lb.

1200 X :Y,2 X 6 = 1200 X Y,2 X 6 = 600 lb. fuel.

Formula 2:

Minimum Juel==Y2 lb. per cngme horsepower.

hpX Y2 =minimum fuel.

1200 X \/2 = 600 lb. fuel.

This will be the minimum pounds of fuel requfred for the forward or rearward weight check.

For turbine-engine powered aircraft 1 the mini­ mum fuel load is specified by the aircraft manu· facturer.

The fuel tank location in relation to the e.g. limit affected by the computation determines the use of minimum fuel. For example, when a forward weight check is performed, if the fuel tanks arc located forward of the forward e.g. limit, they are assumed to be full. If they are located aft of the forward e.g. limit, they are assumed to be empty.

If the minimum fuel required for a particular air­ craft exceeds the capacity of the tanks located forward of the forward e.g. limit, the excess fuel must be loaded in the tanks that are aft of the forward e.g. limit. When a rearward weight check is conducted, the fuel loading conditions are oppo­ site to those used for the forward check.

59 Full Oil Full oil is the quantity of oil shown as oil capacity in the Aircraft Specifications. When weighing an aircraft, the oil tank may either contain the number of gaHons of oil specified or be drained. When an aircraft with full oil tanks is weighed, the weight· of the oil must be subtracted from the recorded readings to arrive at the actual empty weight. The weight and balance report must show whether weights include full oil or if the oil tanks were drained.

Tare Weight Tare includes the weight of all extra items, such as jacks, blocks, and chocks on the weighing scale platform, except that of the item being weighed.

The weight of these items, when included in the scale reading, is deducted to obtain the actual weight of the aircraft.

AIRCRAFT WEIGHING PROCEDURE Before beginning a study of aircraft weighing procedure or attempting the actual weighing of an aircraft, it is necessary to become familiar with the weight and balance information in the ap­ plicable Aircraft Specification or Type Certificate Data Sheet.

The .-:pecification for Taylorcraft, model BC and BCS airplanes, illustrated in figure 3-6 has been reproduced in its f'ntircty. A few of the items need explaining; the rest are self-explanatory.

The designation 2 PCLM is read ~~2-place, closed land monoplane" and indicates that the airplane seats two persons, has an enclosed cock­ pit, can be operated from the solid part of the earth's surface, and has only one wing. Two PCS11 indicates that the airplane is a ff2-place, closed sea monoplane." It should be noted that the e.g. range, EWCG range, and the maximum weight are different for the landplane and the seaplane. The location of the seats indicates a side-by-side arrangement. The datum and the leveJing means are shown in the portion of the specification that is pertinent to aI1 rnode}s. Since the datum and the leveling means are directly connected to weight and balance, they would be among the first items referred to in planning the weighing operation.

Although the location or arrangrment of the ·'>.

### Page 69

··.~ Type Certificate Holder.

**DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION**

FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION AIRCRAFT SPECIFICATION NO. A-696 Taylorcraft Aviation Corporation 104 Prospect Street Alliance, Ohio 44601 BC BCS BC-65 BCS-65 A-696 Revision 16

TAYLORCRAFT BCS12-D BC12-Dl BCS12-Dl BC12-65 ( Army L-2H) BCS12-65 BC12D-85 BCS12D-85 BC12D-4-85 BCS12D-4-85 BC12-D 9 September 1969 I-Model BC, 2 PCLM, Approved August 24, 1938; Model BCS, 2 PCSM, Approved April 5, 1939 Engine.

Fuel.

Engine Limits.

Propeller Limits.

Airspeed Limits.

( True Ind.)

Center of Gravity { C.G.) Range.

Empty '-"' eight C.G. Range.

Maximum \\'eight.

Number of Seats.

Maximum Baggage.

Fuel Capacity.

Oil Capacity.

Control Surface Movements.

Serial No. Eligible.

Required Equipment.

Continental A-50-1 (see item 114(a) for optional engines) 73 min. grade aviation gasoline For all operations, 1900 r.p.m. ( 50 hp.)

Diameter: Maximum 83 in.

Land plane: Level flight or climb 105 m.p.h.

Glide or dive 131 m.p.h.

Seaplane: Level flight or climb 95 m.p.h.

Glide or dive 129 m.p.h.

Landplane: ( +14.5) to (+19.7) Seaplane: ( + 15.1) to ( +19.4) Landplane: ( +15.3) to ( +18.5) Seaplane: ( +15.9) to (+18.3) (91 knots) ( 114 knots) (83 knots) ( 112 knots) V\lhcn empty weight C.G. falls within pertinent range, computation of critical for and aft C.G. positions is unnecessary. Ranges are not valid for non-standard arrangements.

Landplanc: llOO Ih. (S/N 1407 and up are eligible at 1150 lb.)

Seaplane: 1228 lb.

2 ( +23) 30 lb. (+40) 12 gal. ( ~9). See item 115 for auxiliary tank.

4 quart.

Elevators;

Rudders:

(-21) Ailerons:

1001 and up Lan<lplane:

ScapLme:

Up 25° Down 27° Right 26° Left 26° ( Not available) 1 or 4,104.202, 203, 210(a), 401 1 or 4, 104, 205, 401 Specifications Pertinent to AU Models.

Datum.

Leveling Means.

Certification Basis.

Production· Basis.

Leading edge of wing Upper surface of horizontal stabilizer Part 04 of the Civil Air Regulations effective as amended to May 1, 1938. Type Certifk:ate No. 696 issued.

None. Prior to original certification, an FAA representative must perform a detailed inspection for workmanship, materials and conformity with the approved technical clata, and a check of the flight characteristics.

FIGURE 3-6. A typical aircraft specification.

### Page 70

landing gear is not shown in figure 3-6, this information is given in the Aircraft Specification or Type Certificate Data Sheets and the main­ tenance manual. The location of the wheels has important significance, since this can be used as a doublecheck against actual measurements taken at the time of weighing.

Weighing an Aircraft Weighing an aircraft is a very important and exacting phase of aircraft maintenance and must be carried out with accuracy and good workman­ ship. Thoughtful preparation saves time and pre­ vents mistakes.

To begin, assemble all the necessary equipment, such as:

1. Scales, hoisting equipment, jacks, and leveling equipment.

2. Blocks, chocks, or sandbags for holding the airplane on the scales.

3. Straightedge, spirit level, plumb bobs, chalk line, and a measuring tape.

4. Applicable Aircraft Specifications and weight and balance computation forms.

If possible, aircraft should be weighed in a closed building where there are no air currents to cause incorrect scale readings. An outside weighing is permissible if wind and moisture are negligible.

Prepare Aircraft For Weighing Drain the fuel system until the quantity indi­ cation reads zero, or empty. with the aircraft in a level attitude. If any fuel is left in the tanks, the aircraft will weigh more, and all later calcu­ lations for useful load and balance will be affected.

Only trapped or unusable fuel (residual fuel) is considered part of the aircraft empty weight. Fuel taO:k caps should be on the tanks or placed as close as possible to their correct locations, so that the weight distribution will be correct.

In special cases, the aircraft may be weighed with the fuel tanks full, provided a means of determining the exact weight of the fuel is avail­ able. Consult the aircraft manufacturer's instruc­ tions to determine whether a particular model aircraft should be weighed with full fuel or with the fuel drained.

If possible, drain all engine oil from the oil tanks. The system should be drained with all drain valves open. Under these conditions, the amount of oil remaining in the oil tank, lines 1 and 61 engine is termed residual oil and is included in the empty weight. If impractical to drain. the oil tanks should be completely filled.

The position of such items as spoilers, slats, flaps, and helicopter rotor systems is an important factor when weighing an aircraft. Always refer to the manufacturer's instructions for the proper position of these items.

Unless otherwise noted in the Aircraft Specifi~ cations or manufacturer's instructions, hydrauJic reservoirs and systems should be filled; drinking and washing water reservoirs and lavatory tanks should be drained; and constant-speed-drive oil tanks should be filled.

Inspect the aircraft to see that all items in­ cluded in the certificated empty weight are in­ stalled in the proper location. Remove items that are not regularly carried in flight. Also look in the baggage compartments to make sure they are empty.

Replace all inspection plates, oil and fuel tank caps, junction box covers, cowling, doors, emer­ gency exits, and other parts that have been re­ moved. All doors, windows, and sliding canopies should be in their normal flight position. Remove excessive dirt, oil, grease, and moisture from the aircraft.

Properly calibrate, zero, and use the weighing scales in accordance with the manufacturer's in.

structions.

Some aircraft are not weighed with the wheels on the scales, but are weighed with the scales placed either at the jacking points or at special weighing points. Regardless of what provisions are made for placing the aircraft on the scales or jacks, be careful to pl."event it from falling or rolling off, thereby damaging the aircraft and equipment. When weighing an aircraft with the wheels placed on the scales, release the brakes to reduce the possibility of incorrect readings caused by side loads on the scales.

All aircraft have leveling points or lugs, and care must he taken to level the aircraft, especially along the longitudinal axis. With lighL fixed-wing airplanes, the lateral level is not as critical as it is with heavier airplanes. However, a reasonable effort should be made to level the light airplanes around the lateral axis. Accuracy in leveling all aircraft longitudinally cannot be overemphasized.

Measurements The distance from the datum to the mam weighing point centerline, and the distance from

### Page 71

the main weighing point centerline to the tail (or nose) weighing point centerline must be known to determine the e.g. relative to the main weighing point and the datum.

An example of main weighing point to datum and main weighing point to tail ,\i·eighing pojnt is shown in figure 3-7. See figure 3-8 for an example of main weighing point to datum and main weighing point to nosewheel measurements.

These distances may be calculated using infor.

mation from the Aircraft Specifications or Type Certificate Data Sheets. However. it will often be necessary to determine them by actual meas.

urement.

After the aircraft has been placed on the scales (figure 3-9) and leveled, hang plumb bobs from the datum, the main weighing point, and the tail or nose weighing point so that the points of the plumb bobs touch the floor. Make a chalk mark on the floor at the points of contact. If desired, a chalk line may be drawn connecting the chalk marks. This will make a clear pattern of the weighing point distances and their relation to the datum.

Record the weights indicated on each of the scales and make the necessary measurements while the aircraft is still level. After all weights FlGURE 3-7. Main weighing point to datum and main weighing point to tail weighing point.

FIGURE 3-8. Main weighing point to datum and main weighing point to nose weighing point.

### Page 72

FIGURE 3-9. Weighing an air<;;raft using platform scales.

and measurements are ol)tailled and recorded, the aircraft may be removed from the scales.

Weigh the tare and deduct its weight from the scale reading at each respective weighing point where tare is involved.

Balance Computation To obtain gross weight and the e.g. location· of the loaded airplane, first determine the empty weight and the EWCG location. When these are known, it is easy to compute the effect of fueL crew, passengers, cargo, and expendable wright as they are added. This is done by adding all the weights and moments of these additional .i terns and re-calculating the e.g. for the· loaded airplane.

The scale readings and measurements rer,orde<l on the sample form in figure 3-l O form the basis for the examples of computing the empty weight and the empty weight· e.g. - Empty Weight The empty weight of the aircraft is determined by adding the net weight on each weighing point.

The net weight is the actual scale reading, less the tare weight.

63 ---------·--· Scule Net Weighing scale reading Tare weight point (lbs.) (lbs.) (lbs.)

Left main wheel 622.00 -5.00 617.00 Right main wheel 618.00 -4.00 614.00 Nosewheel 155.00 -3.00 152.00 ---- Total 1,383.00 This gives the aircraft weight as weighed.

Empty Weight C.G.

The ·e.g. location is found through the pro­ gressive use of two formulas. First calculate the total moments using the following formulas:

Moment = Arm X Weight Weight point Left main wheel Right main wheel Nosewheel Net weight (lbs.)

617.0

614.0

152.0 ---- 1,383.0 Arm (in.)

X 68 11 X 68" X -26" ]\-foment (lb.-in.)

41,956.0 41,752.0 -3,952.0 ---- 79,756.0

### Page 73

WEIGHING FORM MAKE .:~~~~-1I ............... . MODEL. A ... ... ... .............. SERIAL ... ~~±~ .............................. N .... 4.1.1 ................ .

DATUM LOCATION Leading edge of wing at root Aircraft weighed with full oil.

I. Main weighing point is located ( - .......................... ." fonva,d) ( +68" aft) of datum.

2. Tail or nose weighing point is located ( -26" forward) ( + ................... " aft)of datum.

3.

4.

5.

Weighing Point Left Main Wheel Right Main Wheel Sub-Total Scale Reading 622,00

618.00 1,240.00 :::::: Net

- Tare Weight -5.00 617.00 -4.00 614.00 -9.00 1,231.00 X Ann 68" 68" 68"

6.

7.

Tail or Nose Wheel 155.00 -3.00 152.00 -26" Total as Weighed 1,395.00 -12.00 1,383.00 57.67

8.

9.

Space for listing of Items when Aircraft is not Weighed Empty.

Net Item Weight Oil - 8 gallon, @ 7.5 p/p/g -60.00 Aircraft Empty Weight & e.g. 1,323.00 Maximum Allowable Gross Weight 1,773 pounds Useful Load 450 pounds Computed by: Frank A. Adams A & P Number:.~1~3~66~9~6~8~--- Arm -30.00

61.64" FIGURE 3-10. Sample weighing form.

then divide the sum of the moments by weights involved:

e.g. Total moment Total weight 57 .67 in.

79,756.0 1,383 the total Item Acft. total as weighed Less oil, 8 gallons, @ 7.5 lbs. pee gallon Acft. empty weight and moment Net weight (lbs.)

1,383.0 -60.0 1,323.0 Again using the formula:

Arm (in.)

57.67 -30.00

- Moment - 41,956.00 41,752.00 83,708.00 -3,952.00 79,756.00 Moment 1,800.00 81,556.00 ~foment (lb.-in.)

79,756.0 1,800.0 81,556.0 Consequently, the e.g., as weighed, is 57.67 in.

from the datum.

Since the aircraft was weighed with the oil tank fuil, it is necessary to remove the oil to obtain the empty weight and empty weight e.g.

e.g. Total moment Total weight 81,556.0 1,323 = 61.64 in, The EWCG is located 61.64 in. aft of the datum, 64

### Page 74

Datum +6" Tail wheel weight = 50 lbs.

Tail wheel arm = 198.0" Empty weight ( without oil) = 950 lbs.

Datum location = leading edge of wing.

Engine = 100 hp.

CG range= ( +9.0") to ( +18.7").

+23" +34" +18.7" +56"

196.0" Fuel capacity = 40 gal @ + 23".

Number of seats = 3 (one@ + 6" and two@ +34").

Maximum gross weight = 1775 lbs.

Oil capacity = 8 qts @ -41".

Maximum baggage =50 lbs @ +56".

Note: ( This airplane can be flown from either the front or rear seat.)

FIGURE 3-11. Schematic diagram for forward weight and balance check.

The maximum allowable gross weight as shown in the Aircraft Specifications is 1,733 pounds. By subtracting the aircraft empty weight from this figure, the useful load is determined to he 450 pounds.

WEIGHT AND BALANCE EXTREME CONDITIONS The weight and balance extreme conditions represent the maximum forward and rearward

e.g. position for the aircraft.

An aircraft has certain fixed points, fore and aft, beyond which the e.g. should not be permitted at any time during flight. A check should be made to ensure that the e.g. will not shift out of limits 65 when crew, passengers, cargo, and expendable weights are added or removed. If the limits are exceeded and the aircraft is flown in this condition, it may lead to insufficient stability, with resulting difficulty in controlling the aircraft.

Adverse loading checks are a deliberate attempt to load an aircraft in a manner that will create the most critical balance condition and still remain within the design e.g. limits of the aircraft.

It should be noted that when the EWCG falls within the EWCG range, it is unnecessary to perform a forward or rearward weight and balance check. In other words, it is. impossible to load the aircraft to exceed the e.g. limits, provided standard loading and seating arrangements are used.

### Page 75

Forward Weight and Balance Check To make this check, the following information is needed:

1. The weight, arm, and moment of the empty aircraft.

2. The maximum weights, arms, and moments of the items of useful load that are located ahead of the forward e.g. limit.

3. The minimum weights, arms, and moments of the items of useful load that are located aft of the forward e.g. limit.

The example shown in figure 3-11 presents one method of conducting an extreme-condition check.

This method makes it easy to visualize exactly where the weights of various loading arrangements are distributed and how they affect e.g. location.

Using the data given in figure 3-11, determine if the airplane can be loaded to cause the e.g. to go beyond its limits.

FIRST STEP: Load the airplane as follows:

Oil-8 qts.@ -41 in.=(15.0 lbs.) (-1,l in.).

Pilot-170lbs.@ +6in.=(170.0lbs.) (+6in.).

Fuel. minimum-SO lbs. @+23 in.= (50.0 lbs.)

( +23 in.).

No passengers.

No baggage.

Fill anv fuel tanks which are ahead of the for­ ward limit. If the fuel tanks are to the rear of the forward limit, use the minimum required amount of fuel.

SECOND STEP: Total all weights and moments.

Weight Arm Moments Item (lbs.) (in.) Ob.-in.)

Acft. EW 950.0 +12.3 +ll,685.0 Oil 15.0 -41.0 615.0 Pilot 170.0 + 6.0 + 1,020.0 Fuel (min.) 50.0 +23.0 + 1,150.0 Total 1,185.0 13,240.0 The above figures require careful consideration.

Notice that each weight is multiplied by its arm to obtain its moment. All the weights are added to obtain 1,185 lbs., the total weight. However, when adding the moments, all the plus moments are added:

ll,685.0 1,020.0 1,150.0 13,855.0 66 The minus moment of -615.0 is subtracted from the sum of the plus moments:

13,855.0

- 615.0 13,240.0 THIRD STEP: Find the most forward e.g. position by dividing the total moments by the total weight.

13,240.0 1,185 =ll.17 m.

Since the total moment is plus, the answer must be plus. Therefore, the forward extreme position of the e.g. is located at 11.17 aft of the datum.

The forward e.g. limit for this example airplane is + 9 .0 in. aft of the datum; therefore, it is easy to see that it can be safely flown with this loading arrangement.

Rearward Weight and Balance Check To establish that neither the maximum weight nor the rearward e.g. limit is exceeded, the follow­ ing information is needed:

1. The weight, arm, and moment of the empty aircraft.

2. The maximum weights, arms, and moments of the items of useful load that are located aft of the rearward e.g. limit.

3. The minimum weights, arms, and moments of the items of useful load that are located ahf'ad of the rearward e.g. limit.

The most rearward e.g. position is found by repeating the three steps that were followed in making the most forward e.g. check, except in this case the airplane is loaded so that it will be tail­ heavy.

FIRST STEP: Load the airplane in a manner that will make it most tail-heavy.

Oil-8 qts.@ -41 in.=(15.0 lbs.) (-41 in.).

Pilot-170 lbs. @+6 in.= (170.0 lbs.) ( +6 in.).

Fuel (max.) -40 gals. @ +23 in.= (240.0 lbs.)

( +23 in.).

Passengers- two @: 170 lbs. each= 340 lbs. @ +34 in.= (340 lbs.) ( +34 in.).

Baggage (max.) -50 lbs. @+56 in.= (50 lbs.)

(+56 in.).

Fill anv fuel tanks ·which are aft of the rear limit. If, the fuel tanks are forward of the rear limit. use the minimum required amount of fuel.

### Page 76

SECOND STEP: Total all weights and moments movable ballast under all loading conditions for as shown· here: which such ballast is necessary.

Weight A,m Moments Item (lbs.) (in.) (lb.-in.)

Acft. EW 950.0 +12.3 +11,685.0 Oil 15.0 -41.0 615.0 Pilot 170.0 + 6.0 + 1,020.0 Fuel (max.) 240.0 +23.0 + 5,520.0 Passengers (two) 340.0 +34.0 + 11,560.0 Baggage (max.) 50.0 +56.0 + 2,800.0 Total 1,765.0 31,970.0 THIRD STEP: Find the most rearward e.g. posi­ tion by dividing the total moments by the total weight.

Most rearward figure 3-11:

31,970.0 1,765

e.g. when loaded as shown in =18.11 in.

The rearward e.g. limit for this example airplane is + 18.7 in. aft of the datum; therefore, it can be flown safely \Vith this loading arrangement_

INSTALLATION OF BALLAST Ballast is used in an aircraft to attain the desired e.g. balance. It is usually located as far aft or as far forward as possible to bring the e.g.

within limits using a minimum amount .of weight.

Ballast that is installed to compensate for the removal or installation of equipment items and that is to remain in the aircraft for long periods is called permanent ballast. It is generally lead bars or plates bolted to the aircraft structure. It may be painted red and placarded: PERMA­ NENT BALLAST-DO NOT REMOVE. In most cases, the installation of permanent batlast results jn an increase in the aircraft empty weight.

Temporary ballast, or removable ballast, is used to meet certajn loading conditions that may vary from time to time. It generally takes the form of lead shot bags, sand hags, or other weight items that are not permanently installed. Temporary ballast should be placarded: BALLAST __ LBS.

REMOVAL REQUIRES WEIGHT AND BAL­ ANCE CHECK. The baggage compartment is usually the most convenient location for tempo­ rary ballast.

The places for carrying ballast should be prop­ erly designed, installed, and plainly marked. The aircraft operation manual must include instruc­ tions regarding the proper placement of the re- 67 Controlling e.g._ Position With Ballast Figure 3-12 shows an example aircraft whose

e.g. exceeds the forward e.g. limit under certain loading conditions. The forward weight and bal­ ance check proves that with only the pilot and minimum fuel aboard, the forward e.g. is exceeded.

Most forward e.g. check Weight Mm Moments Item (lbs.) (in.) (lb..;n.)

Acft. EW 1,600.0 +15.6 +24,960.0 Oil 22.5 -22.0 495.0 Fuel (min.) 115.0 +18.0 + 2,070.0 Pilot 170.0 +10.0 + 1,700.0 Total 1,907.5 +28,235.0 Most forward e.g.= Total moment Total weight 28,235 1,907.5 14.8 in.

Without ballast placed somewhere aft to bring the e.g. within the ,designated limits of + 16.5 in.

to + 20.0 in., the aircraft is unsafe to Ry when loaded with the pilot and minimum fuel. The problem of determining how many pounds of bal­ last are needed to move the e.g. within the ap­ proved limits can be solved by using the following formula:

Ballast weight needed:

(\\!eight of acft as loaded) (Distance out of limits) Arm from variable weight location to limit affected Inserting in the 'formula the applicable values:

Weight of the aircraft as loaded=l907.5 Distance out of limit=+ 1.7 in.

Arm from variable weight location to the limit affected= 53.5 in.

We obtain the following:

(1907.5) (1.7)

53.5 =

60.6 lbs., ballast weight needed in the baggage compartment.

When the mathematical computation ends in a fractional pound, use the next higher· whole pound as the actual ballast weight. Consequently, 61.0 pounds must be placed in the baggage compart­ ment to bring the e.g. safely within the e.g. range.

### Page 77

Datum -22" Tail wheel arm = 166".

Tail wheel weight = 115 lbs.

CC range= (+16.5") to (-t-20.0") Fuel capacity = 38 gal @ 18" ( 19 gal. in each wing Maximum baggage = 100 lbs @ 70" Maximum gross weight = 2620 lbs.

162" A/C EW ( without oil) = 1600 lbs.

Datum = leading edge of wing.

Engine = 230 hp.

Oil capacity = 12 qts@ -22".

Number of seats = 4 ( two @ + HY' and two @ +34").

Note: Flight controls in front seat only.

:FIGURE 3-12. Example aircraft whose e.g. exceeds the forward e.g. limit.

A final forward weight and ·balance check should be made to prove that by adding 61.0 pounds of ballast in the baggagl' compartment, this aircraft could be safely flow~ with minimum fuel aboard.

Place a placard in the cockpit in a conspicuous place for the pilot, or anyone concerned, to see.

The placard should read: FOR SOLO FLIGHT CARRY A l\!INIMUM OF 61.0 POUNDS IN BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT.

Maximum Load Conditions A rearward weight and balance check will de­ termine whether the airplane shown in figure 3-12 can be flown safely when fully loaded without ex­ ceeding the aft e.g. limit or its maximum gross weight.

68 Most Rearward e.g. check.

Weight A,m Item (lbs.) (in.)

Acft. EW 1,600.0 +15.6 Oil 22.5 -22.0 Fuel (max.) 228.0 +18.0 Pilot 170.0 +10.0 Passenger 170.0 +10.0 Passengers (two) 340.0 +34.0 Baggage (max.) 100.0 +10.0 Total 2,630.5 Most rearward e.g. Total moments Total weight Moments (lb.-in.)

24,960.0

495.0 4,104.0 1,700.0 1,700.0 11,560.0 7,000.0 50,529.0 = 50,529.0 2,630.5 =19.21 in.

### Page 78

I I ;<. / I I I I I ' I I I ,9 ' --, I L- '-- LOADING GRAPH 'J."-' I ;:.'> , d - 0 V 400 360 0 320 ;z 0 vv ,i- c.>:· :,,, o"' ~ f'" , , ~ 280 ":v ;._ fv' "¢~· 'l."-' L <{;, ,ff:, V , 9.,<1-' , ,,.0 ~ 240 ~ :wo w 160 ii:

120 ~ F i?

I/ F I,< '/IO~ C?

".,I- I '/ ) ) 30 ' , / i,.f'.l. 20- /I ~c,'i- ,,.. 'l>~c,O . ', ! I I I ,,<i;

.,-43 . , ~l- I 40 ---~~"'c-, I l ~II I I 1,.- Add weight of items to be carried · to the Licensed Empty Weight of the airplane. Add moment in thou- · sands of pound - inches of these • items to the total airplane moment .

in thousands of pou11d-inches found _ ou the Center of Gravity Envelope .•

I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I 80 40 0 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 W 18 m UN~ U

MOMENT IN THOUSANDS OF POUND-INCHES FIGURE 3-I3. Typical loading graph.

The e.g. is well within the e.g. range when fully loaded; however, the maximum allowable gross weight is exceeded by 10.5 pounds. In this case a number of alternatives are available to remedy this overloaded condition without appreciably reducing the aircraft payload or flight range, as follows:

Alternative No. I-reduce baggage by 10.5 lbs.

Alternative No. 2-reduce fuel by 10.5 lbs., or 1.75 gals.

Alternative No. 3-reduce passenger load by one passenger.

Each alternative listed will require a placard stat­ ing the loading arrangement by which the gross weight and e.g. will be retained within their desig­ nated -limits. Compute a new e.g. position for each alternate loading arrangement.

LOADING GRAPHS AND C.G. ENVELOPES The weight and balance computation system, commonly called the loading graph and e.g. en­ velope system, is an excellent and rapid method for determining the e.g. location for various load­ ing arrangements. This method can he applied to any make and niodel of aircraft.

Aircraft manufacturers using this method of weight and balance computation prepare graphs similar to those shown in figure 3-13 and 3-14 69 for each make and model aircraft at the time of original certification. The graphs become a permanent part of the aircraft records. Along with the graphs are the data for the empty weight arm and moment (index number) for that par­ ticular make and model aircraft.

The loading graph illustrated in figure 3-13 is used to determine the index number of any item or weight that may be involved in loading the aircraft. To use this graph, find the point on the vertical scale that represents the known weight.

Project a horizontal. line to the point where it intersects the proper diagonal weight line (i.e., pilot, copilot, baggage, etc.). From the point of intersection, read straight downward to the hori­ zontal scale to find the moment or index number.

After the moment for each item of weight has been determined, all weights are added and all moments are added. With knowledge of the total weight and moment, project a line from the re­ spective point on the e.g. envelope shown in figure 3-14, and place a point at the intersection of the two lines. If the point is within the diagonal lines, the loading arrangement meets all balance requirements.

The following is an actual weight and balance computation using the graphs in figure 3-13 and

3-14. For this example, assume that the aircraft has an empty weight of 1,386.0 pounds and a moment of 52,772.0 pound-inches. The index ·'>.

. ~.

### Page 79

) J.

I I I I I ' 2401 2300 2200 2100 2000 1900 1800 1700 1600 1500 1400 = ~ENTER ~F dRAV;TY ~NV~LO~E / - / / / / / ~ / / / / / / / / , , / / / I / / Any point falling with- - / / in the envelope meets - / all Balance require- _ ments. - I / .

' / / I I 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 l!()

MOMENT IN THOUSANDS OF POPXD-INCHES FIGURE 3-14. Center of gravity envelope.

number 'for the empty weight of the aircraft is developed by dividing the empty-weight moment by 1,000. This gives an index number of 52.8 for the airplane's empty-weight moment. Load the aircraft to determine whether the e.g. will fall within the diagonal lines of figure 3-14. Arrange item weights and index numbers in an orderly form to facilitate adding.

:Moment Weight (thousands Item (lhs.) of lb.-in.)

Acft. EW 1,386.0 52.8 Oil 19.0 - 0.4 Pilot & copilot 340.0 12.2 Rear passengers (two) 340.0 24.1 Baggage 20.0 1.9 Fuel 245.0 11.8 Total 2,350.0 102.4 The total airplane weight in pounds is 2,350.0, and the moment is 102.4. Locate this point (2,350 @ 102.4) on the e.g. envelope illustrated in figure 3-14. Since the point falls within the diagonal lines, the loading arrangement meets all weight-and-balance requirements.

ELECTRONIC WEIGHING EQUIPMENT Electronic weighing equipment greatly sirilpli­ fied the mechanics of weighing large, heavy air­ craft. Figure 3-15 shows one type of electronic scales. The complete weighing kit is contained in a portable carrier. Included in the kit are a steel tape, plumb bobs, spirit level, straightedge, hy­ drometer (for determining the fuel specific gravity) and the load cells. The load cells are actually strain gages that reflect the load imposed upon them by the aircraft in terms of voltage change.

This change is indicated on a scale that is cali­ brated to read in pounds.

One load cell is placed between the jack-pad and the jack at each weighing point. Each load cell must he balanced or ~'zeroed" before applying any load to the cell. After completing the weighing operation, remove all load from the cells and check to see if the cell reading is still zero. Any deviation from zero is referred to as the ••zero scale shift" and constitutes the tare when using electronic weighing scales. The direction of shift is the factor that .determines whether the tare is added to or subtracted from the scale reading. Always follow the instructions of the manufacture whose scales you are using.

HELICOPTER WEIGHT AND BALANCE The weight and balance principles and proce­ dures that have been described apply generally to

### Page 80

D D FIGURE 3-15. Aircraft electronjc weighing kit.

helicopters. Each model helicopter is certificated for a specific maximum gross weight. However, it cannot be operated at this ma~imum weight under all conditions. Combinations of high altitude, high temperature, and high humidity determine the density altitude at a particuh1r location. This, in turn, critically affects the hovering. takeoff, climb, autorotation, and landing performa,nce of a heli­ copter. A heavily loaded helicopter has less ability to withstand shocks and additional loads caused by turbulent air. The hel:!v~er the load, the less the margin of safety for the S\J.pporting structures, such as the main rotor, fu~elage, landing gear, etc.

Most helicopters h~ve a much more restricted

e.g. range than do airpl{lnes. In some cases this range is less than 3 in1,Jhe;,~ The exact location and 71 length of the e.g. range is specified for each heli­ copter and usually extends a short distance fore and aft of the main rotor mast or the centroid of a dual rotor system. Ideally, the helicopter should have such perfect balance that the fuselage re­ mains horizontal while in a hover, and the only cyclic adjustment required should be that niade necessary by the wind. The fuselage acts as a pendulum suspended from the rotor. Any change in the center of gravity changes the angle at which it hangs from this point of support. More recently designed helicopters have loading com­ partments and fuel tanks located at or near the balance point. If ·the helicopter is not loaded properly and the e.g. is not very near the balance point~ the fuselage does not hang horizontaJly in a hover. If the e.g. is too far aft, the nose tilts up, and excessive forward cyclic control is required to maintain a stationary hover. Conversely, if the

e.g. is too far forward, the nose tilts down and excessive aft cyclic control is required. In extreme out-of-balance conditions, full fore or aft cyclic control may be insufficient to maintain control.

Similar lateral balance problems may be en­ countered if external loads are carried.

Upon delivery by the manufacturer, the empty weight, empty weight e.g., and the useful load are noted on the weight and balance data sheet in the helicopter flight manual. If, after delivery, additional fixed equipment is added or removed, or if a major repair or alteration is made, which may affect the empty weight, empty weight e.g., or useful load, the weight and balance data must be revised. All weight and balance changes should be entered in the appropriate aircraft record.

### Page 81

GENERAL Fuel is a substance that, when combined with oxygen, will burn and produce heat. Fuels may be classified according to their physical state as solid, gaseous, or liquid.

Solid Fuels Solid fuels are used extensively for external­ combustion engines, such as a steam engine, where the burning takes place under boilers or in furnaces. They include such fuels as wood and coal. Solid fuels are not used in reciprocating engines, where the burning takes place inside the cylinder, because of their slow rate of burning, low heat value, and numerous other disadvantages.

Gaseous Fuels Gaseous fuels are used to some extent for internal-combustion engines, where a large supply of combustible gas is readily available. Natural gas and liquefied petroleum gas are two of the more common types. Gaseous fuels can be dis­ regarded for use in aircraft engines. The large space they occupy limits the supply of fuel that can he carried.

Liquid Fuels Liquid fuels, in many respects, are the ideal fuel for use in internal-combustion engines.

Liquid fuels are classified as either nonvolatile or volatile. The nonvolatile fuels are the heavy oils used in diesel engines. The volatile class includes those fuels that are commonly used with a fuel metering device and are carried into the engine cylinder or combustion chamber in a vaporized or partially vaporized condition. Among these are alcohol, benzol, kerosene, and gasoline.

Aviation fuel is a liquid containing chemical energy that, through combustion, is released as heat energy and then converted to mechanical 73 CHAPTER 4

FUELS AND FUEL SYSTEMS energy by the engine. This mechanical energy is used to produce thrust, which propels the aircraft.

Gasoline and kerosene are the two most widely used aviation fuels,

**CHARACTERISTICS AND PROPERTIES OF**

AVIATION GASOLINE Aviation gasoline consists almost entirely of hydrocarbons, namely 1 compounds consisting of hydrogen and carbon. Some impurities ju the form of sulphur and dissolv1;d water will be present. The water cannot be avoided, since the gasoline is exposed to moisture in the at­ mosphere. A small amount of sulphur, always present in crude petroleum, is left in the process of manufacture.

Tetraethyl lead (TEL) is added to the gasoline to improve its performance in the engine. Organic bromides and chlorides are mixed with TEL so that during combustion volatile lead halides will be formed. These then are exhausted with the combustion products. TEL, if added alone, would burn to a solid lead oxide and remain in the engine cylinder. Inhibitors are added to gasoline to suppress the formation of substances that would be left as solids when the gasoline evaporates.

Certain properties of the fuel affect engine per­ formance. These properties are volatility, the manner in which the fuel burns during the com­ bustion process, and the heating value of the fuel.

Also important is the corrosiveness of the gasoline as well as its tendency to form deposits in the engine during use. These latter two factors are.

important because of their effect on general cleanli­ ness, which has a bearing on the time between engine overhauls.

Volatility Volatility is a measure of the tendency of a liquid substance to vaporize under given con~ ditions. Gasoline is a complex blend of volatile

### Page 82

1---Gage ----Bomb ____ Sample container FIGVRE 4-1. Vapor pressure test apparatus.

hydrocarbon compounds that have a wide range of boiling points and vapor pressures. It is blended in such a way that a straight chain of boiling points is obtained. This is necessary to obtain the required starting, acceleration, power, and fuel mixture characteristics for the engine.

If the gasoline vaporizes too readily, fuel lines may become filled with vapor and cause decreased fuel flow. If the fuel does not vaporize readily enough, it can result in hard ·starting, slow warm­ up, poor acceleration, uneven fuel distribution to cylinders, and excessive crankcase dilution.

The lower grades of automobile fuel are not held within the tolerances required for aviation gasoline and usually contain a considerable amount of cracked gasoline, which may form excessive gum deposits. For these reasons, auto­ mobile fuels should not be used in aircraft engines, especially air-cooled engines operating at high cylinder temperatures.

Vapor Lock Vaporization of gasoline in fuel lines results in a reduced supply of gasoline to the engine. In severe cases, it may result in engine stoppage.

74 This phenomenon is referred to as vapor locking.

A measure of a gasoline's tendency to vapor lock is obtained from the Reid vapor pressure test. In this test a sample of the fuel is sealed in a "bomb" equipped with a pressure gage. The apparatus (see figure 4-1) is then immersed in a constant­ temperature bath and the indicated pressure is noted. The higher the corrected vapor pressure of the sample under test, the more susceptible it is to vapor locking. Aviation gasolines are limited to a maximum of 7 p.s.i. because of their increased tendency to vapor lock at high altitudes.

Carburetor Icing Carburetor icing is also related to volatility.

When the fuel changes from a liquid to a vapor state, it extracts heat from its surroundings to make this change. The more volatile the fuel, the more rapid the heat extraction will be. As the gasoline leaving the carburetor discharge nozzle vaporizes, it can freeze water vapor con­ tained in the incoming air. The moisture freezes on the walls of the induction system, the venturi throat, and the throttle valves. This type of ice formation restricts the fuel and air passages of the carburetor. It causes loss of power and, if not eliminated, eventual engine stoppage. Ex­ treme icing conditions can make operation of the throttle controls impossible. This icing condition is most severe in the temperature range of 30° to 40° F. out;:;ide air temperature.

Aromatic Fuels Some fuels may contain considerable quantities of aromatic hydrocarbons, which are added to increase the rich mixture performance rating of the fuel. Such fuels, known as aromatic fuels, have a strong solvent and swelling action on some types of hose and other rubber parts of the fuel system. For this reason, aromatic-resistant hose and rubber parts have been developed for use with aromatic fuels.

Detonation In an engine that is operating in a normal man ..

ner, the flame front traverses the charge at a steady velocity of about 100 feet per second until the charge is consumed. When detonation occurs, the first portion of the charge bums in a normal manner but the last portion bums almost instan­ taneously, creating an excessive momentary pres~

### Page 83

sure unbalance in the cootbustion chamber. This abnormal type of combustion is called detonation.

This tremendous increase in the speed of burning causes the cylinder head temperature to rise. In severe cases, the increase in burning speed will decrease engine efficiency and may cause structural damage to the cylinder head or piston.

During normal combustion, the expansion of the burning gases presses the head of the piston down firmly and smoothly without excessive shock. The increased pressure of detonation ex­ erted in a short period of time produces a heavy shock load to the walls of the combustion chamber and the piston head. It is this shock to the combustion chamber that is heard as ·an audible knock in an automobile engine. If other sounds could be filtered out, the knock would be equally audible in an aircraft engine. Generally, it is necessary to depend upon instruments to detect detonation in an aircraft engine.

Surface Ignition Ignition of the fuel/ air mixture by hot spots or surfaces in the combustion chamber is called surface ignition. If this occurs before the normal ignition event, the phenomenon is referred to as preignition. When it is prevalent, the result is power loss and engine roughness. Preignition is generally attributed to overheating of such parts as spark ph~g electrodes, exhaust valves, carbon deposits, etc. Where preignition is present, an engine may continue to operate even though the ignition has been turned off.

Present information indicates that gasoline high in aromatic hydrocarbon content is much more likely to cause surface ignition than fuels with a low content.

Octane and Performance Number Rating Octane and performance numbers designate the antiknock value of the fuel mixture in an engine cylinder. Aircraft engines of high power output have been made possible principally as a result of blending to produce fuels of high octane ratings.

The use of such fuels has permitted increases in compression ratio and manifold pressure, resulting in improved engine power and efficiency. However, even the high-octane fuels will detonate under severe operating conditiobs and when certain engine controls are improperly operated.

Antiknock qualities of aviation fuel are desig­ nated by grades. The higher the grade, the more 75 compression the fuel can stand without detonating.

For fuels that have two numbers, the first number indicates the lean-mixture rating and the second the rich-mixture rating. Thus, grade 100/130 fuel has a lean-mixture rating of 100 and a rich­ mixture rating of 130. Two different scales are used to designate fuel grade. For fuels below grade 100, octane numbers are used to designate grade. The octane number system is based on a comparison of any fuel with mixtures of iso-octane and normal heptane. The octane number of a fuel is the percentage of iso-octane in the mixture that duplicates the knock characteristics of the particular fuel being rated. Thus, grade 91 fuel has the same knock -characteristics as a blend of 91 percent iso-octane and 9 percent normal hep­ tane.

With the advent of fuels having antiknock characteristics superior to iso-octane, another scale was adopted to designate the grade of fuels above the 100-octane number. This scale repre­ sents the performance rating of the fuel-its knock-free power available as compared with that available with pure iso-octane. Jt is arbitrarily assumed that 100 percent power is obtained from iso-octane alone. An engine that has a knock­ limited horsepower of 1,000 with 100-octane fuel will have a knock-limited horsepower of 1.3 times as much (1,300 horsepower) with 130 performance number fuel.

The grade of an aviation gasoline is no indi­ cation of its fire hazard. Grade 91/96 gasoline is as easy to ignite as grade 115/145 and explodes with as much force. The grade indicates only the gasoline's performance in the aircraft's engine.

A convenien·t means of improving the antiknock characteristics of a fuel is to add a knock inhibitor.

Such a fluid must have a minimum of corrosive or other undesirable qualities, and probably the best available inhibitor in general use at present is TEL (tetraethyl lead). The few difficulties en­ countered because of the corrosion tendencies of ethylized gasoline are insignificant when compared with the results obtained from the high antiknock value of the fuel. For most aviation fuels the ad­ dition of more than 6 ml. per gallon is not per­ mitted. Amounts in excess of this have little effect on the antiknock value, hut increase cor• rosion and spark plug trouble.

There are two distinct types of corrosion caused by the use of ethyl gasoline. The first is caused by the rtaction of the lead bromide with hot metaUic surfaces, and occurs when the engine is

### Page 84

. ·.,.

in operation; the second is caused by the con­ densed products of combustion, chiefly hydro­ hromic acid, when the engine is not running.

Purity Aviation fuels must he free of impurities that would interfere with the operation of the engine or the units in the fuel and induction system.

Even though all precautions are observed in storing and handling gasoline, it is not uncommon to find a small amount of water and sediment in an aircraft fuel system. A small amount of such contamination is usually retained in the strainers in the fuel system. Generally, this is not con­ sidered a source of great danger, provided the strainers are drained and cleaned at frequent intervals. However, the water can present a serious problem because it settles to the bottom of the fuel tank and can then be circulated through the fuel system. A small quantity of water will flow with the gasoline through the carburetor metering jets and will not be especially harmful. An ex­ cessive amount of water will displace the fuel passing through the jets and restrict the flow of fuel; it will cause loss of power and can result in engine stoppage.

Under certain conditions of temperature and humidity, condensation of moisture (from ihe air) occurs on the inner surfaces of the fuel tanks.

Since this condensation occurs on the portion of the tank above the fuel level, it is obvious that the practice of servicing an airplane immediately after flight will do much to minimize this hazard.

Fuel ldentitlcation Gasolines containing TEL must be colored to conform with the Jaw. In addition, gasoline may be colored.--for purposes of identification. For ex­ ample, grade 100 low lead aviation gasoline is blue, grade 100 is green and grade 80 is red. See figure 4-2.

100/130 gasoline is manufactured (1975) in two grades-high-lead, up to 4.6 milliliters of lead per gallon and low-lead1 not over 2.0 milliliters per gallon. The purpose being to eliminate two grades of lower octane fuel ( 80 /87) and 91/96) . The high-lead will continue to be colored green whereas the low-lead will be blue.

The low-lead will replace the 80/87 and 91/96 octane fuels as they are phased out. Engine manu­ facturers have prepared instructions to be followed in making adjustments necessary for changeover to the 100 octane fuel.

A change in color of an aviation gasoline usually indicates contamination with another product or a loss of fuel quality. A color change can also be caused by a chemical reaction that has weakened the lighter dye component. This color change in itself may not affect the quality of the fuel.

A color change can also be caused by the pre­ servative in a new hose. Grade 115/145 gasoline that has been trapped for a short period of time in new hose may appear green. Flushing a smaII amount of gasoline through the hose usually re­ moves all traces of color change.

Military or Sp<.><,ia[ u~e Civilian Civilian FIGURE 4-2. Identification of avgas.

### Page 85

JET A ( Kerosene-40•F) JET A•I (Ker<»em:-S8'FI JET B ( Naptha•Kerosene- 76' FI Civilian Military FIGURE 4-3. Identification of jet fuels.

t-uel Identification Markings The most positive method of identifying the type and grade of fuel includes the following:

l. Marking of Hose. A color band not less than one foot wide painted adjacent to the fitting on each end of hose used to dispense fuel. The bands completely encircle the hose, and the name and grade of the product is stenciled longitudinally in one-inch letters of a contrasting color over the color band.

2. Marking of Fuel Carriers, Pits and Fill Stands. Tags identifying the name and grade of the product permanently affixed to each discharge meter and fill pipe. Porcelain tags (4"X6") carrying the same information permanently bolted to the outside of the rear compartment of fuel servicing equipment. The delivery pipes of truck fill stands are banded with colors corresponding to that used on the dispensing hose.

TURBINE ENGINE FUELS The aircraft gas turbine is designed to operate on a distillate fuel, commonly called jet fuel. Jet fuels are also composed of hydrocarbons with a little more carbon and usually a higher sulphur content than gasoline. Inhibitors may be added to reduce corrosion and oxidation. Anti-icing additives are also being blended to prevent fuel icing.

Two types of jet fuel in common use today are:

(1) Kerosene grade turbine fuel, now named Jet A;

and (2) a blend of gasoline and.kerosene fractions designated Jet B. There is a third type, called Jet A-I, which is made for operation at extremely low temperatures. See figure 4-3.

77 There is very little physical difference between Jet A (JP-5) fuel and commercial kerosene. Jet A was developed as a heavy kerosene having a higher flash point and lower freezing point than most kerosenes. It has a very low vapor pressure, so there is little loss of fuel from evaporation or boil­ off at higher altitudes. It contains more heat energy per gallon than does Jet B (JP-4).

Jet Bis similar to Jet A. It is a blend of gasoline and kerosene fractions. Most commercial turbine engines will operate on either Jet A or Jet B fuel.

However, the difference in the specific gravity of the fuels may require fuel control adjustments.

Therefore, the fuels cannot always he considered interchangeable.

Both Jet A and Jet B fuels are blends of heavy distillates and tend to absorb water. The specific gravity of jet fuels, especially kerosene, is closer to water than is aviation gasoline; thus, any water introduced into the fuel, either through refueling or condensation, wiJI take an appreciable time to settle out. At high altitudes, where low temperatures are encountered, water droplets com~ bine with the fuel to form a frozen substance referred to as Hgel." The mass of ttgel" or tticing" that may be generated from moisture held in suspension in jet fuel can be much greater than in gasoline.

Volatility One of the most important characteristics of a jet fuel is its volatility. It must, of necessity, be a compromise between several opposing factors.

A highly volatile fuel is desirable to aid in starting in cold weather and to make aerial restarts easier and surer. Low volatility is desirable to reduce

### Page 86

" s -§ > >-..c

• ~ -0 = " u " " ..

10 0 L_ _ _J_ __ .i:::::.._ ___ __J OF 50F IOOF Temperature 150F 200F FIGURE 4--4. Vaporization of aviation fuels at atmospheric pressure.

the possibility of vapor lock and to reduce fuel losses by evaporation.

At normal temperatures, gasoline in a closed container or tank can give off so much vapor that the fuel/air mixture may be too rich to burn.

Under the same conditions, the vapor given off by Jet B fuel can be in the flammable or explosive range. Jet A fuel has such a low volatility that at normal temperatures it gives off very little vapor and does not form flammable or explosive fuel/ air mixtures. Figure 4-4 shows the vaporization of aviation fuels at atmospheric pressure.

Identification Because jet fuels are not dyed, there is no on­ sight identification for them. They range in color from a colorless liquid to a straw-colored (amber) liquid, depending on age or the crude petroleum source.

Jet fuel numbers are type numbers and have no relation to the fuel's performance in the aircraft engine.

FUEL SYSTEM CONTAMINATION There are several forms of contamination in aviation fuel. The higher the viscosity Of the fuel, the greater is its ability to hold contaminants in suspension. For this reason, jet fuels having a high viscosity are more susceptible to contami­ nation than aviation gasoline. The principal con­ taminants that reduce the quality of both gasoline 78 and turbine fuels are other petroleum products, water, rust or scale, and dirt.

Water Water can be present in the fuel in two forms:

(I) Dissolved in the fuel or (2) entrained or suspended in the fuel. Entrained water can be detected with the naked eye. The finely divided droplets reflect light and in high concentrations give the .fuel a dull, hazy, or cloudy appearance.

Particles of entrained water may unite to form droplets of free water.

Fuel can be cloudy for a number of reasons.

If the fuel is cloudy and the cloud disappears at the bottom, air is present. If the cloud disappears at the top, water is present. A cloud usually indi­ cates a water-in-fuel suspension. Free water can cause icing of the aircraft fuel system, usually in the aircraft boost-pump screens and low-pressure filters. Fuel gage readings may become erratic because the water short-circuits the aircrafts elec­ trical fuel cell quantity probe. Large amounts of water can cause engine stoppage. If the free water is saline, it can cause corrosion of the fuel system components.

Foreign Particles Most foreign particles are found as sediment in the fuel. They are composed of almost any material with which the fuel comes into contact.

The most common types are rust, sand, aluminum and magnesium compounds, brass shavings, and rubber.

Rust is found in two forms: (I) Red rust, which is nonmagnetic and (2) black rust, which is mag­ netic. They appear in the fuel as red or black powder (which may resemble a dye), rouge, or grains. San.d or dust appears in the fuel in a crystalline, granular, or glasslike form.

Aluminum or magnesium compounds appear in the fuel as a form of white or gray rowder or paste. This powder or paste becomes very sticky or gelatinous when water is present. Brass is found in the fuel as bright gold-colored chips or dust. Rubber appears in the fuel as fairly large irregular bits. All of these forms of contamination can cau~e sticking or malfunctions of fuel metering devices, flow dividers, pumps, and nozzles.

Contamination with Other Types or Grades of Fuel The unintentional mixing of petroleum products can result in fuels that give unacceptable per-

### Page 87

formance in the aircraft. An aircraft engine is designed to operate most efficiently on fuel of definite specifications. The use of fuels that differ from these specifications reduces operating effi­ ciency and can lead to complete engine failure.

Operators of turbine-powered aircraft are some­ times forced by circumstances to mix fuels. Such mixing, however, has very definite disadvantages.

When av{ation gasoline is mixed with jet fuel, the TEL in the gasoline forms deposits on the turbine blades and vanes. Continuous use of mixed fuels may cause a loss in engine efficiency. How­ ever, on a limited usage basis, they will have no detrimental effects on the engine.

Aviation gasoline containing by volume more than 0.5 percent of jet fuel may be reduced below the allowable limits in knock rating. Gasoline contaminated with turbine fuel is unsafe for use in reciprocating engines.

Microbial Growth Microbial growth is produced by various forms of micro-organisms that live and multiply in the water interfaces of jet fuels. These organisms may form a slime similar in appearance to the deposits found in stagnent water. The color of this slime growth may be red, brown, gray, or black. If not properly controlled by frequent removal of free water, the growth of these organisms can become extensive. The organisms feed on the hydrocarbons that are found in fuels, hut they need free water in order to multiply.

Micro-organisms have a tendency to mat, gener­ ally appearing as a brown blanket which acts as a blotter to absorb more moisture. This mixture or mat accelerates the growth of micro-organisms.

The buildup of micro-organisms not only can in­ terfere with fuel flow and quantity indication, but, more important, it can start electrolytic corrosive action.

Sediment Sediment appears as dust, powder, fibrous ma· terial, grains, flakes, or stain. Specks or granules of sediment indicate particles in the visible size range, i.e., approximately 4,0 microns or larger in size. (See figure 4--5.) The presence of any appreciable number of such particles indicates either a malfunction of the filter/separators or a source of contamination downstream of the filter/ separator, or else an improperly cleaned sample container. Even with the most efficient filter/ separators and careful fuel handling, an occasional 79 AVGAS

CLEAN FUEL 5-MlCRON

PARTICLES TIME: I HOUR JP-4 5-MICRON

PARTICLES JP·5 FIGURE 4-5. Comparison of particle's rate of settling in three types of fuel.

visible particle will be encountered. These strays are usually due to particle migration through the filter media and may represent no particular prob­ lem to the engine or fuel control. The sediment ordinarily encountered is an extremely fine powder, rouge, or silt. The two principle components of this fine sediment are normally sand and rust.

Sediment includes both organic and inorganic matter. The presence of appreciable quantities of fibrous materials ( close to naked eye visibility) is usually indicative of filter element breakdown, either because of a ruptured element or mechanical disintegration of a component in the system.

Usually, high metal content of relatively large par­ ticles suggest a mechanical failure somewhere in the system which is necessarily not limited to a metallic filter failure.

In a clean sample of fuel, sediment should not be visible except upon the most meticulous inspec­ tion. Persistent presence of sediment is suspect and requires that appropriate surveillance tests and corrective measures be applied to the fuel handling system.

Sediment or solid contamination can be separated into two categories: (1) coarse sediment and (2) fine sediment.

Course Sediment Sediment that can be seen and that easily settles out of fuel or can be removed by adequate filtera­ tion is coarse sediment. Ordinarily, particles 10 microns in size and larger are regarded as coarse sediment. (See figure 4--6.)

### Page 88

**0 40- MICRON**

PARTICLE "HUMAN HAIR IS ABOUT 100 MICRONS IN

**DIAMETER 0 10-MICRON**

**PARTICLE**

• 5-MICRON

PARTICLE 25,400 MICRONS• I INCH FIGURE 4-6. Enlargement of small particles and comparison to human hair.

Coarse particles clog orifices and wedge in slid­ ing valve clearances and shoulders, causing mal­ functions and excessive wear of fuel controls and metering equipment. They are also effective in clogging nozzle screens and other fine screens throughout the aircraft fuel system.

Fine Sediment Particles smaller than 10 microns may be de­ fined as fine sediment. (See figure 4-6.) Ninety eight percent of the fine sediment in fuel can be removed by proper settling, filtration, and centri­ fuging. Particles in this range accumulate through­ out fuel controls, appearing as a dark shellac-like surface on sliding valves, and may also be centri­ fuged out in rotating chambers as sludge-like mat­ ter, causing sluggish operation of fuel metering equipment. Fine particles are not visible to the naked eye as distinct or separate particles; they will, however, scatter light and may appear as point flashes of light or a slight haze in fuel.

Maximum possible settling time shoul-d be al­ lowed in fuel tanks after filling to allow reasonable settlement of water and sediment.

80 Contamination Detection Coarse contamination can be detected visually.

The major criterion for contamination detection is that the fuel he clean, bright, and contain no perceptible free water. Clean means the absence of any readily visible sediment or entrained water.

Bright refers to the shiny appearance of clean, dry fuels. Free water is indicated by a cloud, haze, or a water slug. A cloud may or may not be present when the fuel is saturated with water.

Perfectly clear fuel can contain as much as three times the volume of water considered to tolerable.

Several field methods for checking water content have been devised. One is the adding of a food color that is soluble in water, but not in fuel.

Co]orless fuel samples acquire a definite tint if water is present. Another method uses a gray chemical powder that changes color to pink through purple, if 30 or more p. p.m. (parts per million) of water arc present in a fuel sample.

In a third method a hypodermic needle is used to draw a fuel sample through a chemically treated filter. If the sample changes the color of the filter from yellow to blue, the fuel contains at least 30 p.p.m. of water.

Since fuel drained from tank sumps may have been cold-soaked, it should be realized that no method of water detection can he accurate while the fuel entrained water is frozen into ice crystals.

There is a good chance that water will not be drained or detected if the sumps are drained while the fuel is below 32° F. after being cooled in flight. The reason for this is that the sump drains may not be at the lowest point in the fuel tank while the airplane is in a flight attitude, and water may accumulate and freeze on other areas of the tank where it will remain undetected until it thaws.

Draining will be more effective if it is done after the fuel has been undisturbed for a period of time during which the free water can precipitate and settle to the drain point. The benefits of a settling period will be lost, however, unless the accumulated water is removed from the drains before the fuel is disturbed by internal pumps.

### Page 89

Contamination Control The aircraft fuel system can be considered as being divided into three parts when discussing clean fuel. The manufacturer produces cle.an fuel.

Contamination can occur at any time after the fuel is produced. The first part of the fuel system is the delivery and storage system between the re­ finery and the airport fuel service truck. Although this system is not physically a part of the aircraft, it is of equal importance in controlling contami­ nation.

Anytime fuel is transferred it is susceptible to contamination. Therefore. all aviation maintenance personnel should be familiar with the following means of contamination control.

Fundamental in the control of contamination of turbine fuels are the methods followed by the in· dustry in receiving and storing any bulk shipment of a petroleum product. These methods have long been established as sound, and they are too well known to need repetition here. The refueling fa.

cilities used by operators of turbine powered air­ craft should incorporate the following features:

I. Fuel being pumped into airport storage should pass through a filter-separator. The filter should meet the requirements of U.S. Government Specification MIL-F-8508A.

2. Turbine fuels should be allowed to settle for a period of one hour per foot of depth of the fuel before being withdrawn for use. This means that ordinarily more than one storage tank must be provided for each grade of product.

3. Storage tanks should be checked with litmus paper after each new load of fuel is received and the fuel has settled. The litmus paper should re­ main submerged for a minimum of 15 seconds.

During periods of heavy rain underground tanks should be checked with litmus paper more fre­ quently.

4. Suction lines should be a minimum of 6 inches from the bottom of the tank. Kerosene storage tanks should be equipped with floating type suction lines. Floating suction does not remove the bottom product, which may not have settled suf­ ficiently. It also prevents reintroduction into the fuel of any contamination at the bottom of the 81 tank. Floating suction is the only logical way to take full advantage of gravity in removing water and particulate matter contamination. Its import­ ance must not be minimized.

5. Fuel being withdrawn from storage should be passed through a filter-separator meeting the speci­ fication MIL-F-8508A.

6. Great care should be exercised in loading mobile fuelers to exclude airborne dust and dirt, rain or other foreign material.

7. To lessen the likelihood of rust and scale the tanks of mobile fuelers should be constructed of either stainless steel, nonferrous material or steel coated with a reliable, inert material.

8. As turbine fuel is being dispensed into the aircraft from truck or hydrant it should be filtered to a degree of 5 microns for solid particles and contain no more than 0.0015 per cent of free and entrained water. Bypass valves around the filter should not be permitted.

9. All the quality control procedures usually followed in handling aviation gasoline should be employed. These include regular and frequent check of filter-separators; frequent quality check such as the "clear and bright" test; and continual emphasis on cleanliness. Examples: "Don't let the hose nozzle drag on the apron." "Keep the dust cap on the nozzle at all times when nozzle is not in use."

FUEL SYSTEM The aircraft fuel system stores fuel and delivers the proper amount of clean fuel at the right pres· sure to meet the demands of the engine. A well­ designed fuel system ensures positive and reliable fuel flow throughout all phases of flight, which include changes in altitude, violent maneuvers and sudden acceleration and deceleration. Further­ more, the system must be reasonably free from tendency to vapor lock, which can result from changes in ground and in-flight climatic conditions.

Such indicators as fuel pressure gages, warning signals, and tank quantity gages are provided to give continuous indications of how the system is functioning.

### Page 90

To priming c:onnection Hight tauk FIGURE 4-7. Gravity feed fuel system.

The simplest type of fuel system is the gravity feed, which is still in use on many low-powered airplanes. A gravity feed system is shown in figure 4-7. The fuel tanks arc mounted above the carburetor, with gravity causing the fuel to flow from the tanks to the carburetor. A selector valve is provided to stop the fuel flow or to select a par­ ticular tank in the system from which to ·draw fuel. A strainer filters the fuel before it reaches the carburetor. A drnin is provided for removing water and sediment trapped at the strainer. A primer furnishes the additional fuel required for pngine starting.

Airplanes equipped with a high-output engine require a fuel system that supplies fuel to the carburetor at a positive pressure. The basic source for this pressure is an engi~e-driven fuel pump, but auxiliary fuel pumps or booster pumps are required in every prPssure frrd system to: (I) supply fuel prt'ssurc for starting the engine; ( 2) supply fuel to the primn system; and (3) to serve as an emergency pump in case thf' engine-driven pump fails.

FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS The basic components of a fuel system include tanks, lines, valves, pumps, filtering units, gages, warning signal, and primer. Some systems will include central refueling provisions, fuel dump valves, and a means for transferring fuel. In order to clarify the operating principles of complex air­ craft fuel systems, the various units are discussed in the following paragraphs.

82 Fuel Tanks The location, size, shape, and construction of fuel tanks vary with the type and intended use of the aircraft. In some aircraft, the fuel tanks are integral \y·ith the wing or other structural portions of the aircraft.

Fuel tanks are made of materials that will not react chemically with any aviation fuel. Aluminum alJoy is widely used, and synthetic rubber bladder.

type .fuel cells are used in some installations.

Usually a sump and a drain are provided at the lowE'st point in the tank as shown in figure 4-8.

When a sump or low point is provided in the tank, the main fuel supply is not drawn from the bottom of the sump, but from a higher point in the tank.

The top of each tank is vented to the outside air in order to maintain atmospheric pressure within the tank. Air vents are designed to min.

imize the possibility of their stoppage by dirt and ice formation. In order to permit rapid changes in internal air pressure, the size of the vent is proportional to the size of the tank, thus preventing the collapse of the tank in a steep dive or glide. All except the very smallest of tanks are fitted with internal baffles to resist fuel surging caused by changes in the attitude of the aircraft. Usually an expansion space is provided in fuel tanks to aHow for an increase in fuel volume due to expansion.

The filler neck and cap are usually located in a recessed welJ, equipped with a scupper and

### Page 91

.----- Vents '-....

Scupper Overboard drain line '---- Baffle platt>s / Standpipe FIG\JRE 4---8. A typical metal fuel tank.

drain. The scupper is designed to prevent over­ flowing fuel from entering the win·~ or fuselage structure. Fuel caps have provisipn,~ for locking devices to prevent acciden~al loss during flight.

Filler openings are clearly inarked with the word HFUEL", the tank capacity, and the type of fuel to be used. Information concerning the capacity of each tank is usually posted near th.e fuel se­ lector valves, as well as on the tank filler caps.

Some fuel tanks are equipped with dµmp valves that make it possible to jettiso:r:i fuel (luring flight in order tO reduce the weight of the ~irpraft to its specified maximum landing weighL l:p aircraft equipped with dump valves, th~ operating control is located within reach of th~ pilot, copilot, or · flight engineer. Dump valves are designed and installed to afford safe, rapid discharge of fuel.

Fuel Cells Present day aircraft may be equipped with one or more of the following types of fuel cells: the bladder-type fuel cell and the integral fuel cell.

Bladder-Type Fuel Cells The bladder-type fuel cell is a nonself-sealing cell that is used to reduce weight. It depends en­ tirely upon the structure of the cavity in which it sits to support the weight of the fuel within it.

For this reason, the cell is made slightly larger 83 than the cavity. The bladder cells in use are made either of rubber or of nylon.

Integral Fuel Cells Since integral fuel cells are usually built into the wings of the aircraft structure, they are not removable. An integral cell is a part of the aircraft structure, which has been so built that after the seams, structural fasteners, and access doors have been properly sealed, the cell will hold fuel without leaking. This type of construction is usually re­ ferred to as a Hwet wing."

Fuel Lines and Fittings In an aircraft fuel system, the various tanks and other components are usually joined together by fuel lines made of metal tubing connected, where flexibility is necessary, by lengths of flexible hose. The metal tubing usual1y is made of aluminum alloy, and the flexible hose is made of synthetic rubber or Teflon. The diameter of the tubing is governed by the fuel flow require­ ments of the engine.

Each fuel line is identified by a color-coded band near each end. Except for short lines be­ tween flexible connections, tubing should be prop­ erly supported by clamping to structural members of the aircraft.

A special heat-resistant hose is used where the

### Page 92

. '.,· ~ cover Clamp Thumb nut FIGl;RE 4-9. Main fuels.trainer for light aircraft.

flexible lines will be subjected to intense heat.

For all flexible fuel lines located forward of the firewall, fire-resistant hose is used.

In many installations, the fuel lines are designed to be located within the tanks. Therefore, minor leaks occurring within the tank are cJassified as internal leaks and v,·ill not cause fire hazards.

Fuel Strainers Strainers are installed in the tank outlets and frequently in the tank filler necks. These are of fairly coarse mesh and prevent only the larger particles from entering the fuel system. Other, fine-mesh, strainers are provided in the carburetor fuel inlets and in the fuel lines.

The function of the main strainer is important:

it not only prevents foreign matter from entering the carburetor, but also, because of its location at the low point of the fuel system, traps any small amount of water that may be present in the system. In multiengine aircraft, one main strainer is usually installed in each engine nacelle.

A main fuel strainer for a light airplane is shown in figure 4----9. It consists of a cast metal top, a screen, and a glass bowl. The bowl is attached to the cover by a clamp and thumb nut.

Fuel enters the unit through the inlet port, filters through the screen, and exits through the outlet port. At regular intervals the glass bowl is drained.

and the screen is removed for inspection and cleaning.

The main fuel strainer shown in figure 4-10 is so 84 Fuel outlet Fuel inlet In

- Drain cock Fuel flow through strainer element FIGURE 4-10. Main fuel strainer.

installed that the fuel flows through it before reaching the engine-driven pump. It is located at the lowest point in the fuel system. The shape and construction of the fine-mesh screen provides

### Page 93

OFF FIGURE 4--11. Centrifugal fuel booster pump.

a large screening surface encased in a compact housing. Reinforcing the screen is a coarse, heavy­ wire mesh.

Auxiliary Fuel Pumps The electrically driven centrifugal booster pump, shown in figure 4----11, supplies fuel under pressure to the inlet of the engine-driven fuel pump. This type of pump is an essential part of the fuel system, particularly at high altitudes, to keep the pressure on the suction side of the engine-driven pump from becoming low enough to permit the fuel to boil. This booster pump is also used to transfer fuel from one tank to another, to supply fuel under pressure for priming when starting the engine, and, as an emergency unit, to supply fuel to the carburetor in case the engine­ driven pump fails. To increase the capacity of the pump under emergency conditions, many pumps are equipped with a two-speed or variable-speed control so that the recommended fuel inlet pres­ sure to the carburetor can be maintained. As a precautionary measure, the booster pump is al­ ways turned on during takeoffs and landings to ensure a positive supply of fuel.

The booster pump is mounted at the tank outlet 85 within a detachable sump or is submerged in fuel at the bottom of the fuel tank. The seals between the impeller and the power section of the pump prevent leakage of fuel or fumes into the motor.

If any liquid or vapor should leak past the seal, it is vented overboard through a drain. As an added precaution in nonsubmerged-type pumps, air is allowed to circulate around the motor to remove dangerous fuel vapor.

As fuel enters the pump from the tank, a high­ speed impeller throws the fuel outward in all directions at high velocity. The high rotational speed swirls the fuel and produces a centrifuge action that separates air and vapor from the fuel before it enters th-e fuel line to the carburetor.

This results in practically vapor-free fuel delivery to the carburetor and permits the separated vapors to rise through the fuel tank and escape through the tank vents. Since a centrifugal-type pump is not a positive-displacement pump, no relief valve is necessary.

Although the centrifugal type is the most common type of booster pump, there are still a few sliding-vane-type booster pumps in service.

This type, too, is driven by an electric motor.

Unlike the centrifugal type, it does not have the advantage of the centrifuge action to separate the vapor from the fuel. Since it is a positive­ displacement-type pump, it must have a relief valve to prevent excessive pressure. I ts construc­ tion and operation are identical to the engine­ driven pump.

Hand Pump The hand, or wobble, pump is frequently used on light aircraft. It is generally located near other fuel system components and operated from the cockpit by suitable controls. A diagram of a wobble pump is shown in figure 4--12. When the handle attached to the central blade is operated, the low pressure created on the chamber below the upward moving blade, permits the incoming fuel pressure to lift the lower flapper and allows fuel to flow into this chamber. At the same time fuel flows through a drilled passageway to fill the chamber above the downward moving blade. As the blade moves downward, the lower flapper closes, preventing fuel from escaping back into the inlet line. The fuel below the downward mov­ ing blade flows through a passageway into another chamber and is discharged through an outlet flapper valve to the carburetor. The cycle is re-

### Page 94

Fuel outlet Blade Fuel inlet r I ' ' ~ Inlet fuel ~:,\;::.-.j Discharge fuel FIGURE 4-12. Schematic diagram of a wobble pump.

peated each time the handle is moved m either direction.

Engine-Driven Fuel Pump The purpose Of the engine-driven fuel pump is to deliver a continuous supply of foe) at the proper pressure at all times during engine oper­ ation. The pump widely used at the present ti'me is the positive-displacement, rotary-vane-type pump.

A schematic diagram of a typical engine-driven pump (vane-type) is shown in figure 4-13. Regard­ less of variations in design, the operating principle of all vane-type fuel pumps is the same.

A.

[KJ Booster pump }Jressure m Engine-driven pump pressure Balance line C.

B.

Pump inlet Pump outlet FIGURE 4-13. Engine-driven fu('I pump (pressure delivery).

86 B D r:J] Booster pump pressure A. Balance line C. Pump inlet B. Pump outlet D. Bypass valve FIGL'RE 4-14. Engine-driven fuel pump (bypass flow).

C The engine-driven pump· is usualJy mounted on the accessory section of the engine. The rotor, with its sliding vanes, is driven by the crankshaft through the accessory gearing. Note how the vanes carry fuel from the inlet to the outlet as the rotor turns in the direction indicated. A seal prevents leakage at the point where the drive shaft enters the pump hody, an<l a drain carries away any fue] that leak~ past the seal. Since the fuel provides enough lubrication for the pump, no special luhrieation i,- ncct'ssarY.

Since the engine-driven fuel .,pump normally discharges more fuel than the engine requires, there must be some way of relieving excess fuel to prevent excessive fuel pressures at the fuel inlet of the (·arburetor. This is a('complished through the use of a spring-loaded rdief valve that can be adjusted to deliver fuel at the recommended pressure for a particular carburetor. Figure 4-13, shows the pressure relief valve in operation, by­ passing excess fuel baek to the inlet side of the pump. Adjustment is made }ry increasing or de­ creasing the tension of the spring.

The relief valve of the engine-driven pump is designed to open at the set pressure regardless of the pressure of the fuel entering the pump. To maintain the proper relation between fuel pressure and carburetor inlet air pressure, the chamber above the fuel pump relief valve is vented either to the atmosphere or through a balance line to carburetor air inlet pressure. The combined pres­ sures of spring tension and either atmospheric or

### Page 95

carburetor inlet air pressure determine the abso­ lute pressure at which the relief valve opens. This balanced-type relief valve has certain objection­ able features that must be investigated when en­ countering fuel system troubles. A sylphon or diaphragm failure will allow air to enter the fuel on the inlet side of the pump if the pump inlet pressure is less than atmospheric. Conversely, if the pump inlet pressure is above atmospheric pressure, fuel will be discharged from the vent.

For proper altitude compensation the vent must be open. If it should become clogged by ice or foreign matter while at altitude, the fuel pressure will decrease during descent. If the vent becomes clogged during ascent, the fuel pressure will in­ crease as the altitude is increased.

In addition to the relief valve, the fuel pump has a bypass valve that permits fuel to flow around the pump rotor whenever the pump is inoperative. This valve, shown in figure 4--14, con­ sists of a disk that is lightly spring-loaded against a series of ports in the relief valve head. When fuel is needed for starting the engine, or in the event of engine-driven pum}) failure, fuel at booster-pump pressure is delivered to the fuel pump inlet. When the pressure is great enough to move the bypass disk from its seat, fuel is allowed to enter the carburetor for priming or metering.

When the engine-driven pump is in operation, the pressure buiJt up on the outlet side of the pump, together with the pressure of the bypass spring, holds the disk on its seat and prevents fuel flow through the ports.

Valves Selector valves are installed in the fuel system to provide a means for shutting off the fuel flow, for tank and engine selection, for crossfeed, and for fuel transfer. The size and number of ports (openings) vary with the type of installation. For example, a single.:engine aircraft with two fuel tanks and a reserve fuel supply requires a valve with four ports-three inlets from the tanks and a common outlet. The valve must accommodate the full flow capacity of the fuel line, must not leak, and must operate freely with a definite ''feel" or ~'click" when.it is in the correct position.

Selector valves may be operated either manually or electricaJly. A tube, rod, or cable is attached to a manually operated valve so that it can be operated from the cockpit. Electrically operated valves have an actuator, or motor. The three 87 main types of selector valves are the poppet, cone, and disk.

The poppet-type selector valve has an indi­ vidual poppet valve at each in1et port. A cam and yoke on the same shaft act to open the selected poppet valve as the yoke is turned. Figure 4-15 shows how the cam lifts the upper poppet valve from its seat when the control handle is set to the '~number 2" tank. This opens the passage from the "number 2" tank to the engine. At the same time, a raised portion of the index plate drops into a notch in the side of the cam. (See the detail of the index mechanism.) This pro­ duces the Hfeel" th~t indicates the valve is in the wide open position. The control handle should always be set by "'feel" rather than by the mark­ ing on the indicator dial. The index mechanism also keeps the valve in the desired position and prevents creeping caused by vibration. Some valves have more than one raised portion on the cam to aHow two or more ports to be opened at the same time.

The cone-type selector valve has either an all­ metal or a cork-faced aluminum housing. The cone, which fits into the housing, is rotated by means of a cockpit control. To supply fuel from the desired tank, the cockpit control is turned until the passages in the cone align with the correct ports in the housing. An indexing mecha­ nism aids in obtaining the desired setting and also holds the cone in the selected position. Some cone-type valves have a friction release mechanism that reduces the amount of turning torque re­ quired to make a tank selection and that can be adjusted to prevent leakage.

The rotor of the disk-type selector valve fits into a cylindrical hole in the valve body. A disk­ type valve is shown in figure 4-16. Note that the rotor has one open port and several sealing disks­ one for each port in the housing. To select a tank, the rotor is turned until the open port aligns with the port from which fuel floW is desired. At this time, aH other ports are closed by the sealing disks. In this position, fuel will flow from the desired tank to the selector valve and out through the engine-feed port at the bottom of the valve.

To ensure positive port alignment for full fuel flow, the indexing mechanis)Jl (shown in the center of figure 4-16 forces a spring-loaded ball into a ratchet ring. When the selector valve is placed in the closed position, the open port in the rotor is opposite a blank in the valve body, while each sealing disk covers a tank port.

### Page 96

Reserve tank From tank 2 To main strainer Tlw index me<:hanism Tank l'\o. l FIGURE 4-15. Poppet-type selector valve.

Fuel tank shutoff valves have two positions, open and closed. They are insta1led in the system to prevent fuel loss when a fuel system component is being removed or when a part of the system is damaged. In some installations they are used to control the fuel flow during fuel transfer. They are operated either manually or electrically. An electrically operated fuel shutoff valve includes a reversible electric motor linked to a sliding~valve assembly. The motor move$ the valve gate in and out of the passage through which the fuel flows, thus, shutting off or turning on the fuel flow.

FUEL SYSTEM INDICATORS Fuel Quantity Gages Fuel quantity gages are necessary so that the operator may know the quantity of fuel remaining Valve body in the tanks during operation of the aircraft. The four general types of fuel gages are: (1) Sight glass, (2) mechanical, (3) electrical, and ( 4) elec­ tronic. The type of fuel gage installation depends on the size of the air<Taft and the number and location of the fuel tanks. Since the sight glass and mechanical fuel gages arc not suitable for aircraft where tanks are located an appreciable distance from the cockpit, larger aircraft use either electrical or electronic fuel quantity gages. On some aircraft, one fuel gage, called a totalizer, indicates the total amount of fuel remaining in all the fuel tanks.

The sight glass is the simplest form of fuel quantity gage. The indicator is a glass or plastic tube placc<l on the same level as the tank. It operates on the principle that a liquid seeks its Hot or mechanism - FIGURE 4-16. Disk-type selector valve.

### Page 97

I 1/2 'F ' FIGURE 4-17. Float-and-lever type fuel level gage.

own level. The tube is caJibrated in gallons or has a metal scale near it. The sight glass may have a shutoff valve so that the fuel can he shut off for cleaning and for preventing loss of fuel if the tube is broken.

The mechanical-type fuel quantity gage is usu­ ally located in the tank and is known as a direct reading gage. It has an indicator connected to a float resting on the surface of the fuel. As the fuel level changes, the float mechanically operates the indicator, thus showing the level of fuel in the tank. One type of mechanical fuel gage is illustrated in figure 4--17.

The electrical-type quantity gage consists of an indiCator in the cockpit and a float-operated transmitter installed in the tank. As the fuel level changes, the transmitter sends an electric signal to the indicator, which shows the changing fuel level. Two important advantages of this fuel quantity gage (and the electronic type discussed in the next paragraph) are that the indicator can be located any distance from the tank and the fuel levels of several tanks can be read on one indicator.

The electronic-type (capacitance) fuel quantity gage differs from the other types in that it has no movable devices in the fuel tank. Instead of floats and their attendant mechanical units, the dielectric qualities of fuel and air furnish a meas­ urement of fuel quantity. Essentially, the tank transmitter is a simple electric condenser. The dielectric (or nonconducting material) of the con­ denser is fuel and air (vapor) above the fuel.

The capacitance of the tank unit at any one time will depend on the existing proportion of fuel and vapors in the tank. The capacitance of the trans­ mitter is compared to a reference capacitor in a rebalance-type bridge circuit. The unbalanced sig- 89 nal is amplified by the voltage amplifiers that drive a phase discriminating power stage. The output stage supplies power to one phase of a two-phase a.c. motor that mechanically drives a rebalancing potentiometer and indicator pointer.

The electronic type system of measuring fuel quantity is more accurate in measuring fuel level, as it measures the fuel by weight instead of in gallons. Fuel volume will vary with temperature (a gallon of gasoline weighs more when it is cold than when it is hot); thus, if it is measured in pounds instead of gallons, the measurement will be more accurate.

In addition to the cockpit fuel quantity indi­ cating system, some aircraft are provided with a means to determine the fuel quantity in each tank when the aircraft is on the ground. This is accomplished in several different ways. Some manufacturers use float-operated, direct-reading fuel gages mounted in the lower surface of the wing. Another means is to use under-wing bayonet gages. There are two types in use, the drip gage and the sight gage.

When using the drip gage it is necessary to proceed slowly, using the trial-and-error method to find the exact fuel level. In large area tanks a proportionately large amount of fuel is represented by a fraction of an inch variation in fuel level.

The long, hollow drip tubes require some time to drain once they are filled with fuel, and a sub­ stantial error in reading will be made if the di­ minishing drainage drip is mistaken for the steady drip that signifies that the tube is properly po­ sitioned.

When the cap and hoHow drip tube are drawn out from the lower wing surface, the fuel enters the open top of the tube when it reaches the level of the fuel. As stated previously steady drip from a drip hole signifies that the tube is properly positioned with a tiny head of fuel above the opening. The drip gage tube may he calibrated in pounds or inches. When calibrated in inches, the reading is compared with a special chart to give a reading of fuel quantity in gallons.

The sight gage is somewhat simpler in con­ struction than the drip gage, and offers unmis­ takable visual evidence when it is properly po­ sitioned for reading. As shown in figure 4-18, the sight gage is basicaJly a long lucite rod, protected by a calibrated tube, which terminates at the top in an exposed quartz tip. When the tip is above the fuel it acts as a reflector. Light rays traveling up the lucite rod are deflected at right angles by

### Page 98

Proh•l'tiv(· tuht· (Ha~ t'lllhoswd ni!ihration marb) Hcmovahh• !4t1i,lc huuc.iug ~ { ! ·/· He~d tank quantityj l at this point Lower surfacl" of wing (May he either ,:,onkal or l·hisel p0Jnt) ·---~ Ludte rod Permanently mounfr•d / housiu~ 7 in stowed position) F1cma: -1,-18. Under-wing sight gage.

the 45° surface at one side of the tip and deflected 90° again by the 4.5° surface at the opposite side and returned dmvn the lucite rod.

Any portion of the tip submerged in fuel will not act as a reflector. Consequently, when the fuel level is part way up the taper, a light pattern is created that is visible at the Jower end of the Incite rod and that has the dimension and shape described by the intersection of the tip and the fuel. When the reflected light is reduced to the smallest perceptible point in the case of cone­ tipped gages, or hairline in the case of chisel-tipped gages, the rod is properly positioned. The fuel tank quantity can be read on the tube where it emerges from the recessed guide housing. Drip gage readings are taken at this location also.

90 Fuel Flowmeter The fuel flowmeter is normally used only in multiengine aircraft. The system consists of a transmitter and an indicator. The transmitter is installed in the fuel inlet line to the engine, where it measures the rate of fuel flow. The transmitter is electrically connected to the indicator located in the cockpit. This gage shows the rate of fuel consumption in pounds per hour.

The transmitter signal may be developed by a movable vane mounted in the fuel flow path.

The impact of fuel causes the vane to swing and move against the restraining force of a calibrated spring. The final position assumed by the vane represents a measure of the rate at which fuel is passing through the flowmeter and the corre­ sponding signal to be sent to the indicator. A vane-type fuel flowmeter system is illustrated in figure 4-19.

The transmitter used with turbine engines is the mass-flow type having a range of 500 to 2,500 pounds per hour. It consists of two cylinders placed in the fuel stream so that the direction of fuel flow is parallel to the axes of the cylinders.

/See figure 4-20.) The cylinders have small vanes in "the outer periphery. The upstream cylinder, called the impeller, is driven at a constant angular velocity by the power supply. This velocity im­ parts an angular momentum to the fuel. The fuel then transmits this angular velocity to the turbine (the downstream cylinder), causing the turbine to rotate until a restraining spring force balances the force due to the angular momentum of the fuel. The deflection of the turbine positions a magnet in the second harmonic transmitter to a position corresponding to the fuel flow. The tur­ bine position is transmitted to the flight station indicator by means of a selsyn system.

Fuel Pressure Gage The fuel pressure gage indicates the pressure of the fuel entering the carburetor. This gage may be included with tbe oil pressure gage and the oil temperature gage in one casing, called the engine gage unit. Most aircraft today have separate gages for these functions. An engine gage unit is shown in figure 4,-21.

The fuel pressure gage is a differential pressure indicator with two connections on the back of the indicator housing. The air connection (see figure 4-22) is vented to the carburetor air inlet, and the fuel connection is attached to the fuel

### Page 99

Transmitter 26V 400,...., AC .-JHf----\41 ,,,,,, ~ Fuel flow-~ i Restraining spring FIGURE 4--19. Vane-type fuel flowmeter system.

inlet chamber of the carburetor. In this way the gage indicates the difference between the fuel pressure entering the carburetor and the air pres­ sure at the carburetor air inlet. In some instal­ lations, the air fitting on the gage is left open to the air pressure of the cockpit, which is generally the same as the pressure of the atmosphere. When this venting arrangement is used, the relief valve of the engine-driven fuel pump is also vented to the atmosphere, and the gage indicates the fuel Second harmonic transmitter pressure resulting from the adjusted spring pres~ sure only. In order to dampen pressure pulsations that cause pointer fluctuation, a restrictor fitting (A) is installed at the carburetor end of the fuel gage line. (See the Y connection shown in figure

4-22.) The second restrictor (BJ meters fuel to the oil system during oil dilution. The arrangeM ment of these restrictors provides an indicated drop in fuel pressure when the oil dilution system is used. The oilMdilution system will be discussed Fuel flow Calibrated restraining springs Fluid passage Fluid passage us,vAc

EA B C D ~-e Indicator A B C r-+---+--=-+-1 C ..:+---=->-H D L-=-f+-tt~~+I E 1------' Power supply FIGURE 4--20. Schematic of a turbine engine fuel flow indicating system.

91 28VDC .; '

### Page 100

\\ 1111/1,, ' 'I o , ' 50 100 // ,'\ F 150 ,k ' 0 01Lc:,JfJ11 / 200 I I I "'' 200 ' ' ..,, OIL FUEL -::-100 -O•---..; ... 10....::_ ;

;

/, I I I PSI , ,' 0 0 ,,,' I I I I\ FIGUR'E 4-21. Engine gage unit.

thorough! y in the Powerplant Handbook, and is mentioned at this time only because the fuel pressure indicator provides a means for a check on the operation of other fuel system units.

In small aircraft the fuel pressure gage may be actuated by a Bourdon tube (an instrument that converts changes in pressure to mechanical mo­ tion), or an aneroid and bellows type, installed with a pressure line leading directly from the carburetor to the indicator. On larger aircraft, where the fuel pressure gage is located some dis­ tance from the carburetor, a transmitter is usually installed. The pressure transmitter may be a simple cast metal ceJI that is divided into two chambers by a flexible diaphragm. Pressure ap­ plied by the fuel source to the transmitter inlet pushes against the diaphragm and builds up an equal pressure to a thin fluid (highly refined kerosene), which transfers the pressure to the indicator mechanism. Some installations, however, use electrical transmitters to register fuel pressure on the gage. In this electrical arrangement, the pressure-indicating unit is contained in the trans­ niitter. Fuel pressure, acting upon the aneroid and bellows portion of the unit, causes motion of one part of an electrical unit (the synchro transmitter). As the unit turns, it causes a similar movement of a corresponding unit (the synchro motor). This receiving unit actuates the indicator on the instrument panel. These pressure and electrical arrangements make it unnecessary for combustible fuel to enter the cockpit or flight deck, thereby reducing fire risk.

92 A fuel pressure gage often used with fuel in­ jection systems on light aircraft engines is illus­ trated in figure 4-23. A gage of this type registers metered fuel pressure at the fuel injection unit distributor valve and is a direct indication of engine power output when installed in a fuel injection system for light aircraft engines. The dial of the gage is marked to indicate percent of power. The gage does not indicate either the engine-driven pump or the boost pump pressure.

Pressure Warning Signal In an aircraft with several tanks, there is always the possible danger of allowing the fuel supply in one tank to become exhausted before the selector valve is switched to another. To prevent this, pressure-warning signals are installed in some aircraft. The complete installation, shown in figure 4-22, consists of a pressure-sensitive mechanism and a warning light. The warning mechanism has both a fuel and an air connection.

The connection marked ''fuel" is connected to the fuel pressure line of the carburetor. The air connection is vented to either atmospheric or carburetor air inlet pressure. This arrangement prevents the warning mechanism from acting in response to changes in the absolute pressure of the fuel. If, for example, the absolute pressure of the fuel decreases because of a change in atmospheric or carburetor air inlet pressure, the change is also reflected at the warning mechanism, which then cancels the effects of the change. Normal fuel pressure against the power surface of the dia­ phragm holds the electrical contacts apart. When the fuel pressure drops below specified limits, the contacts close and the warning light is turned on.

This alerts the operator to take whatever action is necessary to boost the fuel pressure.

Valve-In-Transit Indicator Lights On large multiengine aircraft, each of the fuel crossfeed and line valves may be provided with a valve~in-transit indicator light. This light is on only during the time the valve is in motion and is off when movement is complete.

Fuel Temperature Indicator A means for checking the temperature of the fuel in the tanks and at the engine is provided on some turbine-powered aircraft. During ex­ treme cold, especially at altitude, the gage can

### Page 101

r--~ Warning light Electrical connec:tions to warning light Pressure gage Inlet from fuel pump Warning Location of units in the system dilution valve A B~ Y t:onnection Contacts Adjustment screw Pressure warning mechanism FIGURE 4-22. Fuel pressure-indicating system.

be checked to determine when fuel temperatures are approaching those at which there may be danger of ice crystals forming in the fuel.

MUL TIENGINE FUEL SYSTEMS The design of the fuel system for an .. n:raft having two or more engines presents p1obiems not normally encountered in single-engine fuel systems. A large number of tanks are often re­ quired to carry the necessary fuel. These tanks may be located in widely separated parts of the aircraft, such as the fuselage and the inboard and outboard sections of the wings. The individual engine fuel systems must he interconnected so FIGURE 4-23. Fuel pressure gage for fuel-injection system.

93 that fuel can be fed from the various tanks to any engine. In case of engine failure, the fuel normally supplied to the inoperative engine must be made available to the others.

Crossfeed System The twin-engine fuel system ilJustrated in figure 4-24 is the simple crossfeed type. As shown, the tank selector valves are set to supply fuel from the main tanks to the engines. These valves can also be positioned to sripply fuel from the auxiliary tanks. The crossfeed valve is shown in the off position. It can also he set to supply fuel from the fuselage tank to either or both engines and to crossfeed. A few of the numerous combinations in which the three valves can be set are also illustrated.

Manifold System The main feature of the four-engine system shown in figure 4-25 is the fuel manifold. This fuel manifold system is actuaBy a variation of the crossfeed. As shown~ fuel is being supplied from the main tanks directly to the engines. The mani­ fold valves can also be set so that all tanks feed into the manifold and each engine receives its fuel supply from this line. The auxiliary fuel supply can be delivered to the engines only through the manifold. The main advantage of this system is its flexibility. Should an engine fail, its fuel is immediately available to the other engines. If a tank is damaged, the corresponding engine can be supplied with fuel from the manifold.

Another advantage of this system is that all fuel tanks can be serviced at the same time through a single Jine manifold connection. This

### Page 102

' Left engine Filter~ Main tank valve Auxiliary tank Auxiliary tank Right engine Crossfeed valve Main tank Boost pump Aux. Main/ ! Aux. Main/ Auxiliary tanks to engines Right main tank to both engines Fuselage tank to left engine Aux.

Fuselage tank to both engines FIGURF. 4-24. Twin-engine crossfeed system schematic.

method of fuel serv1cmg has greatly reduced servicing time on large aircraft because fuel can be introduced into the fueling manifold under high pressure.

FUEL JETTISON SYSTEMS A fuel jettison system is required for transport category and general aviation ·aircraft if the maxi­ mum take-off weight exceeds the maximum landing weight. The maximum take-off and landing weights are design specifications and may be found in the Aircraft Type Certificate data sheets.

A fuel jettison system must be able to jettison enough fuel within 10 minutes for general aviation, or 15 minutes for transport category aircraft, to meet the requirements of the specifications and Federal Air Regulations. It must be operable- un­ der the conditions encountered during all opera­ tions of the aircraft.

Design requirements are that fuel jettisoning must be stopped with a minimum o.f fuel for 45 minutes of cruise at maximum continuous power for reciprocating engines. Turbine powered air­ craft require enough fuel for take-off and landing and 45 minutes cruising time.

94 The fuel jettisoning system is usually divided into two separate, independent systems, one for each wing, so that lateral stability can be main­ tained by jettisoning fuel from the "heavy" wing if it is necessary to do so. Normally, if an unbal­ anced fuel load exists, fuel will be used from the "heavy" wing by supplying fuel to engines on the opposite wing.

The system consists of lines, valves, dump chutes and chute-operating mechanisms. Each wing con­ tains either a fixed or an extendable dump chute depending upon system design. In either case the fuel must discharge clear of the airplane.

TROUBLESHOOTING THE FUEL SYSTEM In order to become proficient at the art of troubleshooting, one must be familiar with the complete system. To do this, one can become familiar with the schematics of various portions of the system, the nomenclature of the units, and their particular function within the system by studying aircraft and engine maintenance manuals.

### Page 103

Engine No. l Engine No. 2 Engine No. 3 Refueling receptacle ~ Engine No. 4 Engine-driven pump No. 1 tank No. 2 tank Auxiliary tank No. 3 tank No. 4 tank j;·:·.;.:;.:".£:.-1 Flow to engine ~ F1ow blocked FIGURE 4--25. A typical manifold crossfeed system.

Location of Leaks and Defects The location of leaks and defects within the internal portions of the fuel system is usually a matter of observation of the pressure gage and operation of the selector valves to deteri:nine where the trouble lies. Troubleshooting of the internal fuel system can he aided by visualizing the pa th of flow of the fuel from the fuel tank to the fuel-metering device, noting the location of the pump(s), selector valves, emergency shutoff valves, etc.

The location of leaks or defects in the external portions of the fuel system involves very little time in comparison to locating leaks within the internal system. Usually, fuel leaks are evidenced by stains or wet spots, if they are newly developed, and by the presence of fuel odor. The plumbing, clamps, gaskets, supports, etc., are to be examined carefully at each inspection period. Any defect or leak in the internal or external fuel system is a potential hazard.

Replacement of Gaskets, Seals, and Packings In order to prevent leakage of fuel, it is of utmost importance that aH gaskets, seals, and packings be properly installed. Listed below are some of the general precautions that should always be observed.

95 When replacing units of the fuel system, it is necessary to check each part for cleanliness, ensure that all of the old gasket material is removed, and ensure that none of the old seal remains in the groove seat. Always replace old gaskets and seals with new ones, check the new gaskets and seals for cleanliness and integrity, and ensure that it is the right part for the job. Mating surfaces should be perfectly flat so that the gasket can do the job for which it is designed. Screws, nuts, and bolts that hold units together should be evenly tightened or torqued to prevent leakage past the gasket or seal.

FUEL TANK REPAIRS There are three basic type fuel cells used in air;

craft. ~Telded sheet metal integral and fuel celL No fuel system is airworthy if it will not contain fuel. Inspection of the fuel tank bays or aircraft structure for evidence of fuel leaks is a very im­ portant part of the preflight inspection.

Welded Steel Tanks Welded tanks are most common in the smaller single and twin engine aircraft. If the access plates to the fuel tank compartment are discolored the tank should be inspected for leaks. When leaks are found, the tank must be drained and inerted. Fuel will be drained in accordance with .. ,~.

### Page 104

local instructions and the manufacturer's recom­ mendations. Inerting the tank may be accom­ plished by slowly discharging a CO, fire extinguisher ( 5 lb. minimum size) into the tank.

Dry nitrogen inay be used if it is available. If the tank is to be welded, removal is necessary.

Before welding, the tank must be steamed for a minimum of 8 hours. This is to remove all traces of fueL Air pressure not over 'l'.2 psi may he used to detect the leaking area. Liquid soap or bubble solution brushed in the suspected area may identify the leak. Aluminum tanks are fabricated from weldable alloys. After riveting patches in place, the rivets may he welded to insure no leaks from that area. Pressure checks should be per­ formed after repairs are completed to assure that all leaks were corrected.

Fuel Cells Fuel cell leaks will usually appear on the lower skin of the aircraft. A fuel stain in any area should be investigated immediately. Fuel cells suspected of leaking should be drained, removed from the aircraft and pressure checked. When performing a pressure check, lf1 to 'l'.2 psi air pres­ ure is adequate. All fuel cell maintenance must be accomplished in accordance with the manufac­ turer's specifications.

3/4[~

A-SLOW SEEP 3D!A

C- HEAVY SEEP Integral Fuel Tanks The integral tank is a nonremovable part of the aircraft. Because of the nature of an integral tank, some leaks allow fuel to escape directly to the atmosphere. This makes it completely feasible to disregard certain minute leaks that do not repre­ sent a fire hazard or too great a loss of fuel. In order to standardize ·the procedures for integral tank fuel storage maintenance, the various rates of fuel leakage are classified.

Fuel Leak Classification The size of the surface area that a fuel leak moistens in a 30-rninute period is used as the classification standard. Wipe the leak area com­ pletely dry with clean cotton cloths. Compressed air may also be used to dry the leak areas that are difficult to wipe. Wear goggles when using com­ pressed air to dry the leak area. Dust the leak area with dyed red talcum powder. The talcum powder turns red as the fuel wets it, making the wet area easier to see.

At the end of 30 minutes, each leak is classified into one of four classes of leaks: slow seep, seep, heavy seep, or running leak. The four classes of leaks are shown in figure 1-26. A slow seep is a leak in which the fuel wets an area around the

**D- RUNNING LEAK**

**AREA WHERE FUEL**

**APPEARS TO FLOW**

**OR RUN, FOLLOWING**

**CONTOUR OF SKIN**

**WHEN THIS AREA IS WIPED DRY.**

FIGURE 4-26. Fuel leak classification.

### Page 105

leak source not over % of an inch in diameter.

A seep is a leak that wets an area from % inches to l)".2 inches in ·diameter. A heavy seep is a fuel leak that wets an area around the leak source from 1¥2 inches to 3 inches in diameter. In none of these three leak classifications does the fuel run, flow, drip, or resemble any of these conditions at the end of the 30-minute time period.

The last classification, a running leak, is the most severe and the most dangerous. It may drip from the aircraft surface, it may run down vertical surfaces, or it may even run down your finger when you touch the wet area. The aircraft is un­ safe for flight and must be grounded for repair.

When possible, the fuel from the leaking tank should be removed after you mark the leak location.

If it is impossible to defuel the tank immediately, the aircraft should be isolated in an approved area.

Place appropriate warning signs around the air­ craft until qualified personnel can defuel the leak­ ing tank.

Grounding of the aircraft for slow seeps, seeps, and heavy seeps, is determined by the applicable aircraft handbook. This determination may de­ pend on the location of the fuel leak. For example, can the leakage progress to a potential fire source?

The number of fuel leaks in a given area is also a contributing factor. There is no rule of thumb for determining if the aircraft is to be grounded.

Running leaks ground the aircraft regardless of location.

You may only have to make appropriate entries on the aircraft forms and periodically observe the progress of the fuel leak if it is determined that the aircraft is airworthy and no repair is required.

When repair is required, you must find the cause of the fuel leak and make an effective repair.

Leak Repairs Repair of leaks m integral fuel tanks must be accomplished in accordance with the aircraft manufacturer's specifications. No attempt will be made in this handbook to discuss integral tank repairs further.

97 Fire Safety The first and most difficult step in the achieve­ ment of fire safety is to correct the misconceptions about the "safety" of turbine fuels. At the time these fuels were first introduced many people said, "fire problems in aircraft are over, turbine fuel is completely safe." This is obviously nonsense but it has been persistent nonsense.

FJight line personnel have agreed that aviation gasoline will burn, and therefore they have exer­ cised reasonable care and caution in handling it.

However, it has been difficult to convince them that under some circumstances turbine fuels are just as dangerous from the fire standpoint.

The characteristics of turbine fuel do vary from those of gasoline. Kerosene, for example, has a slow flame propagation and burning rate, which makes it less hazardous in the event of spill or a ground accident. However, it does ignite readily when vaporized or when misted, as when sprayed through a small leak in a service hose.

One disadvantage of the low volatility fuels is that they will not evaporate readily and completely if spilled on the ramp, so special treatment of the spill area is required. Small spills of kerosene should be removed with a commercial absorb­ ent cleaning agent. On large spills it is better to apply an approved emulsifier and then flush away the resulting mixture with large volumes of water.

This will prevent or appreciably lessen any oily residue.

Just as with gasoline, an electrostatic charge may be built up in pumping turbine fuel through a service hose. In fact, the amount of the charge is higher in kerosene because of the higher specific gravity and wider boiling range. Also, the amount of the charge increases with high linear rate of fuel flow, such as is required for servicing turbine powered aircraft.

In consequence, all of the fire safety precautions observed in the handling of gasoline must be fol­ lowed with equal care in the handling of turbine fuels. These precautions are well known and have been detailed by the National Fire Protection Association in its bulletin No. 407. It is recom­ mended that this bulletin be made required read­ ing for all personnel handling turbine fuel.

### Page 106

GENERAL The term H airer.aft plumbing" refers not only to the hose, tubing, fittings, and connectors used in the aircraft, hut also to the processes of forming and installing them.

Occasionally it may be necessary to repair or replace damaged aircraft plumbing lines. Very often the repair can be made simply by replacing the tubing. However, if replacements are not available, the needed parts may have to he fabri­ cated. Replacement tubing should be of the same size and material as the original line. All tubing is pressure tested prior to initial instal1ation, and is designed to withstand several times the normal operating pressure to which it will be subjected.

If a tube bursts or cracks, it is generally the result of excessive vibration, improper installation, or damage caused by collision with an object.

All tubing failures should be carefully studied and the cause of the failure determined.

PLUMBING LINES Aircraft plumbing lines usually are made of metal tubing and fittings or of flexible hose. Metal tubing is widely used in aircraft for fuel, oil, cool­ ant, oxygen, instrument, and hydraulic lines.

Flexible hose is generally used with moving parts or where the hose is subject to considerable vibra­ tion.

Generally, aluminum ailoy or corrosion-resistant steel tubing have replaced copper tubing. The high fatigue factor of copper tubing is the chief reason for its replacement. It becomes hard and brittle from vibration and finally breaks, however it may be restored to its soft annealed state by heating it red hot and quenching it in cold water.

Cooling in air will result in a degree of softness but not equal to that obtained with the cold water quench. This annealing process must be accom­ plished if copper tubing is removed for any reason.

Inspection of copper tubing for cracks, hardness, brittleness and general condition should be accom­ plished at regular intervals to preclude failure. The workability, resistance to corrosion, and lightweight of aluminum alloy are major factors in its adop­ tion for aircraft plumbing.

**99 CHAPTER 5**

FLUID LINES AND FITTINGS In some special high-pressure (3,000 p.s.i.)

hydraulic installations, corrosion-resistant steel tub­ ing, either annealed or 1/4.-hard, is used. Corrosion­ resistant steel tubing does not have to be annealed for flaring or form_ing; in fact, the flared section is somewhat strengthened by the cold working and strain hardening during the flaring process. Its higher tensile strength permits the use of tubing with thinner walls; consequently the final installa­ tion weight is not much greater than that of the thicker-wall aluminum alloy tubing.

IDENTIFICATION OF MATERIALS Before making repairs to any aircraft plumbing, it is important to make accurate identification of plumbing materials. Aluminum alloy or steel tub­ ing can be identified readily by sight where it is used as the basic plumbing material. However, it is difficult to determine whether a material is carbon steel or stainless steel, or whether it is 1100, 3003. 5052-0, or 2024-T aluminum alloy.

It may be necessary to test samples of the ma­ terial for hardness by filing or scratching with a scriber. The magnet test is the simplest method for distinguishing between the annealed austenitic and the ferritic stainless steels. The austenitic types are nonmagnetic unless heavily cold worked, whereas the straight chromium carbon and low alloy steels are strongly magnetic. Figure 5-1 gives the methods for identifying five common Material Carbon steel __ 18-8 ________ _ Pure nickel_ __ _ MoneL __ . ___ _ Nickel steel_ __ Magnet test Nitric acid test Strongly Slow chemical magnetic. action, brown.

Nonmagnetic. No action.

Strongly Slow action, magnetic. pale green.

Slightly Rapid action, magnetic. greenish blue.

Nonmagnetic. Rapid action, greenish blu~.

FIGURE 5-1. Identification of metallic materials.

### Page 107

metallic materials by using the magnet and concen­ trated nitric acid tests.

By comparing code markings of the replacement tubing with the original markings on the tubing being replaced, it is possible to identify definitely the material used in the original installation.

The alloy designation is stamped on the surface of large aluminum alloy tubin-g. On small alumi­ num alloy tubing, the designation may be stamped on the surface, but more often it is shown by a color code. Bands of the color co·de, not more than 4 inches in ,width, are painted at the two ends and approximately midway between the ends of some tubing. When the band consists of two colors, one-half the width is used for each color.

Painted color codes used to identify aluminum alloy tubing are:

Aluminum alloy number llOO 3003 2014 2024 5052 6053 6061 7075 Color of band White Green Gray Red Purple Black Blue and Yellow Brown and Yellow Aluminum alloy tubing, llOO (Y,,-hard) or 3003 (Y,,-hard), is used for general purpose lines of low or negligible fluid pressures, such as instrument lines and ventilating conduits. The 2024--T and 5052-0 aluminum alloy materials are used in gen­ eral purpose systems of low and medium pressures, such as hydraulic and pneumatic 1,000 to 1,500

p.s.i. systems and fuel and oil lines. Occasionally, these materials are used in high-pressure (3,000

p.s.i.) systems.

Tubing made from 2024-T and 5052-0 materials will withstand a fairly high pressure before burst­ ing. These materials are easily flared and are soft enough _ to be formed with handtools. They must be handled with care to prevent scratches, dents, and nicks.

Corrosion-resistant steel tubing, either annealed or 11,i-hard, is used extensively in high-pressure hydraulic systems for the operation of landing gear, flaps, brakes, and the like. External brake lines should always be made of corrosion-resistant steel to minimize damage from rocks thrown by the tires during takeoff and landing, and from careless ground handling. Although identification markings for steel tubing differ, each usually includes the manufacturer's name or trademark, the SAE num­ ber, and the physical condition of the metal.

Metal tubing is sized by outside diameter, which is measured fractionally in sixteenths of an inch.

Thus Number 6 tubing is o/,_6 (or % inch) and Number 8 tubing is o/,_6 ( or Y,, inch), etc.

In addition to other classification or means of identification, tubing is manufactured in various wall thicknesses. Thus, it is important when in­ stalling tubing to know not only the material and outside diameter, but also the thickness of the wall.

FLEXIBLE HOSE Flexible hose is used in aircraft plumbing to connect moving parts with stationary parts in locations subject to vibration or where a great amount of flexibility is needed. It can also serve as a connector in metal tubing systems.

Synthetics Synthetic materials most commonly used in the manufacture of flexible hose are: Buna-N, Neo­ prene, Butyl and Teflon ( trademark of DuPont Corp.). Buna-N is a synthetic rubber compound which has excellent resistance to petroleum pro­ ducts. Do not confuse with Buna-S. Dp not use for phosphate ester base hydraulic fluid (Skyrol ®).

Neoprene is a synthetic rubber compound which has an acetylene base. Its resistance to petroleum products is not aS good as ,Buna-N but has better abrasive resistance. Do not use for phosphate ester base hydraulic fluid (Skydrol ® ) . Butyl is a syn­ thetic rubber compound made from petroleum raw materials. It is an excellent material to use with phosphate ester based hydraulic fluid ( Skydrol ® ) .

Do not use with petroleum products. Teflon is the DuPont trade name for tetrafluoroethylene resin.

It has a broad operating temperature range ( -65° F. to +450° F.). It is compatible with nearly every substance or agent used. It offers little re­ sistance to flow; sticky viscous materials will not adhere to it. It has less volumetric expansion than rubber and the shelf and service life is practically limitless.

Rubber Hose Flexible rubber hose consists of a seamless syn - thetic rubber inner tube covered with layers of cotton braid and wire braid, and an outer layer of rubber-impregnated cotton braid. This type of hose is suitable for use in fu.el, oil, coolant, and hydraulic systems. The types of hose are normally classified by the amount of pressure they are de­ signed to withstand under normal operating con­ ditions.

1. Low pressure, any pressure below 250 p.s.i.

Fabric braid reinforcement.

### Page 108

Two cotton braids - impregnated --­ with synthetic compound Single wire braid ----.../ Synthetic inner tube -------' A. Flame- and aromatic-resistant hose White numerals, letters and stripe 7 (Views showing opposite sides of hose) B. Nonself-sealing, Aromatic and Heat-resistant hose \__ Red numerals and letters C. Flame-, Aromatic-, and Oil-resistant hose Yellow numerals, letters and stripe Red numerals, letters and stripe D. Nonself-sealing, Aromatic-resistant hose.

E. Self-sealing, Aromatic-resistant hose FtcURE 5-2. Hose identification markings.

### Page 109

2. Medium pressure, pressures up to 3,000

p.s.1.

One wire braid reinforcement.

Sm~ller sizes carry pressure up to 3,000

p.s.1.

Larger sizes carry pressure up to 1,500

p.s.i.

3. High pressure ( all sizes up to 3,000 p.s.i.

operating pressures) .

Identification markings consisting of lines, letters, and numbers are printed on the hose. (See figure

5-2.) These code markings show such informa.

tion as hose size, manufacturer, ,date of manufac.

ture, and pressure and temperature limits. Code markings assist in replacing a hose with one of the same specification or a ·recommended substitute.

Hose suitable for use with phosphate ester base hydraulic fluid will be marked "Skydrol R use".

In some instances several types of hose may be suitable for the same use. Therefore, in order to make the correct hose selection, always refer to the maintenance or parts manual for the particular airplane.

Teflon Hose Teflon hose is a flexible hose designed to meet the requirements of higher operating temperatures and pressures in present aircraft systems. It can generally be used in the same manner as rubber hose. Teflon hose is processed and extruded into tube shape to a desired size. It is covered with stainless steel wire, which is braided over the tube for strength and protection.

Teflon hose is unaffected by any known fuel, petroleum, or synthetic base oils, alcohol, coolants, or solvents commonly used in aircraft. Although it is highly resistant to vibration and fatigue, the principle advantage of this hose is its operating strength.

Size Designation The size of flexible hose is determined by its inside diameter. Sizes are in one-sixteenth-inch increments and are identical to corresponding sizes of rigid tubing, with which it can be used.

Identification of Fluid Lines Fluid lines in aircraft are often identified by markers made up of color codes, words, and geo­ metric symbols. These markers identify ea,ch line's function, content, and primary hazard, as well as the direction of fluid flow. Figure 5-3 illustrates the various color codes and symbols used to desig­ nate the type of system and its contents.

In most instances, fluid lines are marked with I-inch tape or decals, as shown in figure 5-4 (A).

**LUBRICATION 0 D**

WBRICATION D LUBRICATIO! r

WARNING SYMBOL 0 0 0 FIGURE 5-3. Identification of aircraft fluid lines.

On lines 4 inches in diameter ( or larger), lines in oily environment, hot lines, and on some cold lines, ste!el tags may be used in place of tape or decals, as shown in figure 5-4 (B). Paint is used on lines in engine compartments, where there is the possibility of tapes, decals, or tags being drawn into the engine induction system.

### Page 110

Red (A) 01------1e 8 FUEL e 8 0 Red FLAM (B) FIGURE 5-4. Fluid line identification using:

(A) tape and decals and (B) metal tags.

In addition to the above-mentioned markings, certain lines may be further identified as to spe­ cific function within a system; for example, DRAIN, VENT, PRESSURE, or RETURN.

Lines conveying fuel may he marked FLAM;

lines containing toxic materials are marked TOXIC in place of FLAM. Lines containing physically dangerous materials, such as oxygen, nitrogen, or freon, are marked PHDAN.

The aircraft and engine manufacturers are re­ sponsible for the original installation of identifi­ cation markers, but the aviation mechanic is re- AN sponsible for their replacement when it becomes necessary.

Generally, tapes and decals are placed on both ends of a line and at least once in each compart­ ment through which the line runs. In addition, identification markers are placed immediately ad­ jacent to each valve, regulator, filter, or other accessory within a line. Where paint or tags are used, location requirements are the same as for tapes and decals.

PLUMBING CONNECTORS Plumbing connectors, or fittings, attach one piece of tubing to _another or to system units.

There are four types: (1) Flared fitting, (2) flare• less fitting, (3) head and clamp, and (4) swaged.

The amount of pressure that the system carries is usually the deciding factor in selecting a con ..

nector. The beaded type of joint, which requires a head and a section of hose and hose clamps, is AN818 nut sleeve Tubing FIGURE 5-5. Flared-tube fitting.

T

AN FEATURE AC T 37° ANGLE 35° :,: YES RECESS NO :,: .... .... '-' COARSER THREADS FINER '-' z z "' "' ..., BLUE GRAY ..., ;,. ;,.

0 OR COLOR OR 0 0 0 "' BLACK YELLOW "' l_ J_ LONGER BODY SHORTER LENGTH

BLUE OR BLACK GRAY OR YELLOW FIGURE 5-6. AN and AC fitting differences.

### Page 111

used only in low- or medium-pressure systems, such as vacuum and coolant systems. The flared, flareless, and swaged types may be used as con­ nectors in all systems, regardless of the pressure.

Flared-Tube Fittings A flared-tube fitting consists of a sleeve and a nut, as shown in figure 5-5. The nut fits over the sleeve and, when tightened, draws the sleeve and tubing flare tightly against a male fitting to form a seal. Tubing used with this type of fitting must be flared before installation.

The male fitting has a cone-shaped surface with the same angle as the inside of the flare. The sleeve supports the tube so that vibration does not concentrate at the edge of the flare, and distributes the shearing action over a wider area for added strength. Tube flaring and the instal­ lation of flared-tube fittings are discussed in detail later in this chapter.

The AC (Air Corps) flared-tube fittings have been replaced by the AN (Army/Navy) Standard and MS (Military Standard) fittings. However, since AC fittings are still in use in some of the older aircraft, it is important to be able to identify them. The AN fitting has a shoulder between the end of the threads and the flare cone. (See figure

5-6.) The AC fitting does not have this shoulder.

Other differences between the AC and AN :fittings include the sleeve design, the AC sleeve being noticeably longer than the AN sleeve of the same size. Although certain flared-tube fittings are interchangeable, the pitch of the threads is different in most cases. Figure 5-7 shows the AN and AC811 fittings that can be safely inter­ changed. Combinations of end connections, nuts, Tube Sizes OD All Sizes 1 All Sizes 2 All Sizes All Sizes All Sizes All Sizes All Sizes All Sizes Ys,:J.{5,>4,§{5,1%,2 78, }{5, >i, §{5, 1%, 2 Ys, :J.{5, >4, }fo, l %, 2 Ys, ~6, >4, §{5, 1%, 2 Type End Type Connection Nut Type (Male (Female Sleeve Thread) Thread)

AN' AN' AN' 81!2 81!2 81I2 AN AN AN AN AN 811 AN AN 811 8ll 811 811 811 811 AN 8ll 811 AN AN 811 AN AN 811 AN AN 811 811 AN 811 811 1 This is the normal assembly of AN fittings.

2 This is the normal assembly of AC811 fittings.

Type Tube Flare AN1 81I2 811 811 AN AN AN 811 811 AN AN AN FIGURE 5-7a. Interchangeability of AN and AC811 fittings.

1-•·1~~;~~ lµw 1 \!A~I ~f . ·_ LpTYP1CAL CONNECTION ..!. BT LI HT CT JT RT ·@ A ET FIGURE 5-7 b. AC811 solderless fittings.

### Page 112

Material:

Aluminum alloy Steel. .............. ---········-----·-·······-··- Brass ......... -----....... -·--........ -· ..... .

Aluminum bronze .............................. .

Size:

-- AN744 to AN932 -- ...................... (code D) ...................... ( code, absence of Jetter) ............ (code B) ·············--·-··-··· ( code Z-for AN819 sleeve) The dash number following the AN number indicates the size of 1:he tubing ( or hose) for which the fitting is made, in I6ths of an inch. This size measures the 0. D. of tubing and the I. D. of hose.

Fittings having pipe threads are coded by a dash number, indicating the pipe size in 8ths of an inch.

The material code letter, as noted above, fol lows the dash number.

BOLT AN774 TEE AN779 ADAPTOR AN807 ~om NUT AN817 NUT AN818 ---r------:-i

I '---,

• I ,-·, \ I : ) I I 1 ~.

--! :___i~,:

' '' --, ______ 1-· ELBOW AN777 ~~,-----,

•' r~-----r r r r----Ht- ' I I, TEE AN804

• ,------.

_/1.

\ : ]" -- ----.

-~+-----/ : : j I ~ -~, r-_, _____ ,;.,, ELBOW AN8!1 , _____ --'--({ ____ ,'-' , . .._ ___ ..,~, ELBOW ANHi ELBOW ANau FIGURE 5-8. AN plumbing fittings.

105 \ ' : i \-- -- ---"-rJ , _______ ., ' ' ·c .. ~:.:i

**TEE ANIH**

### Page 113

' ' \....,1 ___ .1._.,., '-i - - . -,- , ';····· TEE AN8116 UNION AN832

• ___ ;_ /'' ..

>' ELBOW AN837 .. ~-· -1 HOSE NIPPLE AN841 ELBOW AN838 * CROSS ,'f: - -: )- :'-"-· .. -H , _____ _,__u- AN8U ,---- -,~ -, 1 ; -- ·-, -,,--,- , ___ ::,_:--~-- -- :,,• TEE AN834 AN840 HOSE NIPPLE HOSE ELBOW AN8411 HOSE ELBOW AN845 ELBOW AN846 CONNECTOR AN849 * Inactive for new design.

~ * AN867 ~ *ANB71 AN843

**HOSE ELBOW AN844 ELBOW AN848**

BUSHING AN893 BUSHING AN894 FIGURE 5-8. AN plumbing fittings.~Continued 106

### Page 114

COUPLING AM910 NIPPLE AN911 BUSHING PLUG AM913 AN912 ELBOW AN914 ELBOW AN915 ELBOW AN916 TEE AH917 ' :\:~, ~ . -··:;-),- - ' : : ,' ; : : ,;

J : I_. : -< :- .. -- . '.'"·

- ',J _ -- .. : - - - ,l, REDUCER AM919 CROSS AN918 NUT AM924 TEE AN9t6 ELBOWAN9!7 CROSS AN9!s ~ ~ ELBOW AN928 PLUG AN93!

CAPAM9ff FIGURE 5-8. AN plumbing fittings.-Continued sleeves, and tube flares are allowed to make up a complete fitting assembly. The use of dissimiJar metals should be avoided since their contact will cause corrosion.

When combining AC and AN end connections, nuts, sleeves, or tube flares, if the nut will not ~ove more than two threads by hand, stop and investigate for possible trouble.

The AN standard fitting is the most commonly used flared-tubing assembly for attaching the tubing to the various fittings required in aircraft plumbing systems. The AN standard fittings in­ clude the AN818 nut and AN819 sleeve. (See figure 5-8.) The AN819 sleeve is used with the AN818 coupling nut. All these fittings have straight threads, but they have different pitch for the various types.

Flared-tube fittings are made of aluminum alloy, steel, or copper base alloys. For identifi­ cation purposes, all AN steel fittings are colored black, and all AN aluminum alloy fittings are colored blue. The AN 819 aluminum bronze sleeves are cadmium plated and are not colored.

The size of these fittings is given in dash numbers, which equal the nominal tube outside diameter

(0.D.) in sixteenths of an inch.

Threaded flared-tube fittings have two types of ends, referred to as male and female. The male end of a fitting is externally threaded~ where­ as the female end of a fitting is internally threaded.

### Page 115

Cone angle Sleeve pilot Tube shoulder Sleeve cutting edge Sleeve Bevel Tube Nut .FIGURE 5-9. Flareless-tube fitting.

Flareless-tube Fittings The MS (Military Standard) flareless-tube fit­ tings are finding wide application in aircraft plumbing systems. Using this type fitting elimi­ nates all tube flaring, yet provides a safe, strong, dependable tube connection. The fitting consists of three parts: a body, a sleeve, and a nut. The body has a counterbored shoulder, against which the end of the tube rests. (See figure 5-9.) The angle of the counterbore causes the cutting edge of the s1eeve to cut into the outside of the tube when the two are joined. Installation of flareless­ tube fittings is discussed later in this chapter.

Quick-disconnect Couplings Quick-disconnect coup]ings of the self-sea1ing type are used. at various points in many fluid systems. The couplings are installed at locations where frequent uncoupling of the lines is required for inspection and maintenance.

Quick-disconnect couplings provide a means of quickly disconnecting a line without loss of fluid or entrance of air into the system. Each coupling assembly consists of two halves, held together by a union nut. Each half contains a valve that is hel_d open when the coupling is connected, allowing flmd to flow through the coupling in either di­ rection. When the coupling is disconnected, a spring in each half closes the valve, preventing the loss of fluid and entrance of air.

The union nut has a quick-lead thread which permits connecting or disconnecting the coupling by turning the nut. The amount the nut must be turned varies with different style couplings. One style requires a quarter turn of the union nut to lock or unloek the coupling while another style requires a full turn.

Some couplings require wrench tightening;

others are connected and disconnected by hand.

The design of some couplings is such that they must be safetied with safety wire. Others do not require lock wiring, the positive locking being assured by the teeth on the loeking spring, which engage ratchet teeth on the union nut when the coupling is fully engaged. The lock spring auto­ matically disengages when the union nut is un­ screwed. Because of individual differences all ~uick di.sconnects should be installed accordi~g to mstruct1ons in the aircraft maintenance manual.

Flexible Connectors Flexible connectors may be equipped with either swaged fittings or detachable fittings, or they may be used with beads and hose clamps. Those equipped with swaged :fittings are ordered by correct length from the manufacturer and ordi~ narily cannot be assembled by the mechanic.

They are swaged and tested at the factory and are equipped with standard fittings.

The fittings on detachable connectors can be detached and reused if they are not damaged;

otherwise new fittings must be used.

The bead and hose clamp connector is often used for connecting oil, coolant, and low-pressure fuel system tubing. The bead, a slightly raised ridge around the tubing or the fitting, gives a good gripping edge that aids in holding the clamp and hose in place. The bead may appear near the end of the metal tubing or on one end of a fitting.

TUBE FORMING PROCESSES Damaged tubing and fluid lines should be re­ placed with new parts whenever possible. Some­ times replacement is impractical and repair is necessary. Scratches, abrasions, and minor cor~ rosion on the outside of fluid lines may be con­ sidered negligible and can be smoothed out with a burnishing tool or aluminum wool. Limitations on the amount of damage that can be repaired in this manner are discussed later in this chapter under ''Repair of Metal Tube Lines." If a fluid line assembly is to be replaced, the fittings can often be salvaged; then the repair will involve only tube forming and replacement.

108 Tube forming consists of four processes: (1) Cutting. (2) bending, (3) flaring, and (4) beading.

If the tubing is small and of soft material, the assembly can be formed by hand bending during installation. If the tubing is ;i-inch diameter, or larger. hand bending without the aid of tools is impractical.

Tube Cutting When cutting tubing, it is important to produce a square end, free of burrs. Tubing may be cut with a tube cutter or a hacksaw. The cutter can be used with any soft metal tubing, such as copper, aluminum, or aluminum alloy. Correct use of the tube cutter is shown in figure 5-10.

### Page 116

·.,4 ,' ,~ -- ·-, I 1,' Clean cut FIGURE 5-10. Tube cutt;ng.

A new piece of tubing should be cut approxi­ mately 10 percent longer than the tube to be re­ placed to provide for minor vari{ltions in bending.

Place the fobing in the cutting tool, with the cutting wheel at the· point where the cut is to be made.

Rotate the cutter around the tubing, applying a light pressure to the cutting wheel by intermit­ tently twisting the thumbscrew, Too much pressure on the cutting wheel at one time could deform the tubing or cause excessive burring. After cutting the tubing, carefully remove any burrs from inside and outside the tube. Use a knife or the burring edge attached to the tube cutter.

When performing the deburring operation use extreme care that the wall thickness of the end of the tubing is not reduced or fractured. Very slight damage of this type can lead to fractured flares or defective flares which will not seal properly. A fine tooth file can be used to file th~ end square and smooth.

If a tube cutter is not available, or if tubing of hard material is to be cut, use a fine-tooth hacksaw, preferably one having 32 teeth per inch. The use of a saw will decrease the amount of work harden· ing of the tubing during the cutting operation.

After sawing, file the end of the tube square and smooth, removing all burrs.

An easy way to hold small-diameter tubing, when cutting it, is to place the tube in a combination flaring tool and clamp the tool in ~ vise. Make the cut about one-half inch from the flaring tool. This procedure keeps sawing vibrations to a minimum and prevents damage to the tubing if it is acci­ dentally hit with the hacksaw fra!Jle or file handle while cutting. Be sure all filings and cuttings are removed from the tube.

Tube Bending The objective in tube bending is to obtain a smooth bend ~ithout flattening the tube. Tubing 109 under one-fourth inch in diameter usually can be bent without the use of a bending tool. For larger sizes, a hand tube bender similar to that shown in figure 5-11 is usually used.

To bend tubing with the hand tube bender, insert the tubing by raising the slide bar handle as far as it will go. Adjust the handle so that the full length of the groove in the slide bar is in contact with the tubing. The zero mark on the radius block and the mark on the slide bar must align. Make the bend by rotating the handle until the desired angle of bend is obtained, as indicated on the radius block.

Bend the tubing carefully to avoid excessive flattening, kinking, or wrink]ing. A small amount of flattening in bends is acceptable, but the small diameter of the flattened portion must not he less than 75 percent of the original outside di­ ameter. Tubing with flattened, wrinkled, or ir­ regular bends should not be installed. Wrinkled bends usually result from trying to bend thin-wall tubing without using a tube bender. Examples of correct and incorrect tubing bends are shown in figure 5-12.

Tube bending machines for all types of tubing are generally used in repair stations and large maintenance shops. w·ith such equipment, proper bends can be made on large diameter tubing and on tubing made from hard material. The pro­ duction tube bender is an example of this type of machine.

The ordinary production tube bender wm ac­ commodate tubing ranging from Yz-inch to lYz­ inch outside diameter. Benders for larger sizes are available, and the principle of their operation is similar to that of the hand tube bender. The radius blocks are so constructed that the radius of bend will vary with the tubing diameter. The radius of bend is usually stamped on the block.

When hand or production tube benders are not available or are not suitable for a particular bending operation, a filler of metallic composition or of dry sand may be used to faciJitate bending.

When using this method, cut the tube slightly longer than is required. The extra length is for inserting a plug (which may be wooden) in .each end.

After plugging one end, fill and pack the tube with fine, dry sand and plug tightly. Both plugs must be tight so they will not he forced out when the bend is made. The tube can also be closed by flattening the ends or by soldering metal disks in them. After the ends are closed, bend the tubing

### Page 117

- ·:,, Note: This bender can be slipped over partially conne<-1:ed tubes M it is applied at dire<.1 point of hend.

Left hand :1. Drop dip over tube ...... ___ _ -- . !

Left hand To remove hent tube. lift slide bar handle to original po.~ition and raise dip Left hand Xote: Zero mark ('Oincides with mark on bloc-k )' ' / ;,--~~~~----!'Ji

4. With right hand (·ontinue to bend tube to desired anp;le by pressinii::

handle as shown below.

/ --- Right hand FIGURE 5-11. Tube bending.

over a forming hlock shaped to the specified radius.

In a modified version of the filler method, a fusible alloy is used instead of sand. In this method, the tube is filled under hot water with a fusible alloy that melts at 160° F. The alloy-filled tubing is then removed from the water, allowed to cool,.and bent slowly by hand around a forming llO block or with a tube bender. After the bend is made, the alloy is again melted under hot water and removed from the tubing.

When using either filler method, make certain that all particles of the filler are removed so that none will he carried into the system in which the tubing is installed. Store the fusible alloy filler where it will he free from dust or dirt. It can he

### Page 118

I ' ' ' , ' GOOD Perfect bend , .,, ..:-·~--- -, r' ) ' Wrinkled bend ' ' , ,---- Flattened bend ,----... .,,-, ' -----,' ,,,,, I I ' I I i Kinked bend FIGURE S~l2. Correct and incorrect tubing bends.

re-melted and re-used as often as desired. Never heat this filler in any other than the prescribed method, as the alloy will stick to the inside of the tubing, making them both unusable.

Tube Flaring Two kinds of flares are generaIIy used in aircraft plumbing systems, the single flare and the double flare. Flares are frequently subiected to extremely high pressures; therefore, the flare on the tubing must be properly shaped or the connection will leak or fail.

A flare made too small produces a weak joint, which may leak or pull apart; if made too large it interferes with the proper engagement of the screw thread on the fitting and will cause leakage. A crooked flare is the result of the tubing not being cut squarely. If a flare is not made properly, flaws cannot be corrected by applying additional torque when tightening the fitting. The flare and tubing must be free from cracks, dents, nicks, scratches, or any <'ther defects.

The Haring tool used for aircraft tubing , has male and female dies ground to produce a flare of 35° to 37°. Under no circumstances is it per­ missible to use an automotive type flaring tool which produces a flare of 45°.

Single Flare A hand flaring tool similar to that shown in figure 5~ 13 is used for flaring tubing. The tool 111 FIGURE 5-13. Hand flaring tool (single flare).

consists of a flaring block or grip die, a yoke, and a flaring pin. The flaring block is a hinged double bar with holes corresponding to various sizes of tubing. These holes are countersunk on one end to form the outside support against which the flare is formed. The yoke is used to center the flaring pin over the end of the tube to be flared.

To prepare a tube for flaring, cut the tube squarely and remove all burrs. Slip the fitting nut and sleeve on the tube and place the tube in the proper size hole in the flaring tool. Center the plunger or flaring pin over the end of the tube.

Then project the end of the tubing slightly from the top of the flaring tool, about the thickness of a dime, and tighten the clamp bar securely to prevent slippage.

Make the flare by striking the plunger several light blows with a lightweight hammer or mallet.

Turn the plunger a half turn after each blow and be sure it seats properly before removing the tube from the flaring tool. Check the flare hy sliding the sleeve into position over the flare.

The outside diameter oJ the flare should extend approximately onc-s_ixteenth inch beyond the end of the sieeve, but /should not he larger than the major outside diameter of the sleeve.

Double Flare A double flare should be used on 5052-0 and 6061-T aluminum alloy tubing for all sizes from Ys- to %-inch outside diameter. This is necessary to prevent cutting off the flare and failure of the tube assembly under operating pressures. Doub]e flaring is not necessary on steel tubing. See figure 5-14 for an illustration of single- and double­ flared tubing. The double flare is smoother and more concentric than the single flare and, there­ fore, seals better. It is also more resistant to the shearing effect of torque.

### Page 119

A. Single-flared end B. Double-flared end FIGURE 5-14. Cutaway view of single- and double-flared tube ends.

To make the double flare, separate the clamp blocks of the double-flaring tool and insert and clamp the tubing with the burred end flush with the top of the clamp. Insert the starting pin into the flaring pin guide and strike the pin sharply with a hammer until the shoulder of the pin stops against the clamp blocks. Remove the starting pin and insert the :finishing pin; hammer it until its shoulder rests on the clamp block.

Beading Tubing may be beaded with a hand-beading tool, with machine-beading rolls, or with grip dies.

The method to be used depends on the diameter and wall thickness of the tube and the material from which it was made.

The hand-beading tool is used with tubing having X- to 1-inch outside diameter. The bead is formed by using the header frame with the proper rollers attached. The inside and outside of the tube is lubricated with light oil to reduce the friction between the rollers during heading.

The sizes, marked in sixteenths of an inch on the rollers, are for the outside diameter of the tubing that can be beaded with the rollers.

Separate rollers are required for the inside of each tubing size, and care must be taken to use the correct parts when beading. The hand-beading tool works somewhat like the tube cutter in that the roller is screwed down intermittently while rotating the beading tool around the tubing. In addition, a small vise ( tube holder) is furnished with the kit.

Other methods and types of beading tools and machines are available, but the hand-beading tool is used most often As a rule, beading machines are limited to us,. with large-diameter tubing, over 119{s inch, unh ss special rollers are supplied.

The grip-die method of beading is confined to small tubing.

Flareless-Tube Assemblies Although the use of flareless-tube fittings elimi­ nates all tube flaring, another operation, referred to as presetting, is necessary prior to installation of a new flareless-tube assembly. Figure 5-15 (steps 1, 2, and 3) illustrates the presetting oper­ ation, which is performed as follows:

(a.) Cut the tube to the correct length, with the ends perfectly square. Deburr the inside and outside of the tube. Slip the nut, then the sleeve, over the tube (step 1).

(b.) Lubricate the threads of the fitting and nut with hydraulic fluid. Place the fitting in a vise (step 2), and hold the tubing firmly and squarely on the seat in the fitting. (Tube must bottom firmly in the fitting.) Tighten the nut until the cutting edge of the sleeve grips the tube. Thi_s point is determined by slowly turning the tube back and forth while tightening the nut. When the tube no longer turns, the nut is ready for final tightening.

(c.) Final tightening depends upon the tub­ ing. For aluminum alloy tubing up tO and in~ eluding Yz-inch outside diaffieter, tighten the nut from one to one and one-sixth turns.

For steel tubing and aluminum alloy tubing over Yz·inch outside diameter, tighten from one and one-sixth to one and one-half turns.

After presetting the sleeve, disconnect the tub­ ing from the fitting and check the following points

### Page 120

Step 1 Step 2 3/32 to 1/8 inch a Sleeve cutting edge Slight deformation permissible 1------ .005 inch maximum - aluminum alloy tubing ' ...... ___ .015 inch maximum - corrosion resistant steel tubing FIGURE 5-15. Presetting flareless-tuhe assembly.

(illustrated in step 3):

(a.) The tube should extend %, to Ys inch beyond the sleeve pilot; otherwise hlowoff may occur.

(h.) The sleeve pilot should contact the tube or have a maximum clearance of 0.005 inch 113 for aluminum alloy tubing or 0.015 inch for steel tubing.

(c.) A slight collapse of the tube at the sleeve cut is permissible. No movement of the sleeve pilot, except rotation, is permissible.

REPAIR OF MET AL TUBE LINES Scratches or nicks no deeper than 10 percent of the wall thickness in aluminum alloy tubing may he repaired, if they are not in the heel of a bend. Replace lines with severe die marks, seams, or splits in the tube. Any crack or de­ formity in a flare is also unacceptable and is cause for rejection. A dent of less than 20 percent of the tube diameter is not objectionable, unless it is in the heel of a bend. Dents can be removed by drawing a bullet of proper size through the tube by means of a length of cable.

A severely damaged line should he replaced.

However, the line can he repaired by cutting out the damaged section and inserting a tube section of the same size and material. Flare both ends of the undamaged and replacement tube sections and make the connection by using standard unions, sleeves, and tube nuts. If the damaged portion is short enough, omit the insert tube and repair by using one union and two sets of con­ necting :fittings.

When repairing a damaged line, he very careful to remove all chips and burrs. Any open line that is to he left unattended for some time should he sealed, using metal, wood, rubber, or plastic plugs or caps.

When repairing a low-pressure line using a flexible fluid connection assembly, position the hose clamps carefully in order to prevent overhang of the clamp hands or chafing of the tightening screws on adjacent parts. If chafing can occur, the hose clamps should he repositioned on the hose. Figure 5-16 illustrates the design of a flexible fluid connection assembly and gives the maximum allowable angular and dimensional offset.

Layout of Lines Remove the damaged or worn assembly, taking care not_ to further damage or distort it, and use it as a forming template for the new part. If the old length of tubing cannot be used as a pattern, make a wire template, bending the pattern by hand as required for the new assembly. Then bend the tubing to match the wire pattern.

Never select a path that does not require bends

### Page 121

.. .

Min. l/4" -j -:"b " I " ' -/J-' Fitting 1/ 16'' Max offset \ Hose I Tubing 3° Max.

~deviation ~-23 Minimum gap 'G" shall be 1/2" or Tube 00/4, whichever is greater.

Maximum gap "G" is not limited except on suction lines using other than self-sealing hose. On such suction lines, maximum G ~hall be 1-1/2 inch or one tube diameter, whichever is greater.

FIGURE 5-16. Flexible fluid connection assembly.

in the tubing. A tube cannot be cut or flared accurately enough so that it can be installed without bending and still be free from mechanical strain. Bends are also necessary to permit the tubing to expand or contract under temperature changes and to absorb vibration. If the tube is small (under one-fourth inch) and can be hand formed, casual bends may be made to allow for this. If the tube must be machine formed, definite bends must be made to avoid a straight assembly.

Start all bends a reasonable distance from the fittings, because the sleeves and nuts must he slipped back during the fabrication of flares and during inspections. In all cases the new tube as­ sembly should be so formed prior to installation that it will not be necessary to pull or deflect the assembly into alignment by means of the coupling nuts.

**FABRICATION AND REPLACEMENT OF**

FLEXIBLE HOSE Hose and hose assemblies should be checked for deterioration at each inspection period. Leakage, separation of the cover or braid from the inner tube, cracks, hardening, lack of flexibility, and I Socket Nipple l FIGURE 5-17. Sleeve-type fittings.

excessive ttcold flow" are apparent signs of de­ terioration and reaSon for replacement. The term ttcold flow" describes the deep, permanent im­ pressions in the hose produced by the pressure of hose clamps or supports.

When failure occurs in a flexible hose equipped with swaged end fittings, the entire assembly must be replaced. Obtain a new hose assembly of the correct size and length, complete with factory­ installed end fittings.

When failure occurs in hose equipped with reusable end fittings, a replacement line can he fabricated with the use of such tooling as may be necessary to comply with the assembly instruc­ tions of the manufacturer.

Assembly of Sleeve-Type Fittings 114 Sleeve-type end fittings for flexible hose are detachable and may be reused if determined to be serviceable. The inside diameter of the fitting is the same as the inside diameter of the hose to which it is attached. Common sleeve-type fittings are shown in figure 5-17.

To make a hose assembly, select the proper size hose and end fittings. Cut the hose to the correct length using a fine-tooth hacksaw. Place the socket in a vise. Screw the hose into the socket counterclockwise until the hose bottoms on the shoulder of the socket (figure 5-18); then back off one-quarter turn. Lubricate in:side of hose and nipple threads liberally. Mark the hose position

### Page 122

A C D E FIGURE 5-18. Assembly of MS fitting to flexible hose.

around the hose at the rear of the socket using a grease pencil or painted line. Insert the nipple into the nut and tighten the nipple and nut on the assembly tool. If an assembly tool is not available, a mating AN815 adapter may he used.

Using a wrench on the assembly tool, screw the nipple into the socket and hose. A %2· to ){,;-inch clearance between the nut and sleeve is required so that the nut will swivel freely when the as­ sembly tool is removed. After assembly, always make sure a11 foreign matter is removed from inside the hose by blowing out with compressed air.

Proof-test After Assembly All flexible hose must he proof-tested after as­ sembly by plugging or capping one end of the hose and applying pressure to the inside of the hose assembly. The proof-test medium may he a liquid or a gas. For example, hydraulic, fuel, and oil lines are generally tested using hydraulic oil or water, whereas air or instrument lines are tested with dry, oil-free air or nitrogen. When testing with .a liquid, all trapped air is hied from the assembly prior to tightening the cap or plug.

Hose tests, using a gas~ are conducted underwater.

In all cases follow the hose manufacturer's in­ structions for proof-test pressure and fluid to be used when testing a specific hose assembly.

Place the hose assembly in a horizontal position and observe for leakage while maintaining the test pressure. Proof-test pressures should be main­ tained for at least 30 seconds.

Installation of Flexible Hose Assemblies Flexible hose must not be twisted on instal­ lation, since this reduces the life of the hose con­ siderably and may also loosen the fittings. Twist­ ing of the hose can be determined from the identifi­ cation stripe running along its length. This stripe should not spiral around the hose.

Flexible hose should he protected from chafing by wrapping it with tape, but only where neces­ sary.

The minimum bend radius for flexible hose varies according to size and construction of the hose and the pressure under which the hose is to operate. Bends that are too sharp will reduce the bursting pressure of flexible hose considerably below its rated value (figure 5-19).

Flexible hose should he installed so that it will be subject to a minimum of :flexing during oper­ ation. Although hose must he supported at least every 24 inches, closer supports are desirable. A flexible hose must never be stretched tightly be­ tween two fittings. From 5 percent to 8 percent of its total length must he allowed for freedom of movement under pressure. When under pressure, flexible hose contracts in length and expands in diameter.

Protect all flexible hose from excessive temper­ atures, either by locating the lines so they wil1 not be affected or by installing shrouds around them.

INSTALLATION OF RIGID TUBING Before installing a line assembly in an aircraft, inspect the line carefuUy. Remove dents and scratches, and be sure all nuts and sleeves are snugly mated and securely fitted by proper flaring of the tubing. The line assembly should he clean and free of all foreign matter.

Connection and Torque Never apply compound to the faces of the fitting or the flare, for it will destroy the metal-to-metal contact between the fitting and flare, a contact 115

### Page 123

PLANNING HOSE LINE INSTALLATIONS WRONG -3 I RIGHT 1 ... provide slack or bend in the hose line to provide for changes in length that will occur when pressure is applied.

WRONG RIGHT 3 ... relieve sharp bends, avoid strain or hose collapse and make cleaner installations by using Aeroquip elbows or other adapter fittings. Provide as large a bend radius as possible. Never use less than the recommended minimum bend radius specified for the hose.

2 ... observe linear stripe. The hose must not be twisted. High pressures applied to a twisted hose may cause failure or loosen the nut.

,U, .. -, ' ' ~1----r ' I ' I

r).(, ' ' ' ' ·----~ ' ' I I 4 ... provide additional bend radius when lines are subject to flexing and remember that the metal end fittings are not flexible. Place line support clamps so as not to restrict hose flexing.

FIGURE 5-19. Flexible hose installation.

1 ~ ~:.::: ·:.:" :.::::;e Incorrect - Will damage flare y _J or threads, or cause sleeve to "'f!!!:7- crack under vibration if tight­ened Ioconect - May pull off or distort flare if tightened Correctly fitted and tightened .025 clearance between :':::'.--cf--,- Flare and shoulder before tightening FIGURE 5-20. Correct and incorrect methods of tightening flared fittings.

116 which is necessary to produce the seal. Be sure that the line assembly is properly aligned before tightening the fittings. Do not pull the installation into place with torque on the nut. Correct and incorrect methods of installing flared-tube assem­ blies are illustrated in figure 5-20. Proper torque values are given in figure 5-21. It must be re­ membered that these torque values are for flared­ type fittings only. Always tighten fittings to the correct torque value when installing a tube assem­ bly. Overtightening a fitting may badly damage or completely cut off the tube flare, or it may ruin the sleeve or fitting nut. Failure to tighten suf­ ficiently also can be serious, as this condition may allow the line to blow out of the assembly or to leak under system pressure.

The use of torque wrenches and the prescribed torque values prevents overtightening or under­ tightening. If a tube fitting assembly is tightened properly, it can be removed and retightened many times before re-flaring is necessary.

### Page 124

Aluminum Alloy Tubing, Bolt, Steel Tubing, Bolt Fitting or Nut Fitting or Nut Tubing Fittin[! Bolt Torque Torque

0.0. or Nut Size :nch-lhs. inch-lbs.

J/8 -2 20-30 3/16 -.1 30-40 90- 100 !/4 -4 40-65 l."35- JS() 5/16 -5 60-85 IA0-200 3/8 -6 75-125 270- 300 !/2 -S 150- 250 450- 500 518 -"IO 200- 350 650- 700 3/4 -J:2 300- 500 900- 1000 1/8 -14 500- 600 1000 - I 100 -16 500-700 1200- 1400 1-1/4 -20 600- 900 1200- 1400 1-1/2 -24 600--· 900 1500- 1800 1-3/4 -28 850 -- 1050 2 -3:2 950-1150 Hose End Fittings and Hose Assemblies MS28740 or Equivalent End Fitting Minimum M"aximum 70 120 100 250 21() 420 3()() 480 500 850 700 1150 Minimum bend radii ( inches) Alum.

alloy ll00-Hl4 5052-0 Steel 3/8 7/16 21/32 9/16 7/8 3/4 l 1/8 15/16 1 5/16 1 1/4 I 3/4 ! 1/2 1 3/16 l 3/4 2 5/8 3 3 l/2 3 3/4 4 3/8 5 5 1/4 1 6 1/8 8 7 FrcvRE 5-21. Flared fitting data.

Flareless Tube Installation Tighten the nut by hand until an increase in resistance to turning is encountered. Should it be impossible to run the nut down with the fingers, use a wrench, but be alert for the first signs of bottoming. It is important that the final tightening commence at the point where the nut just begins to bottom.

With a wrench, turn the nut VE,, turn ( one flat on a hex nut). Use a wrench on the connector to prevent it from turnin·g while tightening the nut.

After the tube assembly is installed, the system should be pressure tested. Should a connection leak, it is permissible to tighten the nut an addi­ tional V,; turn ( making a total of Ya turn). If, after tightening the nut a total of Vs turn, leakage still exists, the assembly should be removed and the components of the assembly inspected for scores, cracks, presence of foreign material, or damage from overtightening.

NOTE: Overtightening a flareless-tube nut drives the cutting edge of the sleeve deeply into the tube, causing the tube to be weakened to the point where normal in-flight vibration could cause the tube to shear. After inspection (if no discrepancies are found), reassemble the connections and repeat' the pressure test procedures.

CAUTION: Do not in any case tighten the nut beyond VJ turn (two flats on the hex nut); this is the maximum the fitting may be tightened without the possibility of permanently damaging the sleeve and nut.

117 Common faults are:

1. Flare distorted into nut threads.

2. Sleeve cracked.

3. Flare cracked or split.

4. Flare out of round.

5. Inside of flare rough or scratched.

6. Fitting cone rough or scratched.

7. Threads of nut or union dirty, damaged or broken.

Some manufacturers service instructions will spec­ ify wrench torque values for flareless tubing in­ stallations ( e.g., see figure 5-22).

PLUMBING ASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS Make certain that the material in the fittings used is similar to that of the tubing; for example, use steel fittings with steel tubing and aluminum alloy fittings with aluminum alloy tubing. Brass fitti.Pgs plated with cadmium may be used with

p.luminum alloy tubing.

For corrosion prevention, altiminum alloy lines ~nd fittings are usually anodized. Steel lines and fittings, if not stainless steel, are plated to prevent rusting or corroding. Brass and steel fittings are usµally cadmium plated, although some may come plated with nickel, chromium, or tin.

To ensure proper sealing of hose connections and to prevent breaking hose clamps or damaging the hose, follow the hose clamp tightening instructions carefully. When available, use the hose damp torque-limiting wrench. These wrenches are avail­ able in calibrations of 15 and 25 inch-pounds. In the absence of torque-limiting wrenches, the finger­ tight-plus-turns method should be followed. Be-

### Page 125

WRENCH TORQUE FOR 304 1/8 H STEEL TUBES Tube Outside Diameter Wall Thickness Wrench Torque Inch-Pounds l l 3/16 3/16 1/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4

0.016

0.020

0.016

0.020

0.020

0.020

0.028

0.020

0.028

0.035

0.020

0.035

0.042

0.028

0.049

0.020

0.065 90 -110 90- 110 110-140 110-140 100- 120 170- 230 200- 250 300 - 400 400-500 500 - 600 300- 400 600- 700 700- 850 650 - 800 800- 960 800 - 950 1(10-1750 WRENCH TORQUE FOR 304-lA or 3471A STEEL T TBES 3/8 1/2 1/2

0.042

0.028

0.049

0.035 145- 175 300 - 400 500 - 600 750 - 900 WRE1'CH TORQUE FOR 6061-T6 OR T4 TUBES 1/4 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 .1/4 114

0.035

0.035

0.035

0.049

0.03.5

0.049

0.035

0.035

0.035 110 - 140 145- 175 270- 330 320 -380 .360- 440 425 -- 525 380- 470 750- 900 900 - 1100 FIGURE 5-22. Torque values for flareless fittings.

Hose damp tightening, finger-tight-phi\ tllrns method Initial installation only S\•lf sealing hosc­ ,ipprmdmat\'ly 15 inch-pounds All oth{'r aircraft hos(' \\'orm screw type damp 10 thn•ads per inch Fin.~(·r-ti,ght-ph1s :2 <'omplde tllrns Clamp,-rn<lial and oth(·r type-:28 thrt'ads per in<:h Finger-tight-plu~ :2-1/:2 compkt1.., tnms Fing(·r-tight appro,;imatt•ly :25 Plu~ I% <:nm11lde Plus :2 t·omplde turns inch-pounds turns lktightening of Hose Clamps If Cbmps do not s;eal at ;,pecified tightening, examine hose connection~ nnd replan• p,uts a., Til'Cessary Th<' ahove is for initial installation and should not be used for loose clamps For re-tightening loost• hos{' damp~ in service ptOC('NI

a., follow~:

I. '.\'on-self-sealing hose - If the damp ~cn.•w cannot be tightened with tht• fing{'rs do not disturb unl('~S leakage is evidl·nt. If leaL1ge is pre~ent tightrn 1/4 turn.

'' Self-~ealing hos(• - If looser than fingN-tight, tighten to finger tight and add 1/4 turn.

FIGURE 5-23. Hose clamp tightening.

118 cause of the variations in hose clamp design and hose structure, the values given in figure 5-23 are approximate. Therefore, use good judgment when tightening hose clamps by this method. Since hose connections are subject to "cold flow'' or a setting process, a followup tightening check should be made for several days after installation.

SUPPORT CLAMPS Support clamps are used to secure the various lines to the airframe or powerplant assemblies.

Several types of support clamps are used for this purpose. The rubber-cushioned and plain are the most commonly used clamps. The rubber-cushioned damp is used to secure lines subject to vibration;

the cushioning prevents chafing of the tubing. The plain clamp is used to secure lines in areas not subject to vibration.

A Teflon-cushioned clamp is used in areas where the deteriorating effect of Skydrol ® 500, hydraulic fluid (MIL-0-5606), or fuel is expected. However, because it is less resilient, it does not provide as

### Page 126

good a vibration-damping effect as other cushion materials.

Use bonded clamps to secure metal hydraulic, fuel, and oil lines in place. Unbonded clamps should be used only for securing wiring. Remove any paint or anodizing from the portion of the tube at the bonding clamp location. Make certain that clamps are of the correct size. Clamps or support­ ing clips smaller than the outside diameter of the hose may restrict the flow of fluid through the hose.

All plumbing lines must be secured at specified intervals. The maximum distance between sup­ ports for rigid fluid tubing is shown in figure 5-24.

119 Tube OD (;n.)

Ys ;;, Ji ;;, % Yz % %: 1 Distance between supports (in.)

Aluminum Alloy

9)/z 12

13)/z 15

16)/z 19 22 24

26)/z Steel

11)/z 14 16 18 20 23

25)/z

27)/z 30 FIGURE 5-24. Maximum distance between supports for fluid tubing.

### Page 127

- ' . '' ·-·· --~..;... ' CHAPTER 6

**AIRCRAFT HARDWARE, MATERIALS, AND PROCESSES**

AIRCRAFT HARDWARE Aircraft hardware is the term used to describe the various types of fasteners and miscellaneous small items used in the manufacture and repair of aircraft.

The importance of aircraft hardware is often overlooked because of its small size; however, the safe and efficient operation of any aircraft is greatly dependent upon the correct selection and use of aircraft hardware.

Identification Most items of aircraft hardware are identified by their specification number or trade name.

Threaded fasteners and rivets are usually identi­ fied by AN (Air Force-Navy), NAS (National Aircraft Standard), or MS (Military Standard) numbers. Quick-release fasteners are usuaHy identified by factory trade names and size desig­ nations.

THREADED FASTENERS Various types of fastening devices aHow quick dismantling or replacement of aircraft parts that must be taken apart and put back together at frequent intervals. Riveting or welding these parts each time they are serviced would soon weaken or ruin the joint. Furthermore, some joints require greater tensile strength and stiffness than rivets can provide. Bolts and screws are two types of fastening devices which give the required security of attachment and rigidity. Generally, bolts are used where great strength is required, and sc'rews are used where strength is not the deciding factor.

Bolts and screws are similar in many ways.

They are both used for fastening or holding, and each has a head on one end and screw threads on the other. Regardless of these similarities, there are several distinct differences between the two types of fasteners. The threaded end of a bolt is always blunt while that of a screw may be either blunt or pointed.

121 The threaded end of a bolt usually has a nut screwed onto it to complete the assembly. The threaded end of a screw may fit into a female receptacle, or it may fit directly into the material being secured. A bolt bas a fairly short threaded section and a comparatively long grip length or unthreaded portion, whereas a screw has a longer threaded section and may have no clearly defined grip length. A bolt assembly is generally tightened by turning the nut on the bolt; the head of the bolt may or may not he designed for turning.

A screw is always tightened by turning its head.

When it becomes necessary to replace aircraft fasteners, a duplicate of the original fastener should be used if at all possible. If duplicate fasteners are not available, extreme care and caution must he used in selecting substitutes.

Classification of Threads Aircraft bolts, screws, and nuts are threaded in either the NC (American National Coarse) thread series, the NF (American National Fine) thread series, the UNC (American Standard Uni­ fied Coarse) thread series, or the UNF (American Standard Unified Fine) thread series. There is one difference between the American National series and the American Standard Unified series that should be pointed out. In the I-inch-diameter size, the NF thread specified 14 threads per inch (l-14NF), while the UNF thread specifies 12 threads per inch (l-12UNF). Both type threads are designated by the number of times the incline (threads) rotates around a I-inch length of a given diameter bolt or screw. For example, a 4-28 thread indicates that a Pi-inch-diameter holt has 28 threads in 1 inch of its threaded length.

Threads are also designated hy Class of fit.

The Class of a thread indicates the tolerance allowed in manufacturing. Class 1 is a loose fit, Class 2 is a free fit, Class 3 is a medium fit, and Class 4 is a close fit. Aircraft bolts are almost always manufactured in the Class 3, medium fit.

### Page 128

~- -.;, .

-,., ~ ".

St~nd,,nl lw~d 1,oll Drill,·cl h,·~ 11<·,"I ll011 0 ~.___~!=1\1\1\11~11!~ lnt,•mal hes hea<l ],,,]!

Cl,·vis hr.It A:,./ STANOAfln AN STANDAHD A:-..' STANDAHi) AN STAl\DAllD AN STANDARD STEEL BOLT STF.F.L BOLT sn:F.L BOLT STEFi. BOLT STEEL BOLT (CORROSION HF.SISTAt\'T) 0 000 e AN STANDARD AN STANDARD AN STA~DAHD AN STANDARD SPECIAL HOLT STEEL BOLT STEFi. BOLT STEFi. BOLT STEF.T. BOLT e 000 SPECIAL 1101.T DHil,I.ED 111".AD SPECIAL BOLT NAS Cl.OS~: ALUMlNlTM BOl.T TOl,FHANCE BOLT Ai.LOY (2024) BOI.T @08@>0 M.,.c~F:TICAl.l.Y ORA'-CF-DYf:J) CLF.VIS BOI.T llFWOllKFD BOLT I.OW STllFr-:CTI!

JNSl'l'CTED MACNCT!C l'.\S. \lATF.!llAL BOLT FIGURE 6--1. Aircraft bolt identification.

A Class 4 fit requires a wrench to turn the nut onto a bolt, whereas a Class 1 fit can easily be turned with the fingers. Generally, aircraft screws are manufactured with a Class 2 thread fit for ease of assembly.

Bolts and nuts are also produced with right­ hand and left-hand threads. A right-hand thread tightens when turned clockwise; a left-hand thread tightens when turned counterclockwise.

AIRCRAFT BOLTS Aircraft bolts are fabricated from cadmium- or zinc-plated corrosion-resistant steel, unplated cor­ rosion-resistant steel, and anodized aluminum alloys. Most bolts used in aircraft structures are either general-purpose, AN bolts, or NAS internal­ wrenching or close-tolerance bolts, or MS bolts.

In certain cases, aircraft manufacturers make bolts of different dimensions or greater strength 122 than the standard types. Such bolts ~re made for a particular application, and it is of extreme importance to use like bolts in replacement.

Special bolts are usually identified by the letter ~~s" stamped on the head.

AN bolts come in three head styles-hex-head, clevis, and eyebolt (see figure 6-1). NAS bolts are available in hex-head, internal-wrenching, and countersunk head styles. MS bolts come in hex­ head and internal-wrenching styles.

General-Purpose Bolts The hex-head aircraft bolt (AN-3 through AN-20) is an all-purpose structural bolt used for general applications involving tension or shear loads where a light-drive fit is permissible (.006- inch clearance for a %-inch hole, and other sizes in proportion).

Alloy steel bolts smaller than No. 10--32 and

### Page 129

aluminum alloy bolts smaller than U-inch di­ ameter are not used in primary structures. Alumi­ num alloy bolts and nuts are not used where they will he repeatedly removed for purposes of main­ tenance and inspection. Aluminum alloy nuts may be used with cadmium-plated steel bolts loaded in shear on land airplanes, but are not used on seaplanes due to the increased possibility of dis­ similar-metal corrosion.

The AN-73 drilled-head bolt is similar to the standard hex-bolt, but has a deeper head which is drilled to receive wire for safetying. The AN-3 and the AN-73 series bolts are interchangeable, for aU practical purposes, from the standpoint of tension and shear strengths.

Close-Tolercance Bolts This type of bolt is machined more accurately than the general-purpose bolt. Close-tolerance bolts may be hex-headed (AN-173 through AN-

186) or have a 100° countersunk head (NAS-80 through NAS-86). They are used in applications where a tight-drive fit is required ( the bolt will move into position only when struck with a 12- to 14-ounce hammer).

Internal-Wrenching Bolts These bolts, (MS-20004 through MS-20024 or NAS-495) are fabricated from high-strength steel and are suitable for use in both tension and shear applications. When they are used in steel parts, the bolthole must be slightly countersunk to seat the large corner radius of the shank at the head.

In Dural material, a special heat-treated washer must he used to provide an adequate hearing surface for the head. The head of the internal­ wrenching bolt is recessed to allow the insertion of an internal wrench when installing or removing the bolt. Special high-strength nuts are used on these bolts. Replace an internal-wrenching bolt with another internal-wrenching bolt. Standard AN hex-head bolts and washers cannot be substi­ tuted for them as they do not have the required strength.

Identification and Coding Bolts are manufactured in many shapes and varieties. A clear-cut method of classification is difficult. Bolts can be identified by the shape of the head, method of securing, material used in fabrication, or the expected usage.

123 AN -type aircraft bolts can be identified by the code markings on the boltheads. The markings generally denote the bolt manufacturer, the ma­ terial of which the bolt is made, and whether the bolt is a standard AN-type or a special-purpose bolt. AN standard steel bolts are marked with either a raised dash or asterisk; corrosion-resistant steel is indicated by a single raised dash; and AN aluminum alloy bolts are marked with two raised dashes. Additional information, such as bolt diameter, bolt length, and grip length may be obtained from the bolt part number.

For example, in the bolt part number AN3DD5A, the HAN" designates that it is an Air Force-Navy Standard bolt, the ''3" indicates the diameter in sixteenths of an inch (U6), the ''DD'' indicates the material is 2024 aluminum alloy. The letter HC" in place of the ''DD" would indicate corrosion-resistant steel, and the absence of the letters would indicate cadmium-plated steel.

The ''5" indicates the length in eighths of an inch(%), and the "A" indicates that the shank is undrilled. If the letter ''H" preceded the ''5" in addition to the ''A" following it, the head would be drilled for safetying.

Close-tolerance NAS bolts are marked with either a raised or recessed triangle. The material markings for NAS bolts are the same as for AN bolts, except that they may be either raised or recessed. Bolts inspected magnetically (Magna­ flux) or by fluorescent means (Zyglo) are identified by means of colored lacquer, ot a head marking of a distinctive type.

SPECIAL-PURPOSE BOLTS Bolts designed for a particular application or use are classified as special-purpose bolts. Clevis bolts, eyebolts, Jo-bolts, and lock bolts are special­ purpose bolts.

Clevis Bolts The head of a clevis bolt is round and is either slotted to receive a common screwdriver or re­ cessed to receive a crosspoint screwdriver. This type of bolt is used only where shear loads occur and never in tension. It is often inserted as a mechanical pin in a control system.

Eyebolt This type of special-purpose bolt is used where external tension loads are to be applied. The eye

### Page 130

is designed for the attachment of such devices as the fork of a turnbuckle, a clevis, or a cable shackle. The threaded end may or may not be drilled for safetying.

Jo-Bolt Jo-bolt is a trade name for an internally threaded three-piece rivet. The Jo-bolt consists of three parts-a threaded steel alloy bolt, a threaded steel nut, and an expandable stainless steel sleeve. The parts are factory preassembled.

As the Jo-bolt is installed, the bolt is turned while the nut is held. This causes the sleeve to expand over the end of the nut, forming the blind head and clamping against the work. When driving is complete, a portion of the bolt breaks off. The high-shear and tensile strength of the Jo-bolt makes it suitable for use in cases of high stresses where some of the other blind fasteners would not be practical. Jo-bolts are often a part of the permanent structure of late-model aircraft. They are used in areas which are not often subjected to replacement or servicing. (Because it is a three­ part fastener, it should not he used where any part, in becoming loose, could be drawn into the engine air intake.) Other advantages of using Jo-bolts are their excellent resistance to vibration, weight saving, and fast installation by one person.

Presently, Jo-bolts are available in four diam­ eters: The 200 series, approxiniately ?1'6-inch in diameter; the 260 series, approximately 7,4-inch in diameter; the 312 series, approximately :Ytfi-inch in diameter; and the 375 series, approximately %-inch in diameter. Jo-bolts are available in three head styles which are: F(flush), P(hex-head), and FA(flush millable).

Lockbolts The lockbolt combines the features of a high­ strength bolt and rivet, but it has advantages over both. The lockbolt is generally used in wing-splice fittings, landing-gear fittings, fuel-cell fittings, longerons, beams, skin-splice plates, and other major structural attachments. It is more easily and quickly installed than the conventional rivet or bolt and eliminates the use of Iockwashers, cotter pins, and special nuts. Like the rivet, the lockbolt requires a pneumatic hammer or "pull gun" for installation; when installed, it is rigidly and perma­ nently locked in place. Three types of lockbolts are commonly used, the pull type, the stump type, and the blind type. (See figure 6-2.)

Pull type. Pull-type lockbolts are used mainly in aircraft primary and secondary structures. They 124 II Pull type Stump type Blind type FlGURE 6-2. Lockbolt types.

are installed very rapidly and have approximately one-half the weight of equivalent AN steel bolts and nuts. A special pneumatic "pull gun" is re· quired to install this type of lockbolt. Installation can be accomplished by one person since bucking is not required.

Stump type. Stump-type lockbolts, although they do not have the extended stem with pull grooves, are companion fasteners to pull-type lockbolts. They are used primarily where clearance will not permit installation of the pull-type lockbolt. A standard pneumatic riveting hammer ( with a hammer set attached for swaging the collar into the pin-locking grooves) and a bucking bar are tools necessary for the installation of stump-type lockbolts.

Blind type. Blind-type lockbolts come as com­ plete units or assemblies. They have exceptional strength and sheet pull-together characteristics.

Blind lockbolts are used where only one side of the work is accessible and, generally, where it is diffi­ cult to drive a conventional rivet. This type of lockbolt is installed in the same manner as the pull­ type lockbolt.

Common features. Common features of the three types of lockbolts are the annular locking grooves on the pin and the locking collar which is swaged into the pin's lock grooves to lock the pin in tension. The pins of the pull- and blind-type lockbolts are extended for pull installation. The extension is provided with pulling grooves and a tension breakoff groove.

### Page 131

Composition. The pins of pull- and stump-type lockbolts are made of heat-treated alloy steel or high-strength aluminum alloy. Companion collars are made of aluminum alloy or mild steel. The blind lockbolt consists of a heat-treated alloy steel pin, blind sleeve and filler sleeve, mild steel collar, and carbon steel washer.

Substitution. Alloy steel lockbolts may be used to replace steel hi-shear rivets, solid steel rivets, or AN bolts of the same diameter and head type.

Aluminum alloy lockbolts may be used to replace solid aluminum alloy rivets of the same diameter and head type. Steel and aluminum alloy lock­ bolts may also be used to replace steel and 2024T aluminum alloy bolts, respectively, of the same diameter. Blind lockbolts may be used to replace solid aluminum alloy rivets, stainless steel rivets, or all blind rivets of the same diameter.

Numbering system. The numbering systems for the various types of lockbolts are explained by the following breakouts ( see figure 6--4) .

Pull-type loekbolt- ALPP H T 8 8 16ths of an 1 Tcrip 1ength in inch.

Body diameter in 32nds of all inch.

Pin materials- E = 75S-T6 aluminum alloy.

T = heat-treated alloy r,;,teel.

Class fit- ][ = hole filling (interference fit).

N = non-hole filling (dearancc fit).

Head type- ACT 509 = dose tolerance head.

ALPP = pan head.

ALPJl = brazier head.

AN .S09 C-sink ALP509 = standard AN- 509 C-sink head.

ALP426 = standard AN-426 C-sink head.

Blind-type Ioekholt­ BL 8 4 I T Lcrip length in 16ths of an inch, ±){i inch.

Diameter in 32nds of an ineh.

lllind Jorkbolt.

GRIP GlllP RANGE GRIP GRIP RANGE NO. NO.

Min. Max. Min. Max.

1 .031 .094 17 1.031 1.094 2 .094 .156 18 1.094 1.156 3 .156 .219 19 1.156 1.219 4 .219 .281 20 1.219 1.281 5 .281 .344 21 1.281 1.344 6 .344 .406 22 1.344 1.406 7 .406 .469 23 1.406 1.469 8 .469 .531 24 1.469 1.531 9 .531 .594 25 1.531 1.594 10 .594 .656 26 1.594 1.656 11 .656 . 718 27 1.656 1.718 12 .718 .781 28 1.718 1.781 13 .781 .843 29 1.781 1.843 14 .843 .906 30 1.843 1.906 15 .906 .968 31 1.906 1.968 16 .968 1.031 32 1.968 2.031 33 2.031 2.094 FIGURE 6-3. Pull- and stump-type lockbolt grip Lol'kbolt eollar­ LC C 8 ranges.

l TDiameter of pin in 32nds of an inch.

i\1aterial- C = 24ST aluminum aHoy (green color).

F = 61ST aluminum alloy (plain color).

R = mild steel (cadmium plated).

Loekbolt collar.

* l1st· 25ST aluminum alloy with heat-treated alloy lo('kholts only.

Lse 61ST aluminum alloy with 75ST aluminum alloy lockholts only. ' Us,· mild steel \\ ith ht·at-treatrd alloy steel lockbolts for high temperatLJrc applications onfy.

Stump-type lockbolt­ ALSF I:: 8 8 1 T Tcrip 1eng11i in 161hs of an inch.

Body diameter in 32nds of an inch.

Pin material- E = 75S--T6 aluminmn alloy.

T = heat-treated alloy steel.

Head type- ASCT509 = elosc tolerance AN-509 C-sink head.

ALSF = flat head type.

ALS509 = standard AN-509 C-sink head.

ALS426 = standard AN-426 C-sink head.

FIG!JRE 6--4. Lockbolt numbering system.

### Page 132

·..:.:'.

.!,!-inch Diameter %-inch Diameter

**GRIP GRIP RANGE GRIP GRIP RANGE NO. NO.**

Min. Max. Min. Max.

1 .031 .094 2 .094 .156 2 .094 .156 3 .156 .219 3 .156 .219 4 .219 .281 4 .219 .281 5 .281 .344 5 .281 .344 6 .344 .406 6 .344 .406 7 .406 .469 7 .406 .469 8 .469 .531 8 .469 .531 9 .531 .594 9 .531 .594 10 .594 .656 10 .594 .656 11 .656 . 718 11 .656 . 718 12 .718 .781 12 . 718 .781 13 .781 .843 13 .781 .843 14 .843 .906 14 .843 .906 15 . 906 .968 15 .906 .968 16 .968 1.031 16 .968 1.031 17 1.031 1.094 17 1.031 1.094 18 1.094 1.156 18 1.094 I:156 19 1.156 1.219 19 1.156 1.219 20 1.219 1.281 20 1.219 1.281 21 1.281 1.343 21 1.281 1.343 22 1.343 1.406 22 1.343 1.406 23 1.406 1.469 23 1.406 1.469 24 1.460 1.531 24 1.469 1.531 25 1.531 1.594 FIGURE 6--5. Blind-type lockbolt grip ranges.

Grip Range. The bolt grip range required for any application should be determined by measuring the thickness of the material with a hook scale inserted through the hole. Once this measurement is determined the correct grip range can he selected by referring to the charts provided by the rivet manufacturer. Examples of grip-range charts are shown in figures 6-3 and 6-5.

When installed, the lockholt collar should he

•waged substantially throughout the complete length of the collar. The tolerance of the broken end of the pin relative to the top of the collar must be within the following dimensions:

Pin Tolerance diameter Below Above %; .079 to .032 :l...: .079 to .050 %', .079 to .050 % .079 to .060 When removal of a lockbolt becomes necessary, remove the collar by splitting it axially with a sharp, cold chisel. Be careful not to break out or deform the hole. The use of a backup bar on the opposite side of the collar being split is recom- 126 mended; The pin may then he driven out with a drift punch.

AIRCRAFT NUTS Aircraft nuts are made in a variety of shapes and sizes. They are made of cadmium-plated carbon steel, stainless steel, or anodized 2024T aluminum alloy, and may he obtained with either right- or left-hand threads. No identifying marking or lettering appears on nuts. They can be identified only by the characteristic metallic luster or color of the aluminum, brass, or the insert when the nut is of the self-locking type. They can he further identified by their construction .

Aircraft nuts can he divided into two general groups: Non-self-locking and self-locking nuts.

No?--self-locking nuts are those that must be safetied by external locking devices, such as cotter pins, safety wire, or locknuts. Self-locking nuts contain the locking feature as an integral part.

Non-self-locking Nuts Most of the familiar types of nuts, including the plain nut, the castle nut, the castellated shear nut, the plain hex nut, the light hex nut, and the plain check nut are the non-self-locking type.

( See figure 6-6.)

The castle nut, AN310, is used with drilled­ shank AN hex head bolts, clevis bolts, eyeholts, drilled head bolts, or studs. It is fairly rugged and can withstand large tensional loads. Slots (called castellations) in the nut are designed to accommodate a cotter pin or Jock wire for safety.

The castellated shear nut, AN320, is designed for use with devices (such as drilled clevis bolts and threaded taper pins) which are normally sub­ jected to shearing stress only. Like the castle nut, it is castellated for safetying. Note, however, that the nut is not as deep or as strong as the castle nut; also that the castellations are not as deep as those in the castle nut.

The plain hex nut, AN315 and AN335 (fine and coarse thread), is of rugged construction. This makes it suitable for carrying large tensional loads. However, since it requires an auxiliary locking device such as a check nut or lockwasher, its use on aircraft structures is somewhat limited.

The light hex nut, AN340 and AN345 (fine and coarse thread), is a much lighter nut than the plain hex nut and must be locked by an auxiliary

### Page 133

AN310 AN315 AN335 @-------A ~ AN345 w m -------- AN316 AN350 FIGURE 6-6. l\'on-self-locking nuts.

device. It is used for miscellaneous 1ight-tension requirements.

The plain check nut, AN316, is employed as a locking device for plain nuts, set screws, threaded rod ends, and other devices.

The wing nut, AN350, is intended for use where the desired tightness can he obtained with the fingers and where the assembly is frequently removed.

Self-Locking Nuts As their name implies, self-locking nuts need no auxiliary means of safetying but have a safetying feature included as an integral part of their con­ struction. Many types of self-locking nuts have been designed and their use has become quite widespread. Common applications are: ( 1) At­ tachment of antifriction hearings and control pulleys; (2) Attachment of accessories, anchor nuts around inspection holes and small tank instailation openings; and ( 3) Attachment of rocker box covers and exhaust stacks. Self-locking nuts are accept­ able for use on certificated aircraft subject to the restrictions of the manufacturer.

Self-locking nuts are used on aircraft to provide tight connections which will not shake loose under 127 severe vibration. Do not use self-locking nuts at joints which subject either the nut or bolt to rota­ tion. They may be used with antifriction bearings and control pulleys, provided the inner race of the bearing is clamped to the supporting structure by the nut and bolt. Plates must be attached to the structure in a positive manner to eliminate rotation or misalignment when tightening the bolts or screws.

The two general types of self-locking nuts cur­ rently in use are the all-metal type and the fiber­ lock type. For the sake of simplicity, only three typical kinds of self-locking nuts are considered in this handbook: The Boots self-locking and the stainless steel self.locking nuts, representing the all-metal types; and the dastic stop nut, represent­ ing the fiber-insert type.

Boots Self-Locking Nut The Boots self-locking nut is of one-piece, all­ metal construction, designed to hold tight in spite of severe vibration. Note in figure 6--7 that it has two sections and is essentially two nuts in one, a locking nut and a load-carrying nut. The two sections are connected with a spring which is an integral part of the nut. The spring keeps the locking and Ioad-car~ying sections such a distance

### Page 134

6$§.tft … IL

Boots aircraft nut Elastic anchor nut Flex:loc nut Fiber locknut Elastic stop nut FIGURE 6-7. Self-locking nuts.

apart that the two sets of threads are out-of-phase;

that is, so spaced that a bolt which has been screwed through the load-carrying section must push the lockino- section outward against the force of the spring 0 to engage the threads of the locking section properly.

Thus, the spring, thro1Jgh the medium of the locking section, exerts a constant locking force on the bolt in the same direction as a force that_ would tie:hten the nut. In this nut, the load-carrying sec­ ti;n has the thread strength of a standard nut of comparable size, while the locking section presses against the threads of the bolt and locks the nut firmly in position. Only a wrench applied to the nut will loosen it. The nut can be removed and reused without impairing its efficiency.

Boots self-locking nuts are made with three dif­ ferent spring styles and in various shapes and sizes.

The wing type, which is the most common, ranges in size for No. 6 up to 1/i inch, the Roi-top ranges from 114 inch to %6 inch, and the bellows type ranges in size from No. 8 up to o/s inch. Wing­ type nuts are made of anodized aluminum alloy, cadmium plated carbon steel, or stainless steel. The Rol-top nut is cadmium-plated steel, and the bellows type is made of aluminum a11oy only.

Stainless Steel Self-Locking Nut The stainless steel self-locking nut may be spun on and off with the fingers, as its locking action takes place only when the nut is seated against a solid surface and tightened. The nut consists of two parts; a case with a beveled lo<:king shoulder and key, and a threaded insert with a lockin_g shoulder and slotted keyway. Until the nut rs tightened it spins on the bolt easily, because the threaded insert is the proper size for the bolt. How­ ever, when the nut is seated against a solid surface and tightened, the locking shoulder of the insert is pulled downward and wedged against the locking shoulder of the case. This action compresses the threaded insert and causes it to clench the bolt tightly. The cross-sectional view in figure 6-8 shows how the key of the case fits into the slotted keyway of the insert so that when the case is turned the threaded insert is turned with it. Note that the slot is wider than the key. This permits the slot to be narrowed and the insert to be compressed when the nut is tightened.

Elastic Stop Nut The elastic stop nut is a standard nut with the height incteased to accommodate a fiber-locking collar. This fiber collar is very tough and durable and is unaffected by immersion in hot or cold water or ordinary solvents such as ether, carbon tetrachloride, oils, and gasoline. It will not dam­ a~e bolt threads or piatin~.

As shown in figure 6--9, the fiber-locking collar is not threaded and its inside diameter is smaller than the largest diameter of the threaded portion or the outside diameter of a corresponding bolt.

When the nut is screwed onto a bolt, it acts as an ordinary nut until the bolt reaches the fiber collar.

When the bolt is screwed into the fiber collar, how­ ever, friction ( or drag) causes the fiber to be pushed upward. This creates a heavy downward.

pressure on the load-carrying part and automatic­ ally throws the load-carrying sides of the nut and bolt threads into positive contact. After the bolt Jras been forced all the way through the fiber collar, the downward pressure remains constant.

This pressure locks and holds the nut securely in place even under severe vibration.

Nut case Untightened nut Keyway Tightened nut FIGURE 6-8. Stainless steel self-locking nut.

### Page 135

Fiber collar FIGURE 6--9. Elastic stop nut.

Nearly all elastic stop nuts are steel or aluminum alloy. However, such nuts are available in prac­ tically any kind of metal. Aluminum alloy elastic stop nuts are supplied with an anodized finish.

Steel nuts are cadmium plated.

Normally, elastic stop nuts can be used many times with complete safety and without detriment to their locking efficiency. When reusing elastic stop nuts, be sure the fiber has not lost its locking friction or become brittle. If a nut can be turned with the fingers, replace it.

After the nut has been tightened, make sure the rounded or chamfered end of the bolts, studs, or screws extends at least the full round or chamfer through the nut. Flat end bolts, studs, or screws should extend at least ¥32 inch through the nut.

Bolts of %6-inch diameter and over with cotter pin holes may he used with self-locking nuts, but only if free from burrs around the holes. Bolts with damaged threads and rough ends are not acceptable. Do not tap the fiber-locking insert.

The self-locking action of the elastic stop nut is the result of having the bolt threads impress themselves into the untapped fiber.

Do not install elastic stop nuts in places where the temperature is higher than 250° F., because the effectiveness of the self-locking action is reduced beyond this point. Self-locking nuts may be used on aircraft engines and accessories when their use is specified by the engine manufacturer.

Self-locking nut bases are ma<le in a number of forms and materials for riveting and welding to aircraft structure or parts. (See figure 6-10.)

Certain applications require the installation of self­ locking nuts in channels, an arrangement which permits the attachment of many nuts with only a few rivets. These channels are track-like bases with regularly spaced nuts which are either remov­ able or nonremovable. The removable type car­ ries a floating nut, which can be snapped in or out of the channel, thus making possible the easy re­ moval of damaged nuts. Nuts such as the clinch­ type and spline-type which depend on friction for their anchorage are not acceptable for use in air­ craft structures.

Sheet Spring Nuts Sheet spring nuts, such as speed nuts, are used with standard and sheet-metal self-tapping screws in nonstructural locations. They find various uses in supporting line clamps, conduit clamps, elec­ trical equipment, access doors, and the like, and are available in several types. Speed nuts are made from spring steel and are arched prior to tightening. This arched spring lock prevents the screw from working loose. These nuts should he used only where originalJy used in the fabrication of the aircraft.

Internal and Externa! Wrenching Nuts 129 Two commercial types of high-strength internal or external wrenching nu ts are available; they are the internal and external wrenching elastic-stop nut and the Unbrako internal and external wrench­ ing nut. Both are of the self-locking type, are heat-treated, and are capable of carrying high­ strength bolt-tension loads.

Identification and Coding Part numbers designate the type of nut. The common types and their respective part numbers arc: Plain, AN315 and AN335; castle AN310;

### Page 136

. ~' Boots aircraft channel assembly Elastic stop nut channel assembly FIGURE 6--10. Self-locking nut bases.

plain check, AN316; light hex, AN340 and AN345;

and castellated shear, AN320. The patented self­ locking types are assigned part numbers ranging from MS20363 through MS20367. The Boots, the Flexloc, the fiber locknut, the elastic stop nut, and the self-locking nut belong to this group.

Part number AN350 is assigned to the wing nut.

Letters and digits following the part number indicate such items as material, size, threads per inch, and whether the thread is right or left hand.

The letter ~'B" following the part number indi­ cates the nut material to be brass; a '~D" indicates 2017-T aluminum alloy; a "DD" indicates 2024-T aluminum alloy; a ''C" indicates stainless steel;

and a dash in place of a letter indicates cadmiumplated carbon steel. · The digit (or two digits) following the dash or the material code letter is the dash number of the nut, and it indicates the size of the shank and threads per inch of the bolt on which the nut will fit. The dash number corresponds to the first figure appearing in the part number coding of general-purpose bolts. A dash and the number 3, for example, indicates that the nut will fit an AN3 bolt (10-32); a dash and the number 4 means it will fit an AN4 bolt (;!4-28); a dash and the number 5, an ANS bolt (!·fr-24); and so on.

The code numbers for self-locking nuts end in three- or four-digit numbers. The 1ast two digits refer to threads per inch, and the one or two preceding digits stand for the nut size in 16ths of an inch.

130 Some other common nuts and their code num­ bers are:

Code Number AN310D5R:

AN310 = aircraft castle nut.

D = 2024-T aluminum alloy.

5 = §{5-inch diameter.

R = right-hand thread (usually 24 threads per inch).

Code Number AN320-10:

AN320 = aircraft castellated shear nut, cadmium-plated carbon steel.

10 = %-inch diameter, 18 threads per inch ( this nut is usually right-hand thread).

Code Number AN350Bl032:

AN350 = aircraft wingnut.

B = brass.

10 = number 10 bolt.

32 = threads per inch.

AIRCRAFT WASHERS Aircraft washers used in airframe repair are either plain, lock, or special type washers.

Plain Washers Plain washers (figure 6--11), both the AN960 and AN970, are used under hex nuts. They pro­ vide a smooth bearing surface and act as a shim

### Page 137

.@PO w11: PSI Plain AN960 AN935 Ball seat & socket AC950 & AC95.5 taper pin AN975 Special washers CC OC Star lock washers FIGURE 6-11. Various types of washers.

in obtaining correct grip length for a bolt and nut assembly. They are used to adjust the position of castellated nuts in respect to drilled cotterr pin holes in bolts. Plain washers should be used under lockwashers to prevent damage to the surface material.

Aluminum and aluminum alloy washers may he used under holtheads or nuts on aluminum alloy or magnesium structures where corrosion caused by dissimilar metals is a factor. When used in this manner, any electric current flow will be between the washer and the steel bolt. How­ ever, it is common practice to use a cadmium­ plated steel washer under a nut hearing directly against a structure as this washer will resist the cutting action of a nut better than an aluminum alloy washer.

The AN970 steel washer provides a greater bearing area than the AN960 washer and is used on wooden structures under both the head and the nut of a bolt to prevent crushing the surface.

Lockwashers Lockwashers, both the AN935 and AN936, are used with machine screws or bolts where the self- 131 locking or castellated type nut is not appropriate.

The spring action of the washer (AN935) provides enough friction to prevent loosening of the nut from vibration. (These washers are shown in figure 6-11.)

Lockwashers shouJd never be used under the following conditions;

1. With fasteners to primary or secondary structures.

2. With fasteners on any part of the aircraft where failure might result in damage or danger to the aircraft or personnel.

3. Where failure would permit the opening of a joint to the airflow.

4. Where the screw is subject to frequent removal.

5. Where the washers are exposed to the airflow.

6. Where the washers are subject to corrosive conditions.

7. Where the washer is against soft material without a plain washer underneath to pre­ vent gouging the surface.

Shakeproof Lockwashers Shakeproof lockwashers are round washers de­ signed with tabS or lips that are bent upward across the sides of a hex nut or bolt to lock the nut in place. There are various methods of securing the lockwasher to prevent it from turning, such as an external tab bent downward 90° into a small hole in the face of the unit, or an internal tab which fits a keyed bolt.

Shakeproof lockwashers can withstand higher heat than other methods of safetying and can be used under high~Vihration conditions safely. They should be used only once because the tabs tend to break when bent a second time.

Special Washers The ball-socket and seat washers, AC950 and AC955, are special washers used where a bolt is installed at an angle to a surface, or where perfect alignment with a surface is required.

These washers are used together. They are shown in figure 6-11.

The NAS143 and MS20002 washers are used for internal wrenching bolts of the N AS144 through NAS158 series. This washer is either plain or countersunk. The countersunk washer ( designated as N AS143C and MS20002C) is used

### Page 138

.. , - to seat the holt head shank radius, and the plain washer is used under the nut.

INSTALLATION OF NUTS AND BOLTS Bolt and Hole Sizes Slight clearances in boltholes are permissible wherever bolts are used in tension and are not suhject to reversal of load. A few of the appli­ cations in which clearance of holes may be per­ mitted are in pulley brackets, conduit boxes, lining trim, and miscellaneous supports and brackets.

Boltholes are to be normal to the surface in­ volved to provide full bearing surface for the bolthead and nut and must not be oversized or elongated. A holt in such a hole will carry none of its shear load until parts have yielded or de­ formed enough to allow the b.earing surface of the oversized hole to contact the bolt. In this respect, remember that bolts do not become swaged to fill up the holes as do rivets.

In cases of oversized or elongated holes in critical members, obtain advice from the aircraft or engine manufacturer before drilling or reaming the hole to take the next larger bolt. Usually, such factors as edge distance, clearance, or load factor must be considered. Oversized or elongated holes in noncritical members can usually he drilled or reamed to the next larger size.

Many holtholes, particularly those in primary connecting elements, have close tolerances. Gener­ ally, it is permissible to use the first lettered drill size larger than the normal bolt diameter, except where the AN hexagon bolts are used in light­ drive fit (reamed) applications and where NAS close-tolerance bolts or AN clevis bolts are used.

Light-drive fits for bolts (specified on the repair drawings as .0015-inch maximum clearance be­ tween bolt and hole) are required in places where bolts are used in repair, or where they are placed in the original structure.

The fit of holes and bolts cannot be defined in terms of shaft and hole diameters; it is defined in terms of the friction between bolt and hole when sliding the bolt into place. A tight-drive fit, for example, is one in which a sharp blow of a 12- or 14-ounce hammer is required to move the bolt. A bolt that requires a hard blow and sounds tight is considered to fit too tightly. A light-drive fit is one in which a bolt will move when a hammer handle is held against its head and pressed by the weight of the body.

132 Installation Practices Examine the markings on the bolthead to de­ termine that each bolt is of the correct material.

It is of extreme importance to use like bolts in replacement. In every case, refer to the applicable Maintenance Instructions Manual and Illustrated Parts Breakdown.

Be sure that washers are used under both the heads of bolts and nuts unless their omission is specified. A washer guards against mechanical damage to the material being bolted and prevents corrosion of the structural members. An aluminum alloy washer should be used under the head and nut of a steel bolt securing aluminum alloy or magnesium alloy members. Any corrosion that occurs then attacks the washer rather than the members. Steel washers should be used when joining steel members with steel bolts.

Whenever possible, the bolt should be placed with the head on top or in the forward position.

This positioning tends to prevent the bolt from slipping out if the nut is accidently lost.

Be certain that the bolt grip length is correct.

Grip length is the length of the unthreaded portion of the bolt shank. Generally speaking, the grip length should equal the thickness of the material being bolted together. However, bolts of slightly greater grip length may be used if washers are placed under the nut or the bolthead. In the case of plate nuts, add shims under the plate.

Safetying of Bolts and Nuts It is very important that all bolts or nuts, except the self-locking type, be safetied after installation.

This prevents them from loosening in flight due to vibration. Methods of safetying are discussed later in this chapter.

TORQUE AND TORQUE WRENCHES As the speed of an aircraft increases, each struc· tural member becomes more highly stressed. It is therefore extremely important that each member carry no more and no less than the load for which it was designed. In order to distribute the loads safely throughout a structure, it is necessary that proper torque be applied to all nuts, bolts, studs and screws. Using the proper torque allows the structure to develop its designed strength and greatly reduces the possibility of failure due to fatigue.

### Page 139

Torque Wrenches The three most commonly used torque wrenches are the flexible beam, rigid frame, and the ratchet types (figure 6-12). When using the flexible beam and the rigid frame torque wrenches, the torque value is read visually on a dial or scale mounted on the handle of the wrench.

micrometer type scale, then relock the grip.

Install the required socket or adapter to the square drive of the handle. Place the wrench assembly on the nut or bolt and pull the wrench assembly on the nut or bolt and pull in a clockwise direction with .a smooth, steady motion. (A fast or jerky motion will result in an improperly torqued unit.)

When the applied torque reaches the torque value which indicated on the handle setting, the handle will automatically release or "break" and move To use the ratchet type, unlock the grip and adjust the handle to the desired setting on the Basic formula F X L = T F = Applied force L = Lever length betwen centerline of drive and center­ line of applied force (F must be 90 degrees to L) T = Torque 90

**DEGREES L RIGID FRA11E .. .. .. .**

"

RATCHET Formula for use with extensions Tw :::;; Te X A B T c,~ ":;)

FLEXIBLE BEA~!

A Lever length of wrench B Lever length of wrench plus extem;ion Te Required torque on bolt Tw Torque reading on wrench dial FIGURE 6-12. Common torque wrenches ..

### Page 140

Torque Values in Inch-Pounds for Tightenini Nuts On standard bolts, studs, and On bolt.~. studs, On high-strength screws having a tensile .~tn·ngth and scrL"wS having bolts, studs, of 1:25,000 to 140,000 p.s.i. <l tcmile ,,trcngth and scr<-·ws hnving of 140,000 to a tensile strength Bolt, Stud 160,000 p.s.i. 160,000 p.s.i.

or Screw Size and over . .: ' ShC'ar type nuts Tension type nub (A7'.320, A7'364 and threadeQ, Any nut, Any nut, or equivalent) machine parts CX(X'f)t, except (A7'-3!0.A.,365 shear type shear type or equivalent) 8-32 8-36 7-9 12-15 14-1 7 15-18 10-24 10-32 12-15 20-25 23-30 25-35 1/4-20 25-30 40-50 45-49 50-68 1/4-28 30-40 50-70 60-80 70-90 5/16-18 48-55 80-90 85-117 90-144 5/16-24 60-85 100-140 120-172 140-203 3/8-16 95-1!0 160-185 173-217 185-248 3/8-24 95-110 160-190 175-271 190-351 7 /16-14 140-155 235-255 245-342 255-428 7 /16-20 270-300 450-500 475-628 500-156 1/2-13 240-290 400-480 440-636 480-792 1/2-20 290-410 480-690 585-840 690-990 9/16-12 300-420 500-700 600-845 700-990 9/16-18 480-600 800-1,000 900-1.220 1,000-1,440 5/8-11 420-540 700-900 800-1,125 900-1.350 5/8-18 660-780 1,100-1,300 1,200-1,730 1,300-2,160 3/4-10 700-950 1,150-1,600 1,.380-1,925 1,600-2,250 3/4-16 1,300-1,500 2,30{)-2,500 2,400-3,,500 2,500-4,500 7/8-9 1,300-1,800 2,200-3,000 2,600-3,,570 :J,000-4,140 7 /8-14 1,500-1,800 2,500-3,000 2,750-4,650 3,000-6,300 l"-8 2,200-3,000 3, 700-5,000 4,.350-5,H20 5,000-6.840 l"-14 2,200-3,300 3,700-5,500 4,600- 7,250 5,500-9,000 1 1/8-8 3,300-4,000 5,500-6,500 6,000-8,650 6,500-10,800 l 1/8-12 3,000-4,200 5,000-7,000 6,000-10,250 7,000-13,500 1 1/4-8 4,000-5,000 6,500-8,000 7,250-11,000 8,000-14,000 1 1/4-12 5,400-6,600 9,000-11.000 10,000- !6.750 11,000-22,500 FlGDRE 6-13. Standard torque table (inch-pounds).

### Page 141

freely for a short distance. The release and free travel is easily felt, So there is no doubt about when the torquing process is completed.

To assure getting the correct amount of torque on the fasteners, all torque wrenches must be tested at least once a month or more often if necessary.

NOTE: It is not advisable to use a handle exten­ sion on a flexible beam type torque wrench at any time. A handle extension alone has no effect on the reading of the other types. The use of a drive­ end extension on any type of torque wrench makes the use of the formula mandatory. When applying the formula, force must be applied to the handle of the torque wrench at the point from which the measurements were taken. If this is not done, the torque obtained will be in error.

Torque Tobles The standard torque table should be used as a guide in tightening nuts, studs, bolts, and screws whenever specific torque values are not called out in maintenance procedures. The following rules apply for correct use of the torque table (figure 6---13):

1. To obtain values in foot-pounds, divide inch-pounds by 12.

2. Do not lubricate nuts or bolts except for corrosion-resistant steel parts or where spe­ cifically instructed to do so.

3. Always tighten by rotating the nut first if possible. When space considerations make it necessary to tighten by rotating the bolt­ head, approach the high side of the indi­ cated torque range. Do not exceed the maximum allowable torque value.

4. Maximum torque ranges should be used only when materials and surfaces being joined are of sufficient thickness, area, and strength to resist breaking, warping, or other damage.

5. For corrosion-resisting steel nuts, use torque values given for shear type nut;5,

6. The use of any type of drive-end extension on a torque wrench changes the dial read­ ing required to obtain the actual values indicated in the standard torque range tables. When using a drive-end extension, the torque wrench reading must be com­ puted by use of the proper formula, which is included in the handbook accompanying the torque wrench.

Cotter Pin Hole Line-Up When tightening castellated nuts on bolts, the cotter pin holes may not line up with the slots in the nuts for the range of recommended values.

Except in cases of highly stressed engine parts, the nut may be over tightened to permit lining up the 135 next slot with the cotter pin hole. The torque loa<ls specified may be used for all unlubricated cadmium-plated steel nuts of the fine- or coarse­ thread series which have approximately equal number of threads and equal face bearing areas.

These values do not apply where special torque requirements are specified in the maintenance manual.

If the head end, rather than the nut, must be turned in the tightening operation, maximum torque values may be increased by an amount eql!al to shank friction, provided the latter is first measured by a torque wrench.

AIRCRAFT SCREWS Screws are the most commonly used threaded fastening devices on aircraft. They differ from bolts inasmuch as they are generally made of lower strength materials. They can be installed with a loose-fitting thread, and the head shapes are made to engage a screwdriver or wrench.

Some screws have a clearly defined grip or un­ threaded portion while others are threaded along their entire length.

Several types of structural screws differ from the standard structural bolts only in head style.

The material in them is the same, and a definite grip length is provided. The AN525 washer-hea<l screw an<l the NAS220 through NAS227 series are such screws.

Commonly .used screws are classified in three groups: (1) Structural screws which have the same strength as equal size bolts; (2) machine screws, which include the majority of types used for general repair; and (3) self-tapping screws, which are used for attaching lighter parts. A fourth group, drive screws, are not actually screws hut nails. They are driven into :ritetal parts with a mallet or hammer and their heads are not slotted or recessed.

Structural Screws Structural screws are made of alloy steel, are properly heat treated, and can be used as struc­ tural bolts. These screws are found in the NAS204 through NAS235 and AN509 and AN525 series.

They have a definite grip and the same shear strength as a bolt of the same size. Shank toler­ ances are similar to AN hex-head bolts, and the threads are National Fine. Structural screws are available with round, brazier, or countersunk heads. The recessed head screws are driven by either a Phillips or a Reed and Prince screwdriver.

The AN509 (100°) flathead screw is used in

### Page 142

countersunk holes where a flush surface is neces­ sary.

The AN525 washer-head structural screw is used where raised heads are not objectionable.

The washer-head screw provides a large contact area.

Machine Screws Machiue screws are usually of the flathead (countersunk), roundhead, or washer-head types.

These. screws are general-purpose screws and are available in low-carbon steel, brass, corrosion­ resistant steel, and aluminum aHoy.

Roundhead screws, AN515 and AN520, have either slotted or recessed heads. The AN515 screw has coarse threads and the AN520 has fine threads.

Counter-sunk machine screws are listed as AN505 and AN510 for 82°, and AN507 for 100°.

The AN505 and AN510 correspond to the AN515 and AN520 roundhead in material and usage.

The fillister-head screw, AN500 through AN503, is a general-purpose screw and is used as a cap­ screw in light mechanisms. This could include attachments of cast aluminum parts such as gear­ box cover plates.

The AN500 and AN501 screws are available in low-carbon steel, corrosion-resistant steel, and brass. The AN500 has coarse threads while the AN501 has fine threads. They have no clearly defined grip length. Screws larger than No. 6 have a hole drilled through the head for safetying purposes.

The AN502 and AN503 fillister-head screws are made of heat-treated alloy steel, have a small grip, and are available in ~ne and coarse threads.

These screws are used as capscrews where great strength is required. The coarse-threaded screws are commonly used as capscrews in tapped alumi­ num alloy and magnesium castings because of the softness of the metal.

Self-tapping Screws Machine self-tapping screws are listed as AN504 and AN506. The AN 504 screw has a roundhead, and the AN506 is 82° countersunk. These screws are used for attaching removable parts, such as name­ plates, to castings and parts in which the screw cuts its own threads.

AN530 and AN531 self-tapping sheet-metal screws, such as the Parker-Kalon Z-type sheet­ metal screw, are blunt on the end. They are used 136 in the temporary attachment of sheet metal for riveting, and in the permanent assembly of non­ structural assemblies. Self-tapping screws should not he used to replace standard screws, nuts, bolts, or rivets.

Drive Screws Drive screws, AN535, correspond to the Parker­ Kalon U-type. They are plain-head self-tappiug screws used as capscrews for attaching nameplates in castings and for sealing drain holes in corrosion proofing tubular structures. They are not intended to be removed after installation.

Identification and Coding The coding system used :o identify screws is similar to that used for bolts. There are AN and NAS screws. NAS screws are structural screws.

Part numbers 510, 515, 550, and so on, catalog screws into classes such as roundhead, flathead, washerhead, and so forth. Letters and digits indicate their material composition, length, and thickness. Examples of AN and NAS code num­ bers follow.

ANSOlB-416-7 AN = Air Force-Navy standard.

501 = fillister-head, fine thread.

B = brass.

416 ';= U,-inch diameter.

7 = !15-iuch length.

The letter ''D" in place of the "B" would indicate that the material is 2017-T aluminum alloy. The letter HC" would designate corrosion­ resistant steel. An ~~A" placed before the material code letter would indicate that the head is drilled for safetying.

NAS144DH-22 NAS = National Aircraft Standard.

144 = head style; diameter and thread­ ;li-28 bolt, internal wrenchiug.

DH = drilled head.

22 = screw length in 16ths of an inch- 1 % inches long.

The basic N AS number identifies the part. The suffix letters and dash numbers separate different sizes, plating material, drilling specifications, etc.

The dash numbers and suffix letters do not hav.e standard meanings. It is necessary to refer to a specific NAS page in the Standards hook for the legend.

### Page 143

REPAIR OF DAMAGED INTERNAL THREADS Installation or replacement of bolts is simple when compared to the installation or replacement of studs. Bolt heads and nuts are cut in the open, whereas studs are installed into internal threads in a casting or built-up assembly. Damaged threads on bolts or nuts can be seen and only require re­ placement of the defective part. If internal threads are damaged, two alternatives are apparent: the part may be replaced or the threads repaired or replaced. Correction of the thread problem is usually cheaper and more convenient. Two meth­ ods of repairing are by replacement bushings or heli-coils.

Replacement Bushings Bushings are usually special material (steel or brass spark plug bushings into aluminum cylinder heads). A material that will resist wear is used where removal and replacement is frequent. The external threads on the bushing are usually coarse.

The bushing is instaIIed, a thread lock compound may or may not be used, and staked to prevent loosening. Many bushings have left-hand threads external and right-hand threads internal. With this installation, removal of the bolt or stud ( right­ hand threads) tends to tighten the bushing.

Bushings for common installations such as spark plugs may be up to .040 oversize (in increments of .005). Original installation and overhaul shop replacements are shrunk fit: a heated cylinder head and a frozen bushing.

Heli-coils Heli-coils are precision formed screw thread coils of 18-8 stainless steel wire having a diamond shaped cross-section ( figure 6-14) . They form unified coarse or unified fine thread classes 2-band 3B when assembled into (heli-coil) threaded holes.

The assembled insert accommodates UNJ ( con­ trolled radius root) male threaded members. Each insert has a driving tang with a notch to facilitate removal of the tang after the insert is screwed into a heli-coil tapped hole.

They are used as screw thread bushings. In addition to being used to restore damaged threads, they are used in the original design of missiles, aircraft engines, and all types of mechanical equip­ ment and accessories to protect and strengthen tapped threads in light materials, metals, and plastics, particularly in locations which require fre­ quent assembly and disassembly, and/or where a screw locking action is desired.

137 FIGURE 6-14. Heli-coil insert.

Heli-Coil Installation Heli-coil installation (figure 6-15) is a 5 to 6 step operation, depending upon how the last step is classed. The following steps are for instructional purposes only. The manufacturer's instructions should be followed during installation.

Step 1: Determine what threads are damaged.

Step 2: (a) New installation of heli-coil, drill out damaged threads to minimum depth specified.

(b) Previously installed heli-coil.

Using proper size extracting tool, place edge of blade in 90° from the edge of the insert. Tap with hammer to seat tool. Turn to left, applying pressure, until insert backs out. Threads are not damaged if insert is properly removed.

Step 3: Tap. Use the tap of required nominal thread size. The tapping procedure is the same as standard thread tapping.

Tap length must be equal to or exceed the requirement.

Step 4:

Step 5:

Gage. Threads may be checked with a heli-coil thread gage. · Insert Assembly. Using proper tool, in­ stall insert to a depth that puts end of top coil V. to Yz turn below the top surface of the tapped hole.

·'

### Page 144

Step 6: Tang break-off.

Select proper break-off tool. Tangs should be removed from all drilled through holes. In blind holes the tangs may be removed when necessary if enough hole depth is provided below the tang of the installed insert.

These are not to be considered specific instructions on heli-coil installation. The manufacturer's in­ struction must be followed when making an in­ stallation.

Heli-coils are available for the following threads:

unified coarse, unified fine, metric, spark plug and national taper pipe threads.

**REPAIR OF DAMAGED HOLES WITH ACRES**

FASTENER SLEEVES Acres fastener sleeves ·are thin wall, tubular, elements with a flared end. The sleeves are in­ stalled in holes to accept standard bolts and rivet type fasteners. The existing fastener holes are drilled %4 -inch oversize for installation of the sleeves. The sleeves are manufactured in one inch increments. Along their length grooves provide a place to break or cut off excess length to match fastener grip range. The grooves also provide a place to hold adhesive or sealing agents when bonding sleeve into the hole.

DRILi. TAP Advantages and Limitations The sleeves are used in holes which must be drilled %4 -inch oversize to clean up corrosion or other damage. The oversize hole with the sleeve installed allows the use of the original diameter fastener in the repaired hole. The sleeves can he used in areas of high galvanic corrosion where the corrosion must be confined to a readily replaceable part. Oversizing of holes reduces the net cross sectional area of a part and should not be done unless absolutely required.

The manufacturer of the aircraft, aircraft engine or aircraft component should be consulted prior to repair of damaged holes with acres sleeves.

Identification The sleeve is identified bv a standard code num­ ber (figure 6-16A) which represents the type and style of sleeve, a material code, the fastener shank diameter, surface finish code letter and grip tang for the sleeve. The type and material of the sleeve is represented by the basic code number.

The first dash number represents the diameter of the sleeve for the fastener installed and the second dash represents the grip length of the sleeve. The required length of the sleeve is determined on installation and the excess is broken off of the sleeve. A JK5512A-05N-IO is a 100° low profile head sleeve of aluminum ailoy. The diameter is for a %2 inch fastener with no surface finish and is % inch in length.

!:\STALL FIGURE 6-15. Heli-coil installation.

### Page 145

ACRES Basic SLEEVE TYPE Part Number ~ 1()0° ,509 Tension JK5610 Jfra<l Plus Flange trmm Protruding Head (Shear) JK5511 trrrrm 100° Low JK55I2 Profile Head Drnrn 100° Standard Profile Head JK5516 (509 Type) ~ Protruding JK5517 Head (Tension) Cmrm 100° Oversize Tension Head JK55J3 (1/64 Oversize Bolt)

PART NUMBER BREAKDOWN JK5511 A 04 N 08 L j L"L" at end of part number indicates L_ cetyl alchol lubricant Length in sixteenth inch increments.

(Required instalJation length by breaking off at proper groove) SLEEVE BOLT @SLEEVE PART NO. SIZf: LENGTH JK5511( )04 ()() JK5512( )04 ( )() 1/8 8 JK5516( )04 ( )() JK5517( )04 ()() JK5511( )45 ()() JK5512 #6 a JK5516( )45 ( )() JK5517( )45 ()() JK5511()05 ()() JK5512( )05 ( )() 5/32 IO JK5516()05 ()() JK55! 7()05 ()() JK55IJ( )55 ( )() JK5512( )55 ( )() JK5516( )55 ()() #8 10 JK5517( )55 ()() JK51lIO( )55 ()() JK5511( )06 ()() JK5512( )06 ( )() JK5516( )06 ( )() JK5517()06 ()() #10 12 JK5610( )06 ( )() JK5511( )OB()() JK5512( )OB ( )() JK5516( )OB ( )() 1/4 16 JK5517( )OB()() JK5610( )OB ( )() JK5511()10 ()() JK5512( )10 ( )() JK5516( )10 ( )() 5/16 16 JK5517()10 ()() JK5610( )10 ( )() JK55IJ( )12 ( )() JK5512( )12 ( )() JK5516( )12 ()() 3/8 16 JK5517( )12 ( )() JK5610( )12 ( )( ) Surface Finish N = No finish ACRES SLEEVE FOR 1/64 OVERSIZE BOLT C = Chemical film per MIL-C-554) L------Fastener shank diameter in 32nds.

'--------Material code (D '-----------Basic part number

MATERIAL MATERIAL CODE 5052 Aluminum alloy (1/2 hard) A 6061 Aluminum alloy (T6 condition) B A286 Stainless steel (passivate) C SLEEVE BOLT ® SLEEVE PART NO. (i] SIZE LENGTH JK5533( )06 ( )() 13/64 12 JK5533( )08 ( )( ) 17/64 16 JK5533( )10 ( )() 21/64 18 JK5533( )12 ( )( ) 25/24 16 NOTES @ Acres ·sleeve, JK5533 1/64 oversi:te available in A286 steel only.

@) Acres sleeve length in sixteenth inch increments.

FIGURE 6-16A. Acres sleeve identification.

139 . '

### Page 146

. / ....

**HOLE PREPARATION FOR 1/64 OVERSIZE BOLT**

**BOLT DRILL DRILL SIZE NO. DIA.**

13/64 7/32 0.2187 17/64 9/32 0.2812 21/64 11/32 0.3437 25/84 13/32 0.4062

**HOLE PREPARATION**

**STANDARD CLOSE**

**FIT FIT**

**BOLT DRILL DRILL DRILL DRILL SIZE NO. DIA. NO. DIA.**

1/8 9/64 0.1406 28 0.1405 #6 23 0.1540 24 0.1520 5/32 11/64 0.1719 18 0.1695 #8 15 0.1800 16 0.1770 #10 5 0.2055 6 0.2040 1/4 14 0.2660 17/64 0.2656 5/16 21/64 0.3281 3/8 25/84 0.3908 I INSTALLATION PROCEDURE!

A. DRILL OUT CORROSION OR DAMAGE TO EXIST!1'/G HOLE TO 1/84 OVERSIZE.

**B. SELECT PROPER TYPE AND LENGTH ACRES SLEEVE FOR EXISTING FASTENER.**

**C. BOND SLEEVE IN STRUCTURE HOLE WITH MIL-S-8802 CLASS A 1/2 SEALANT.**

Existing Fastenrr Acres SleeV(' Strudur.·

ACRES SLEEVE INSTALLATION FIGURE 6-I6B. Acres sleeve identification.

Hole Preparation See figure 6-16 for drill number for standard or close lit holes. Inspect hole after drilling to assure all corrosion is removed before installing the sleeve. The hole must also be the correct shape and free from burrs. The countersink must be enlarged to receive the flare of the sleeve so the sleeve is flush with the surrounding surface.

lnstollation After the correct type and diameter sleeve have been selected, use the 6501 sleeve breakoff tool for final installation length. See figure 6-16B for the sleeve breakoff procedure. The sleeve may be in­ stalled with or without being bonded in the hole.

When bonding the sleeve in a hole, use MIL-S- 8802Al/2 sealant. Reinstall original size fastener and torque as required.

Sleeve Removal Sleeves not bonded in the hole may be removed by either driving them out with a drift pin of the same diameter as the outside diameter of the sleeve or they may be deformed and removed with a pointed tool. Bonded sleeves may be removed by this method, but care should be used not to damage the structure hole. If this method cannot be used, drill the sleeves out with a drill 0.004 to 0.008 smaller than the installation drill size. The re· maining portion of the sleeve after drilling can be removed using a pointed tool and applying an adhesive solvent to the sealant.

### Page 147

Gls,ud Detachable I ' ~ --~art . I ~Grommet 1'----------------J' ---- \= ~=1~~:~d ~ g g spring and rivets Stud assembly Cut-away view of complete Dzus assembly -j Jj Spring assembly FIGURE 6-17. Dzus fastener.

TURNLOCK FASTENERS Turnlock fa8teners are use<l to secure inspection plates, doors, and other removable panels on air­ craft. Turnlock fasteners are also referred to by such terms as quick-opening, quick-action, and stressed-panel fasteners. The most desirable fea­ ture of these fasteners is that they permit quick and easy removal of access panels for inspection and servicing purposes.

Turnlock fasteners are manufactured and sup­ plied by a number of manufacturers under various trade names. Some of the most commonly used are the Dzus, Camloc, and Airloc.

Dzus Fasteners The Dzus turnlock. fm;tener consists of a stud, grommet, and receptacle. Figure 6-17 illustrates an installed Dzus fastener and the various parts.

The grommet is made of aluminum or aluminum alloy material. It acts as a holding device for the stud. Grommets can be fabricated from 1100 aluminum tubing, if none are available from normal sources.

The spring is made of steel, cadmium plated to 141 prevent corrosion. The spring supplies the force that locks or secures the stud in place when two assemblies are joined.

The studs are fabricated from steel and are cadmium plated. They are available in three head styles; wing, flush, and oval. Body diameter, length, and head type may he identified or de­ termined by the markings found on the head of the stud. (See figure 6-18.) The diameter is always measured in sixteenths of an inch. Stud length is measured in hundredths of an inch and is the distance from the head of the stud to the bottom of the spring hole.

A quarter of a turn of the stud (clockwise) locks the fastener. The fastener may he unlocked only by turning the stud counterclockwise. A ~ ~ F - Flush head l ~ 6~Body diameter in I6th's of an inch .50 - Length ( 50/l()Oth's of an inch) FIGURE 6-18. Dzus identification.

### Page 148

. ..: ' "'-._stud assembly Receptacle FIGURE 6--19. Camloc fastener.

Dzus key or a specially ground screwdriver locks or unlocks the fastener.

Camloc FC1steners Camloc fasteners are made in a variety of styles and designs. Included among the most commonly used are the 2600, 2700, 40S51, and 4002 series in the regular line, and the stressed.panel fastener in the heavy-duty line. The latter is used in stressed panels which carry structural loads.

The Camloc fastener is used to secure aircraft cowlings and fairings. It consists of three parts;

a stud assembly, a grommet, and a receptacle.

Two types of receptacles are available, the rigid type and the floating type. Fignre 6-19 illustrates the Camloc fastener.

The stud and grommet are installed in the removable portion; the receptacle is riveted to the structure of the aircraft. The stud and grommet are installed in either a plain, dimpled, counter- 142 sunk, or counterbored hole, depending upon the location and thickness of the material involved.

A quarter turn (clockwise) of the stud Jocks the fastener. The fastener can he unlocked only by turning the stud counterclockwise.

Airlcc Fasteners The Airloc fastener shown in figure 6--20 con~ sists of three parts, a stud, a cross pin, and a stud receptacle. The studs are manufactured from steel and case hardened to prevent excessive wear. The stud hole is reamed for a press fit of the cross pin.

The total amount of material thickness to be secured with the Airloc fastener must he known before the correct length of stud can he selected for installation. The total thickness of material that each stud will satisfactorily lock together is stamped on the head of the stud in thousandths of an inch (.040, .070, .190, etc.). Studs are manu­ factured in three head styles; flush, oval, and wing .

Installed fastener Stud receptacles Studs ;;

Cross pin FIGURE 6-20. Airloc fastener.

### Page 149

1/8-3/8 Diameter 7 X 19 ----r--------- 7 strands, 19 wires to each strand Diameter ____ l_ ------- 1116 - 3132 Diameter 7 X 7 Diameter 7 strands, 7 wires to each strand ____ l _____ _ FIGURE 6--21. Cable cross sections.

The cross pin (figure 6-20) is manufactured from chrome-vanadium steel and heat treated to provide maximum strength, wear, and holding pGWer. It should never be used the second time;

once removed from the stud, it should he replaced with a new pin.

Receptacles for Airloc fasteners are manufac­ tured in two types, rigid and floating. Sizes are classified by numher-N o. 2, No. 5, and No. 7.

They are also classified by the center-to-center distance between the rivet holes of the receptacle:

No. 2, %' inch; No. 5, 1 inch; and No. 7, 1% inch.

Receptacles are fabricated from high-carbon, heat­ treated steel. An ·upper wing assures ejection of the stud when unlocked and enables the cross pin to he held in a locked position between the upper wing, cam, stop, and wing detent, regardless of the tension to which the receptacle is subjected.

CONTROL CABLES Cables are the most widely used linkage in primary Hight control systems. Cable-type linkage is also used in ~ngine controls, emergency exten­ sion systems for the landing gear, and various other systems throughout the aircraft.

Cable-type linkage has several advantages over the other types. It is strong and light in weight, and its flexibility makes it easy to route through the aircraft. An aircraft cable has a high me­ chanical efficiency and can be set up without back­ lash, which is very important for precise control.

143 Cable linkage also has some disadvantages.

Tension must he adjusted frequently due to stretching and temperature changes.

Aircraft control cables are fabricated :from car­ bon steel or stainless steel.

Cable Construction The basic component of a cable is a wire. The diameter of the wire determines the total diameter of the cable. A number of wires are preformed into a helical or spiral shape and then formed into a strand. These preformed strands are laid around a straight center strand to form a cable.

Cable designations are based on the number of strands and the number of wires in each strand.

The most common aircraft cables are the 7 X 7 and 7 X 19.

The 7 X 7 cable consists of seven strands of seven wires each. Six of these strands are laid around the center strand (see figure 6-21). This is a cable of medium flexibility and is used for trim tab controls, engine controls, and indicator controls.

The 7 X 19 cable is made up of seven strands of 19 wires each. Six of these strands are laid around the center strand (see figure 6--21). This cable is extra flexible and is used in primary control systems and in other places where oper­ ation over pulleys is frequent.

Aircraft control cables vary in diameter, ranging . , ; '.'

The text continues at https://openairdocs.org/ac/65-9.md?from=150

---
OpenAirDocs.org is an independent research project of [Contrail Labs](https://contraillabs.com/). It is not affiliated with the FAA or the NTSB. Source documents are U.S. government works in the public domain.
